of GAGAN FERROTECH LIMITEDenvironmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/... · EIA/EMP REPORT for...

FINAL EIA/EMP REPORT

forMODIFICATION OF 0.4 MTPA to 0.3 MTPA

INTEGRATED STEEL PLANTof

GAGAN FERROTECH LIMITEDIKRA, JAMURIA INDUSTRIAL ESTATE, BURDWAN, WEST BENGAL

Accredited Consulting OrganizationGLOBAL TECH ENVIRO EXPERTS PVT. LTD.C-23, BJB NAGAR, BHUBANESWAR-751014, ODISHA, PH. NO.-0674-2433487EMAIL- [email protected]

NABET ACCREDITATED CATEGORY “A” CONSULTANT

SL. NO.- 77

Accredited LaboratoryKALYANI LABORATORIES PVT. LTD.PLOT NO. 78/944, BALIANTA, PAHAL, BHUBANESWAR, ODISHAMoEF&CC ACCREDITATION NO. 125 FOR THE PERIOD OF 06.08.2014 TO 05.08.2019NABL ACCREDITATION NO. TC-7043FOR THE PERIOD OF 16.03.2017 TO 15.03.2020

SEPTEMBER-2018

mailto:[email protected]

EIA/EMP Report of M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd Integrated steel modification project,

At- Jamuria Industrial Estate, P.O-Ikra, Dist- Paschim-Burdwan, West Bengal

1 Global Tech Enviro Experts Pvt. Ltd.




TABLE OF CONTENTS

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................... 18

CHAPTER-1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 28

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................. 28

1.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................... 28 1.2 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT ..................................................................................................................... 28 1.3 IDENTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT: ................................................................ 29 1.4 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT: ....................................................................................................... 29

1.4.1 Location of the project .................................................................................................................. 29 1.4.2 Nature & Size of the Project .......................................................................................................... 29 1.4.3 Importance of the project to the Country and Region ....................................................................... 29 1.4.4 National Steel Policy: .................................................................................................................... 30 1.4.5 Global Steel Scenario: ................................................................................................................... 30 1.4.6 Domestic Scenario: ............................................................................................................................. 30 1.4.7 The World Scrap Scenario: ............................................................................................................ 31

1.5 SCOPE OF THE STUDY (AS PER TERMS OF REFERENCE) ................................................................................. 31 1.6 LITIGATION/COURT CASE AGAINST THE COMPANY .............................................................................. 32 1.7 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT:.......................................................................................................................... 33

CHAPTER-2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 34

PROJECT DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................... 34

2.0 CONDENSED DESCRIPTION OF THOSE ASPECTS OF THE PROJECT LIKELY TO CAUSE ENVIRONMENTAL

EFFECTS. ............................................................................................................................................................ 34 2.1 TYPE OF PROJECT .................................................................................................................................. 34 2.2 NEED OF THE PROJECT .......................................................................................................................... 34 2.3 LOCATION (MAP SHOWING GENERAL LOCATION, SPECIFIC LOCATION, PROJECT BOUNDARY &

PROJECT SITE LAYOUT) ...................................................................................................................................... 34 2.3.1 LOCATION & SELECTION OF SITE .............................................................................................................. 34

2.3.2 Toposheet of Study area ............................................................................................................... 35 2.3.3 SITE SELECTION ............................................................................................................................ 36 2.3.4 LAND FORM, LAND USE AND LAND OWNERSHIP ......................................................................... 37

Table 2.1 A Land use Pattern of the project site (industrial estate) .......................................................................... 37 Table 2.1 B Land utilization of the core zone .............................................................................................................. 37

2.3.5 Project Layout .............................................................................................................................. 37 2.4 SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION (INCLUDING ASSOCIATED ACTIVITIES REQUIRED BY OR FOR THE PROJECT) .... 38

2.4.1 Project Configuration & Product mix ................................................................................................... 38 Table 2.2 Project configuration & product mix .................................................................................................... 38

2.5 TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESS DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 39 2.6 PROJECT DESCRIPTION INCLUDING DRAWINGS SHOWING PROJECT LAYOUT, COMPONENTS OF

PROJECT ETC. SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF THE FEASIBILITY DRAWING WHICH GIVES INFORMATION

IMPORTANT FOR EIA PURPOSE ......................................................................................................................... 39 Table 2.3 Design Parameters of Induction Furnace.............................................................................................. 43

2.7 MATERIAL BALANCE: ............................................................................................................................. 44 2.8 ANNUAL RAW MATERIAL INVENTORY ......................................................................................................... 47

Table 2.4 Annual gross material requirement, likely source and mode of transport ........................................... 47 2.9 POWER REQUIREMENT ......................................................................................................................... 50

Table 2.5 Power requirement for the unit after expansion.................................................................................. 50 2.10 WATER REQUIREMENT ......................................................................................................................... 51 2.11 OTHER UTILITIES ................................................................................................................................... 52 2.12 SOLID WASTE GENERATION AND ITS MANAGEMENT ........................................................................... 52

Table 2.6 Solid Waste Inventory ................................................................................................................................. 52




2.13 MANPOWER REQUIREMENT ................................................................................................................. 53 2.14 ESTIMATED PROJECT COST& TIME OF COMPLETION ............................................................................ 53

2.14.1 Time of completion of the expansion project ............................................................................... 54 2.15 DESCRIPTION OF MITIGATION MEASURES INCORPORATED INTO THE PROJECT TO MEET

ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS, ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING CONDITIONS OR OTHER EIA REQUIREMENTS

(AS PER REQUIRED SCOPE) ................................................................................................................................ 55 2.16 ASSESSMENT OF NEW & UNTESTED TECHNOLOGY .......................................................................... 55 2.17 CONCLUSION : ....................................................................................................................................... 55

IN CONCLUSION OF THE TECHNOLOGY PROCESS, RAW MATERIAL USE, THE POWER CONSUMPTION IN THE

PLANT, THE PRESENT ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS HAS TO BE ADDRESSED. THE SAME HAS BEEN COVERED IN

THE SUCCEEDING CHAPTER AS DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT. .......................................................... 55

CHAPTER-3 ..................................................................................................................................................... 56

DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................ 56

3.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................... 56 3.2 STUDY AREA, PERIOD & COMPONENTS ................................................................................................ 56

3.2.1 STUDY AREA .................................................................................................................................. 56 3.2.2 STUDY PERIOD .............................................................................................................................. 56 3.2.3 COMPONENTS ............................................................................................................................... 56

3.3 SITE CONNECTIVITY ............................................................................................................................... 57 Fig 3.1 Project site connectivity .................................................................................................................................. 57

3.4 TOPOGRAPHY ....................................................................................................................................... 58 Table 3.1 Land utilization pattern of expansion project including existing. ......................................................... 59 Fig 3.7 Pie Chart showing the land use pattern of the core zone .............................................................................. 59 Table 3.2 Land Use Pattern in Buffer Zone ................................................................................................................. 60 Table 3.3 List of major industries with name, type, distances and direction within study area of project site. ......... 62

3.6 ESTABLISHMENT OF BASE LINE ............................................................................................................. 63 3.6.1 GEOLOGY ...................................................................................................................................... 63 3.6.2 GEO HYDROLOGY .......................................................................................................................... 64 3.6.3 DRAINAGE SYSTEM ....................................................................................................................... 66

Table 3.4 Ground water Sampling Location ......................................................................................................... 67 Table 3.5 Ground Water Quality in study area ..................................................................................................... 68 Table 3.6 Surface water Sampling Location ......................................................................................................... 70 Table 3.7 Surface Water Quality in study area ..................................................................................................... 71

3.6.4 GEOMORPHOLOGY ....................................................................................................................... 72 3.6.5 AIR ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................................................................... 72

Table-3.8 Temperature Profile of the Study Area. ...................................................................................................... 72 Table-3.9: Maximum and Minimum Humidity of the Study Area ............................................................................... 72 Table- 3.10: Rainfall Pattern in the Region ................................................................................................................. 73 Table-3.11: Summarized Meteorological Data at site. ........................................................................................... 74

3.6.6 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY .................................................................................................................. 75 Table 3.12 Monitored parameters and frequency of sampling .................................................................................. 76 Table 3.13 Techniques used for ambient air quality analysis ..................................................................................... 76 Table- 3.14: Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations ........................................................................ 77 Table 3.15 A Summarized Ambient Air Quality data .................................................................................................. 80 Table 3.15 B Summarized Ambient Air Quality data ................................................................................................... 81

3.6.7 NOISE ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................................. 82 Table 3.16: Details of Noise Level Monitoring Locations ............................................................................................ 84 Table-3.17 Noise Level in the Study Area ............................................................................................................... 85

3.6.8 SOIL PARAMETERS ........................................................................................................................ 85 Data Generation ........................................................................................................................................... 85

Table-3.18 Soil Locations in the Study Area............................................................................................................ 87 Soil Characteristics ........................................................................................................................................ 87

Table 3.19: The analyzed results of soil samples of the study area ............................................................................ 88




3.7 NATURAL HAZARD ................................................................................................................................ 89 3.8 TRAFFIC STUDIES ................................................................................................................................... 89

Interpretation of Traffic Survey Results ........................................................................................................ 91 3.9 ECOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT ................................................................................................................... 91

3.9.1 ECOLOGY OF THE AREA ................................................................................................................. 91 3.9.2 METHODOLOGIES ......................................................................................................................... 92

3.10 SOCIO-ECONOMIC SCENARIO ............................................................................................................... 97 3.10.1 OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY .......................................................................................................... 98 3.10.2 DEMOGRAPHIC PROFILE .............................................................................................................. 98

Sex Composition of the area ....................................................................................................................................... 99 Caste Composition of the Area ................................................................................................................................. 99 Caste Composition of Male & female ......................................................................................................................... 99

3.11 CONCLUSION ........................................................................................................................................... 101

CHAPTER-4 ................................................................................................................................................... 102

ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT & MITIGATION MEASURE ............................................................ 102

4.0 OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ASSESSMENT .................................................................................................. 102 4.1 DETAILS OF INVESTIGATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS DUE TO PROJECT LOCATION, POSSIBLE

ACCIDENTS, PROJECT DESIGN, PROJECT CONSTRUCTION, REGULAR OPERATIONS, FINAL DECOMMISSIONING

OR REHABILITATION OF A COMPLETED PROJECT. ........................................................................................... 103 4.1.1 Environmental Impacts Due To Project Location ........................................................................ 103 4.1.2 Environmental Impacts Due To Possible Accidents ..................................................................... 103 4.1.3 Environmental Impacts Due To Project Design ........................................................................... 103 4.2.1 Pollution Potential ............................................................................................................................. 104

4.3 METHODS USED FOR THE STUDY OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS ...................................................... 104 4.4 EVALUATION OF IMPACTS: ................................................................................................................. 105

Table 4.1 Parameter Impact Value of Environment Components ........................................................................... 107 Table 4.2 Impact Identification Matrix ..................................................................................................................... 108

4.5 IMPACT ASSESSMENT OF SIGNIFICANCE OF IMPACTS (CRITERIA FOR DETERMINING SIGNIFICANCE,

ASSIGNING SIGNIFICANCE) ............................................................................................................................. 110 4.5.1 CATEGORY OF IMPACT ................................................................................................................ 111 4.5.2 FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN DETERMINING IMPACT MAGNITUDE INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED

TO: 111 4.5.3 POLLUTION POTENTIAL .............................................................................................................. 112

Table 4.3 Sources and type of Pollution from the Proposed Project ........................................................................ 113 4.6 IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE: ........................................................................................ 113 4.7 MITIGATING MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE ................................................................. 116

Table 4.4 Action Plan for Excavation and Muck Disposal during Construction Phase. ............................................. 117 4.8 IMPACTS DURING OPERATIONAL PHASE ............................................................................................ 117

Table 4.5 Stack Inventory Data ................................................................................................................................. 119 Table 4.6 Input Meteorological data ........................................................................................................................ 120 Table 4.7 Assessment of GLC of pollutants without APC equipments ............................................................... 122 TSP for proposed scenario ........................................................................................................................................ 123

4.9 MITIGATION MEASURES DURING OPERATION PHASE ........................................................................ 125 Table 4.8 Assessment of GLC of pollutants with APC equipments ........................................................................... 127 Table 4.9 Solid Wastes utilization & disposal measures ........................................................................................... 128

4.10 IMPACT QUATIFICATION ..................................................................................................................... 129 4.11 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ............................................................................................ 130

EMP AT DESIGN STAGE ............................................................................................................................... 130 4.11.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLANT (EMP) AT CONSTRUCTION STAGE: ................................ 130 4.11.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLANT (EMP) AT OPERATIONAL PHASE .................................... 131

4.12 RAIN WATER HARVESTING .................................................................................................................. 137 Table 4.10 Rainfall & temperature data during monsoon season (June to Oct.) ..................................................... 137

4.13 MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENTS: ................................................................... 138




4.14 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................................................... 140 4.15 SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ..................................................................................................... 141

Table 4.11: Total Impact Score (TIS) for Project activities with EMP ........................................................................ 142 4.16 IRREVERSIBLE AND IRRETRIEVABLE COMMITMENTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS ................... 144 4.16 CONCLUSION ........................................................................................................................................... 144

CHAPTER-5 ................................................................................................................................................... 145

ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY & SITE) .................................................................................... 145

CHAPTER-6 ................................................................................................................................................... 146

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME .......................................................................................... 146

6.1 TECHNICAL ASPECTS OF MONITORING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF MITIGATION MEASURES .................. 146 6.2 ADVANTAGES OF MONITORING .............................................................................................................. 146 6.3 SAMPLING LOCATIONS ....................................................................................................................... 147 6.4 DATA ANALYSIS ...................................................................................................................................... 147 6.5 REPORTING SCHEDULE ....................................................................................................................... 147

Table-6.1 Monitoring schedule table for Environmental Parameters monitoring ................................................... 149 6.6 BUDGETORY PROVISIONS FOR EMP .................................................................................................... 150

Table 6.2 Investment towards EMP, Implementation & its yearly maintenance ..................................................... 150 Table 6.3 CREP compliance ....................................................................................................................................... 151

CHAPTER 7 ................................................................................................................................................... 153

ADDITIONAL STUDIES .................................................................................................................................. 153

7.1 RISK ASSESSMENT & DISASTER MANAGEMENT: ....................................................................................... 153 7.2 OBJECTIVES ........................................................................................................................................ 153 7.3 DEFINITION OF HAZARD & RISK ........................................................................................................... 154 7.4 IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS ............................................................................................................. 154

Table 7.1 Hazard Identification of the Proposed Steel Plant .................................................................................... 154 7.5 RISK EVALUATION ............................................................................................................................... 155

Table 7.2 – Determination of Risk Potential ............................................................................................................. 155 Table7.3: Environmental Risk Potential Evaluation .................................................................................................. 156 Table 7.4 Hazard Identification & Risk Assessment .................................................................................................. 159

7.6 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN .......................................................................................................... 163 Table 7.5 Manpower to be in position ............................................................................................................... 163

7.7 IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS: ............................................................................................................ 164 Table 7.6 Hazard Identification in various facilities .................................................................................................. 164

7.7.1 IDENTIFICATION OF MOST CREDIBLE HAZARD SCENARIOS ........................................................ 165 7.8 SILENT HOUR COMMAND STRUCTURE ............................................................................................... 167 7.9 ROLE OF KEY PERSONS ........................................................................................................................ 167

7.9.1 WORKS MAIN CONTROLLER: ....................................................................................................... 167 7.9.2 SITE INCIDENT CONTROLLER: ...................................................................................................... 168 7.9.3 COMBAT TEAM LEADER .............................................................................................................. 168 7.9.4 RESCUE TEAM LEADER ................................................................................................................ 168 7.9.5 AUXILIARY TEAM LEADER ........................................................................................................... 169

7.10. ACTION PLAN FOR ON-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN ...................................................................................... 169 7.11 ACTIVATION & CLOSING PROCEDURE FOR ON-SITE EMERGENCY ..................................................... 170 7.12 DUTIES OF SUPERVISORS AND MANAGERS: ....................................................................................... 171 7.13 DUTIES OF WORKERS/EMPLOYEES IN GENERAL (PUBLIC) .................................................................. 172 7.14 ASSEMBLY POINTS/GATES:................................................................................................................. 172 7.15 FACILITIES AVAILABLE TO COMBAT ..................................................................................................... 172 7.16 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH ..................................................................................................................... 174

7.16.1 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH HAZARD ............................................................................................. 174 7.16.2 EXPOSURE LIMITS ...................................................................................................................... 176




7.16.3 FIRST AID MEASURES ................................................................................................................. 176 7.16.4 EXPOSURE CONTROLS AND PERSONAL PROTECTION ................................................................. 177

Table 7.7 Health Hazard in Major Industries ............................................................................................................ 178 7.17 OUTCOME OF SIA STUDY ................................................................................................................ 179

7.17.1 CSR PLANNING ........................................................................................................................... 179 (a) Self-Help Groups (SHG’s) ................................................................................................................. 180 (b) Supports Social Welfare Organizations ........................................................................................... 180 (c) Healthcare Projects ......................................................................................................................... 180 (D) Livelihood Programme:- .................................................................................................................. 180 (E) Infrastructure development ............................................................................................................ 181 7.17.2 PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN ............................................................................................ 181 7.17.3 CONTINUING ACTIVITIES ............................................................................................................ 181 7.17.4 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR IMPLEMENTATION .......................................................................... 181 7.17.5 CORPORATE SOCIAL POLICY DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................. 182 7.17.6 IMPLEMENTATION METHODOLOGY TO ADOPT ........................................................................ 182 7.17.7 CSR REPORTING AND SHOWCASING .......................................................................................... 183

7.18 PUBLIC HEARING: .................................................................................................................................... 184 Compliance to Public Hearing MoM ......................................................................................................................... 196

7.18 CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT RESPONSIBILITY .................................................................................... 197 7.18 CONCLUSION: ..................................................................................................................................... 198

CHAPTER-8 ................................................................................................................................................... 199

PROJECT BENEFIT ......................................................................................................................................... 199

8.1 PROJECT BENEFIT ...................................................................................................................................... 199 8.2 INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................................................ 200 8.3 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL .................................................................................................................. 201 8.4 REVENUE GENERATION TO CENTRAL & STATE GOVERNMENT ........................................................... 201

CHAPTER-9 ................................................................................................................................................... 202

ENVIRONMENT COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS ..................................................................................................... 202

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (ADMINISTARATIVE) ..................................................................... 203

10.1 EMP IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING ....................................................................................... 203 10.2 METEOROLOGY ................................................................................................................................... 203 10.3 EMISSIONS AND AIR QUALITY ............................................................................................................. 203 10.4 DRAINAGE SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................. 203 10.5 WATER QUALITY ................................................................................................................................. 203 10.6 NOISE LEVEL ........................................................................................................................................ 204 10.7 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH ..................................................................................................................... 204 10.8 LABORATORY FACILITIES ..................................................................................................................... 204 10.9 UPDATING OF EMP ............................................................................................................................. 204 10.10 ORGANISATION AND MANPOWER ................................................................................................. 204 10.11 FUNCTIONS OF EMP CELL ...................................................................................................................... 209

SUMMARY & CONCLUSION .......................................................................................................................... 211

CONSULTANT PROFILE ................................................................................................................................. 218




COMPLIANCE TO ToR CONDITIONS VIDE LETTER NO J-

11011/232/2008-IA-II (I) dt 23rd May 2017

Sl.No ToR Conditions Action Taken in EIA & EMP Report

Standard ToR CHAPTERS BRIEF DESCRIPTION

1 Executive Summary

The Executive Summary includes the desired configuration, technical details, present environmental status , Impact, Environmental Management Plan along with budgetary provisions. The details are enclosed in page 18-27.

2 Introduction

i. Details of the EIA consultant including NABET Accreditation

CH 12

The consultant for this project is M/s Global Tech Enviro Experts Pvt Ltd., Bhubaneswar. They are NABET accreditated “ A” Category Consultant. Details of the consultant has been given in Chapter - 12 at page no 273-276.

ii. Information about the project proponent CH 1

Mr. Vinay Kumar Agarwal is the owner of this project. He has about 15 years of experience in Steel production. Detailed information is provided in Para 1.3 of Chapter - I page no 29.

iii. Importance and benefits of the project CH 1

The project is located in Jamuria Industrial Estate approved by MoEFCC and Govt. of West Bengal. Given in Para 1.4.3 of Chapter - 1 page no 29-31.

3 Project Description

i. Cost of project and time of completion. CH 2

The approximate cost of the project is 100 crores. The tentative completion time is 425 days. The details are provided Para 2.14 of Chapter - 2 page no 65-67

ii Products with capacities for the proposed project

CH 2

The proposed project is a modification of existing project wherein the capcacity will be reduced from 0.4 MTPA steel production to 0.3 MTPA. The details of the configuration is provided in Para 2.4.1 in table 2.2 of chapter - 2, Pg 46.

iii.

If Expansion project, details of existing products with capacities and whether adequate land is available for expansion, reference of earlier EC if any.

The proposed project is a reduction in the total capacity. The project proposes to replace 1X35 T EAF with 2X20 T IF and an additional 1X350 TPD DRI Kiln. The total Configuration with present status & after expansion has been given in Para 2.4.1 in table 2.2 of chapter - 2. Total land available for the project is 18.85 ha which is sufficient to accommodate existing & modification project.

iv List of raw materials required and their source along with mode of transportation .

CH 2 The major raw Materials are Iron Ore, Coal , Pig Iron & Manganese Ore. The details of their procurement, their source and mode of transportation is explained in Para 2.8 in table no 2.4 of chapter - 2 page no 56-57.

v Other chemicals and materials required with quantities and storage capacities

CH 2




vi Details of emission, effluents, hazardous waste generation and their management.

CH 7

The existing plant had 4 no. of stacks attached to DRi Kilns and IF. The proposed modification will have additional 4 no. of stacks attached to DRI Kiln, IF, SAF & CPP. The detail is given in table 4.5. 2296 m3/day of waste water is generated which is treated in ETP and reused in the process. Detailed water balance diagram & Schematic diagram of ETP is provided para 2.10 in chapter-2. There is no hazardous waste generated from the process. However, small amount of hazardous wastes like Spent Oil, ETP Sludge & Oil filters will be generated. The detail management plan is given as per para 4.9 page 178-179.

vii

Requirement of water, power, with source of supply, status of approval, water balance diagram, man-power requirement(regular and contract)

CH 2

1077 m3/day of fresh water will supplied by Jamuria Municipality. 24 MW of additional power will be supplied by DVC. Total manpower requirement is 250 both regular & contract Permission letter with water balance diagram is given in para 2.9 to 2.13 page no 59-63. The permission letters are annexed as Annexure VII.

viii

Process description along with major equipments and machineries, process flow sheet (quantitative) from raw material to products to be provided.

CH 2

Process description along with major equipments and machineries, process flow sheet (quantitative) from raw material to products has been given in para 2.6, fig 2.4 of Chapter - 2 page 48-53.

ix Hazard identification and details of proposed safety system

CH 7

Hazard identification & Risk Analysis with safety system proposed for th project has been illustrated in para 7.5.1 in table - 7.4 in chapter - 7, 208-211

x

Expansion/modernisation proposals:

a. Copy of all the environmental Clearance(s) including Amendments thereto obtained for the project from MoEF / SEIAA shall be attached as an Annexure. A certified copy of the latest Monitoring Report of the regional Office of the Ministry of Environment and forests as per circular dated 30th may, 2012 on the status of compliance of conditions stipulated in all the existing environmental clearances including Amendments shall be provided. In addition, status of compliance of consent to operate for the ongoing existing operation of the project from SPCB shall be attached with the EIA- EMP report.

EC was granted on 11.03.2015 vide letter no 11011/232/2010-IA-II(I). Certified monitoring report from Regional Office, MoEF depicts that PAs have complied to all the conditions stated in EC. The details are attached as Annexure I CTO is granted for the existing plant and is valid till 30.06.2023 vide letter No. CO110117 from SPCB, WB.




b. In case the existing project has not obtained environmental clearance, reasons for not taking EC under the provisions of the EIA Notification 1994 and/ or EIA Notification 2006 shall be provided. Copies of consent to establish/ No objection Certificate and consent to operate (in case of units operating prior to EIA Notification 2006, CTE and CTO of fy 2005-2006 ) obtained from the SPCB shall be submitted. Further, compliance report to the further, compliance report to the conditions of consents from the SPCB shall be submitted.

Not Applicable

4 Site details

i

Location of the project site covering village, Taluka/ Tehsil, District and state, justification for selecting the site, whether other sites were considered.

CH 2

The project is located in Jamuria Industrial Estate approved by MoEFCC under Ikra village of Burdwan District of West Bengal. Location of the project with all details has been given in para 2.3 of Chapter - 2 , & in Chapter - 5 .No alternate site was considered as the proposed project is the modification of the existing.

ii

A topo sheet of the Study area of radius of 10 km and site location on1:50:000/1:25:000 scale on an A3/A2 sheet.(including all eco sensitive areas and environmentally sensitive places).

CH 2

The project comes under Survey of India Toposheet no F45D2. Site location is given in para 2.3.2 in Fig - 2.2 of chapter - 2 page 38-39.

iii Co –ordinates (lat-long) of all 4 corner of the site.

CH 2

The area extends from from 230 41’ 47.87’’ N to 230 41’ 24.03’’ N, and: 870 07’ 04.59’’ E to 870 06’ 57.29’’ E, with 105m AMSL .Table of boundary coordinates along with google map is in ch- 2 page no 36-37, Fig - 2.1.

iv Google map- Earth downloaded of the project site

v

Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as proposed unit indicating storage area, plant area, green belt area, utilities etc. If located within an industrial area / Estate /Complex, lay out of industrial area indicating location of unit within the industrial area

CH 2

Lay out map showing existing unit in blue color & proposed units in pink color with all the facilities is given in Fig - 2.3 of ch - 2. page 43-45

vi

Photographs of the proposed and existing (if applicable) plant site. If existing, show photographs of plantation/ green belt, in particular.

CH 3

Photographs of existing facilities in 10.94 ha & Green Belt plantation in 5.3 ha with its direction is provided in para 3.2.3 under site description in ch- 3 page no 73-74.

vii

Land use break-up of total land of the project site( identified and acquired), Gov./ pvt.- Agricultural, forest, wasteland , water bodies, settlements, etc shall be included.(not required for industrial area)

CH 3

Total land available for the project is 18.85 ha which has been acquired by the proponent. Land schedule with land use breakup is given in para 2.3.4 table 2.1 in chapter - 2 page no 41.

viii A list of major industries with name and type within study area (10km radius) shall be incorporated. Land use details of the study area

CH 3

The project is located in Industrial Estate surrounded by 18 nos. of Steel & Cement Industries within 10 km radius. The list of industries is given in table no - 3.3 in ch - 3 page no 82.

ix Geological features and Geo hydrological status of the study area shall be included.

CH 3

Geologically the project falls in Panchmarhi formations constituted of sandstones and Raniganj coal seam. The geological & geohydrological features is provided in para 3.6.1 & 3.6.2 of ch- 3 in page no 83-89.




x

Details of the drainage of the project up to 5 km radius of study area. If the site is within 1km radius of any major river, peak and lean season river discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency based on peak rainfall data of the past 30 years. Details of the flood level of the project site and maximum flood level of the river shall all so be provided. (Mega green field projects)

CH 3

The nearest river is Ajay, about 7.0 km away from the site. The HFL is at a distance of 6.8 km from the site. 10 km radius Drainage, with description of the area has been provided in chapter 3 in para 3.6.3 from page 90-91. It is a brown field project.

xi

Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not complete, stage of acquisition process and expected time of complete possessions of the land.

CH 3

The company owns 18.85 ha of land for its existing and modification facilities. Total land has been acquired and converted to Industrial Land.Given in para 3.5 in chapter -3 page no 78.

xii R & R details in respect of land in line with state Govt policy.

CH 3 There was no settlement in acquired industrial land in Jamuria industrial estate. Hence R&R does not arise.

5 Forest & wild life Related issues(If applicable): The existing land on which modificaton is proposed has been alloted in Jamuria Industrial Estate. No forest land is involved in the project. i

Permission and approval for the use of forest land (forestry clearance), if any, and recommendations of the State Forest department.(If applicable)

ii

Land use map based on high resolution satellite imagery (GPS) of the proposed site delineating the forestland (in case of projects involving forest land more than 40 ha).

iii Status of application submitted for obtaining the stage 1forestry clearance along with latest status shall be submitted.

iv

The projects to be located within 10 km of the National parks, Sanctuaries, biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of wild Animals, the project proponent shall submit the map duly authenticated by chief wildlife Warden showing these features vis-a-vis the project location and the recommendations or comments of the chief wildlife Warden- thereon.

v

Wildlife Conservation plan duly authenticated by the chief Wildlife Warden of the state Government for conservation of schedule1 fauna, if any exists in the study area.

vi

Copy of application submitted for clearance under the wildlife (protection) Act, 1972, to Standing Committee of the national Board for Wildlife.

6 Environmental Status

i

Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project site-Specific micro-metrological data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind Speed and direction and rainfall

CH 3

Atmospheric inversion level at 7.00 am is 40m-80m & at 2.00 pm is 1000m-1150m. Inversion level using site specific temp., humidity, wind speed & direction is given in Ch - 3 from page no 109-110 under section 3.6.6




ii

AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for PM 10. PM 2.5, SO2, Nox, CO and other parameters relevant to the project shall be collected. The monitoring stations shall be based CPCB guidelines and take into account the pre-dominate wind direction, population Zone and sensitive receptors including reserved forests

CH 3

8 locations were identified as per windrose diagram and CPCB guidelines namely Belbad,Jambad,Shibdanga, Berala, Chakdola, Shibpurand Bagdiha. Major parameters like PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx ,CO and Minor parameters like Ammonia, Lead, Nickel were monitored and the details are illustrated in Table 3.15 from page no 111-113

iii

Raw data of all AAQ measured for 12 weeks of all stations as per frequency given in the NAQQM Notification of Nov. 2009 along with - min., max., average and 98% values for each of the AAQ Parameters from data of all AAQ Stations should be provided as an annexure to the EIA Report.

12 weeks Raw data of 8 AAQ locations as per NAAQM standard is Attached as Annexure II. The summarized values including max., min. and 98th percentile is given in table 3.15

iv

Surface water quality of nearby River (60 m upstream and downstream) and other surface drains at eight location as per CPCB/ MoEF& CC guidelines.

CH 3

8 loactions were identified in the buffer area including 2 loactions in 60m upstream and downstream of Ajay river as per CPCB guidelines. The locations are U/s & D/s of River Ajay, Jamuria pond, Nandi Pond, Sarthakpur pond, Ramsayar Pond, Ikra pond & Chakdola pond. The details are Given in Table 3.6 from page no 96-99 in ch - 3.

v Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of river identified by the CPCB/MoEF & CC.If yes give details

CH 3 No, The site does not fall near to any polluted stretch of river identified by CPCB / MoEF & CC.

vi Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8 locations shall be included

CH 3

Eight locations in Ikra, Topsi, Searsole, Jadudenga, Raniganj, Bahula, Jemari & Mondalpur were identified and the montoring results are Given in Table 3.5 from page no 91-95 in ch - 3.

vii Noise levels monitoring at minimum at 8 locations within the study area.

CH 3

8 Noise monitoring locations were identified within 3 km radius from the project site. The monitoring values were found to be within limits and the details are Given in para 3.6.7 in table 3.16 page no 117-117 in Ch - 3.

viii Soil characteristic as per CPCB guidelines. CH 3

Soil characteristics were monitored as per CPCB guidelines in 8 locations within the buffer area. Given in para 3.6.8 in table 3.18 page no 120-122 in Ch - 3.

ix

Traffic study of the area ,type of vehicles, frequency of vehicles for transportation of materials, additional traffic due to proposed project , parking arrangement etc

CH 3

Traffic study including the type of vehicles and their frequency was carried out in Ranisayer location for 7 days. The proposed project will impose additionl 48 PCU/hr on existing road. The existing road can withstand the additional load without traffic congestion. The details are given in para 3.8 in page no 123-127 in Ch - 3.

x

Detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) existing in the study area shall be given with special reference to rare, endemic and endangered species. If Schedule-1 fauna are found within the study area, a Wildlife Conservation plan shall be prepared and furnished.

CH 3

The detailed description of flora & Fauna with all the rare, endemic and endangered species is given in para 3.9 from page 129-134. As per the study report no Schedule -1 fauna was found within the study area.




xi Socio-economic status of the study area. CH 3 Given in para 3.10 in page no 134-138 in Ch - 3. Detailed SIA study is attached as annexure III

7 Impact Assessment and environment Management Plan

i

Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from the stack emission based on site-specific meteorological features. In case the project is located on a hilly terrain, the AQIP Modelling shall be done using inputs of the specific terrain characteristics for determining the potential impacts of the project on the AAQ. Cumulative impact of all sources of emissions (including transportation) on the AAQ of the area shall be well assessed. Details of the model used and the input data used for modelling shall also be provided. The air quality contours shall be plotted on a location map showing the location of project site, habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if any.

CH 4

AAQ modeling & Traffic modeling has been carried out using the site specific Micro Meterological data and the predicted GLC due to the same is stated under para 4.4 from page no 159-162 & 173-176. in ch - 4.

ii

Water quality modelling - in case , if the effluent is proposed to be discharged in to the local drain, then water quality Modeling study should be conducted for the drain water taking into consideration the upstream and downstream quality of water of the drain.

CH 4

Waste water generated from process shall be treated in the proposed ETP & STP and will be reused in the process. No Effluent will be discharged to local drains or outside the plant premises. SO, water quality modeling is not envisaged .The detail is given in Page 162

iii

Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products on the surrounding environment shall be assessed and provided. In this regard, Options for transport of raw materials and finished products and wastes (large quantities) by rail or rail-cum road transport or conveyor-cum-rail transport shall be examined.

CH 4

The impact of the transportation of raw materials and products has been assessed through Traffic modeillng for present & proposed scenario. EURO IV/V vehicles conforming to emission norms will be used for transportation. The details are provided in chapter - 4 in page no 163-170.

iv

A note on treatment of waste water from different plant operations, extent recycled and reused for different purpose shall be included. Complete scheme of effluent treatment. Characteristics of untreated and treated effluent to meet the prescribed standards of discharge under E (p) Rules.

CH 4

The details of waste water management & disposal is covered under para 4.11.2 & page 184-186. Schematic Diagram of ETP has also been provided. No effluent will be discharged outside. Waste water will be recycled and reused in process.

v Details of stack emission and action plan for control of emission to meet standards.

CH 4

The stack emissions are given in table 4.5 in page 156 which are used as model input for deriving the isopleth using ISCST 3 MODEL . Necessary pollution control equipment has been provided in the same table.

vi Measures for fugitive emission control CH 4 Primary & Secondary Fugitive emission source & control measures is given in para 4.9 page no 171-172 ch - 4.

vii

Details of hazardous waste generation and their storage, utilization and disposal. Copies of MOU regarding utilization of solid and hazardous wastes shall also be included. EMP shall include the concept of waste-minimization, recycle/reuse/recover techniques, Energy conservation, and natural resource conservation.

CH 4

Hazardous waste are used oil, cotton easte, empty barrels and oil filters. Hazardous wastes shall be given to authorized recyclers. Solid wastes inventory with their generation, storage & management practices is given under para 4.9 at page no 177-178. MoUs for Fly ash, Bottom Ash and DRI fly ash are attached as Annexure IV




viii Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per Fly Ash Notification, 2009. A detailed plan of action shall be provided.

CH 4

Fly Ash generation, storage & management practices is given under para 4.8 at page no 178. MoUs for Fly ash, Bottom Ash are attached as Annexure IV

ix

Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33% area i.e land with not less than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species, width of plantation, planning schedule etc. shall be included. The green belt shall be around the project boundary and a scheme for greening of the roads used for the project shall also be incorporated.

CH 4

Green belt has already been developed in 5.3 ha of land @ 1500 tress per hectare. Details of the Greenbelt development plan with the no. of trees, species, budget and area of plantation is provided in para 4.13 page no 188-189.

x

Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant site shall be submitted to harvest rainwater from the roof tops and storm water drains to recharge the ground water and also to use for the various activities at the project site to conserve fresh water and reduce the water requirement from other sources.

CH 4

Average rainfall in the area is 1300 mm. It ha been estimated that about 35,490 m3 of water can be harvested and used in plant. The details is provided under para 4.12 from page no 186-187

xi Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for environmental pollution control measures shall be included.

CH 6

The budgetary provisions for EMP is 400 lakhs with recurring cost of 40.2 lakhs. The details is given in table 6.3 with SEGREGATED OPEX & CAPEX. Page 200

xii Action plan for post-project environmental monitoring shall be submitted.

CH 6 The detail action plan along with monitoring schedule & frequency is illustrated in table 6.1 & 6.2 from page 198-199.

xiii

Onsite and offsite Disaster (natural and Man-made) Preparedness and Emergency Management plan including risk Assessment and damage control. Disaster management plan should be linked with district Disaster Management plan.

CH 7

The onsite & Offsite disaster management plan & Emergency plan is given in section 7.6 with the hirachy of commands & emergency command structures covered between 212-219

8 Occupational health

i

Details of existing occupational & safety hazards. What are the exposure levels of hazards and whether they are within permissible exposure level (PEL). If these are not within PEL, what measures the company has adopted to keep them within PEL so that the workers can be preserved.

CH 7

The details of identification Occupational Health Hazards & respective mitigation measures with PPE is been detailed in 7.16.1 from page no 224-228

ii

Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of worker. If the workers health is being evaluated by pre designed format, chest x-rays, audiometry, vision testing (far & near vision, color vision and any other ocular defect) ECG, during pre placement and periodical examinations give the details of the same. Details regarding last month analyzed data of above mentioned parameters as per age,sex duration of exposure and department wise.

CH 7

The health status with incident format alongwith a sample copy of health report has been provided under para 7.16.1 from page no 229

iii Annual report of health status of workers with special reference to occupational health and safety

Health checkup has been carried out & Analysis has been done for TC, DC, ESR, HB, FBS, LFT, KFT, UrineAnalysis,CXR,PFT,& ECG. Attached as Annexure V

iv Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of all contract and

CH 6 9 lakhs has been allocated under Management plan for Occupational Health and Safety. The




casual workers EMP cost is given under table 6.2 Pg 200

9 Corporate Environment Policy

i

Does the company have a well laid down environment policy approved by its Board of directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA report

CH 7

The environment policy including safety measures and standard operating procedures is exhibited in page no 258-260.

ii

Does the environment policy prescribe for standard operating process/ procedures to bring into focus any infringement / deviation / violation of the environmental or forest norms/conditions? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA

iii

What is the hierarchical system or administrative order of the company to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliances with the environmental clearance conditions? Details of the system may be given

CH 7

The heirachy for adminstrative control and reporting system is given in page no 261-263

iv

Does the company have system of reporting of non compliances/ violations of environmental norms to the board of directors of the company and / or shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting mechanism shall be detailed in the EIA report.

CH 7

The company have a system for reporting of Non compliances & their remedies to head of the Organization and stake holders. 263-264

10

Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to the labour force during construction as well as to the casual workers including truck drivers during operation.

CH 4

During construction period the existing infrasctructural facilities will be extended to labor force. The details with respect to sanitation & Hygine is detailed under para 4.6 at page no 152.

11 Enterprise Social Commitment(ESC)

i

Adequate funds(at least 2.5% of the project cost) shall be earmarked towards the Enterprise Social Commitment based on public Hearing Issues and item-wise details along with time bound action plan shall be included. Socio- economic development activities need to be elaborated upon.

CH 7

As per the issues raised during PH and the gas analysed in SIA study the company will spend 1 crore under CER activities. The details of distribution of budget is given under para 7.18 page 247-248.

12

Any litigation pending against the project and/ or any direction/ order passed by any Court of law against the project, If so, details thereof shall also be included. Has the unit received any notice under the section 5 of environment (protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Section of Air and water Acts? If so, Details thereof and compliance/ ATR to the notice(s) and present status of the case.

CH 1

There is no litigation pending against the company. Page 33

ADDITIONAL TORS FOR INTEGRATED STEEL PLANT

1 Iron ore/coal linkage documents along with the status of environmental clearance of iron ore and coal mines

M/s GFL obtains imported Coal from South Africa via ADANI and local Coal from Raniganj. The linkage document is attached as Annexure VI

2

Quantum of production of coal and iron ore from coal and iron ore mines and the projects they cater to. Mode of transportation to the plant and its impact

Not Applicable

The mode of transportationof raw material to the plant is both by rail & road which is been detailed with specific raw materials in table 2.4 at page 56.




3

For Large ISPs,a 3D view i.e DEM (Digital Elevation Model) for the area in10 km radius from the proposal site. MRL details of project site and RL of nearby source of water shall be indicated.

CH 3

A 3D model map has been provided in fig 3.2 of Ch - 3 71.

4

Recent land-use map based on satellite imagery. High-resolution satellite image data having 1m-5m spatial resolution like quickbird, ikonos, IRS P-6 pan sharpened etc.for the 10 km radius area from proposed site. The same shall be used for land used/land cover mapping of the area.

CH 3

High resolution multi spectral satellite Image namely LISS III has been considered for preparation of Land use map of the total which is provided in fig 3.8 & table 3.2 respectively page 80.

5

PM(PM10 AND PM2.5) present in the ambient air must be analysed for source analysis natural dust/RSPM generated from plant operations (trace elements) of PM10 to be carried over.

CH 4

The elemental analysis of PM10 & PM 2.5 has been carried out and the result is illustrated in Table 3.15 from page no 112-114

6 All stock piles will have to be on top of a stable liner to avoid leaching of materials to ground water .

CH 2

Storage of raw materials in covered stock piles & under cover shed are being given with photographs under the para of raw materials at page no 183.

7 Plan for implementation of the recommendation made for steel plants in the CREP guidelines.

CH 6 The CREP guideline compliance has beeen given in page 201-202 in table 6.4.

8 Plan for slag utilization. CH 4 Plan for Slag utilization is given under para 4.9 at page no 178.

9 Plan for utilization of energy in off gases (coke oven ,blast furnace).

CH 2

There is no provision of Coke oven or Blast furnace in the proposed modification. However the off gas from DRI kilns will be utilized for power generation.

10 System of coke quenching adopted with justification.

NA The project does not involve coke oven so system of Coke quenching is not applicable

11 Trace metals Mercury, Arsenic and Fluoride emissions in the raw material.

CH 2 Under para 2.8 the chemical analysis of coal & trace metals in iron ore, dolomite is given from page no 57-59.

12 Trace metals in waste material especially slag. CH 2

The occurrance of trace metals with their form of occurance in slag & fly ash is illustrated under para "trace elements in slag & Fly ash " at page no 64-65.

13 Trace metals in water CH 2

The water quality analysis has been carried out for both surface & ground water. However because the drawal source is Municipal Corportion, trace metal analysis for its water given in page 61

14 Details of proposed layout clearly demarcating various units CH 2

Lay out map showing existing unist & proposed units separately with all indexed lay outs has been given in Fig - 2.3 of ch - 2. page 43-45

15

Complete process flow diagram describing each unit, its process and operations along with material balance

CH 2

Process description along with major equipments and machineries, process flow sheet (quantitative) from raw material to products has been given in para 2.6, fig 2.4 of Chapter - 2 page 48-53. 16

Details on design and manufacturing for all the units

17

Details on environmentally sound technologies for recycling of Hazardous materials as per CPCB guidelines may be mentioned in case of handling scrap and other recycled materials.

CH 4

Hazardous waste generation, storage & management practices are been given under para 4.9 at page no 177-178. MoUs for Fly ash, Bottom Ash have been attached as Annexure IV




18 Details on requirement of energy and water along with its source and authorization. CH 2

The same has been given in para 2.9 to 2.13 page no 59-63

19 Details on toxic metal content in waste material and its composition and end use.

CH 2

The occurrence of trace metals with their form of occuerence in slag & fly ash is illustrated under para "trace elements in slag & Fly ash " at page no 64-65. 20

Detalis on toxic content (TCLP), composition and end use of slag

SPECIFIC TOR i

Specific water Consumption, Power Consumption and Pollution Load shall be reduced from present level.

CH 2

M/s GFL was granted permission for 1500 m3/day water from Jamuria Municipality and after modification 1077 m3/day will be required. Permission has been granted from DVC for 25 MVA

ii The project proponent shall plan for solar light system for all common areas, street lights, parking around project area and maintain the same regularly.

CH 2

Solar Lights and LED lights has been proposed in internal roads, Office areas and parking places. Details are given in Page 50

iii The project Proponent shall plan for LED lights in their offices and residential areas.

iv The PP may adopt any surrounding village and

submit a plan for development in terms of

greenbelt, water management, community

sanitation etc.

CH 7 Plan for plantation, sanitation and water management is covered under CER activites at Pg 197.




EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

ToR 1 Executive Summary

i) Project name and location

Proposed Modification of 0.4 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant of M/s. Gagan Ferrotech Ltd to 0.3

MTPASteel Plant by changing 1 x 35 Tons EAF to 1 x 350 TPD DRI kiln and 2x20 Ton Induction

Furnace. The existing plant is located on 18.85 ha land at Jamuria Industrial Estate in village-

Ikra, Dist-Paschim Burdwan , West Bengal. The project area extends from 230 41’ 47.87’’ N to

230 41’ 24.03’’ N, and: 870 07’ 04.59’’ E to 870 06’ 57.29’’ E, with 105m AMSL on Toposheet No-

73M/2 (F45 D2). No additional land will be required for the expansion units.

ii) Products & Capacities existing & proposed

Gagan Ferrotech Ltd, Jamuria has been granted EC to manufacture 0.4 MTPA finished steel vide

J-11011/232/2010-IA II (I), 11th March, 2015 with following Plant facilities. With the proposed

modification, the final product reduces to 0.3 MTPA finished steel.

Sl. No

Plant Facilities

Plant Facilities Existing Configuration (Prior to EC 11-3-2015)

Configuration for which EC obtained dated 11th Mar.2015 (including status of implementation)

Expansion Configuration

Final Configuration after expansion

Production After expansion TPA

1 DRI Kilns 4x100 TPD Nil 1x350TPD 4x100 TPD Sponge Iron 2,40.000 1x350 TPD

2 Induction Furnace with LF

2x20 T 1x20T (installed)

2x20T 5x20T Billet 3,20,000

3 Rolling mill 1x342 TPD Nil 1x1000 TPD (Capacity increase)

1x1000 TPD TMT rods & coils 3,00,000

4 SAF Nil 2x9 MVA (not installed)

Nil 2x9 MVA Fe-Mn, Si-Mn Max=38,200

5 EAF with LRF

Nil 1x35T (not installed)

Nil Deleted Nil

6 AOD Nil 1x30T (not installed)

Nil 1x30T Alloy steel

7 C C M - 2x3 strand (installed)

Nil 2x3 strand Billet for RM 3,20,000

8 CPP (WHRB)

8 MW Nil 8 MW

16MW

Power 16 MW

9 CPP(FBC) 4 MW 12 MW (not installed)

4 MW (Reduction by 8 MW)

8 MW Power 8 MW

Note:

1x35T EAF to be replaced by 2x20T IF,

1x350TPD DRI Kilns to be installed and

Capacity of Rolling mill to be enhanced to achieve 0.3MTPA TMT rods.

Proposal to add Fe-Cr as in the ToR to existing Fe-Mn & Fe-Si manufacturing has been dropped by

the proponent.




As additional power will be generated from proposed 1x350 DRI Kiln, AFBC capacity has been

proposed to be reduced but total captive power will remain unchanged 24 MW.

iii) a. Requirement of land

The project area comes under Jamuria Industrial Estate, Vill-Ikra, P.S-.Jamuria in Paschim Burdwan

district of West Bengal. This is an industrial land which was allotted to Gagan Feerrotech Ltd (Formerly

Gagan Commodities) during formation of Jamuria Industrial Estate. The company has in its possession

total 18.85 ha of land in which existing plant is running and modification is proposed to come up in

available vacant area of this land. This is an industrial barren land.

b. Requirement of Raw material with source of supply

Major Raw material inventory for project after expansion with source and mode of transportation is

estimated and given below.

Sl.

No

Name of Major Raw material Required gross

quantity in TPA

Likely source Mode of

Transportation

1 Hematite Iron Ore Lump/Pellet 3,96,000 Barbil, Odisha Rail

2 Non Coking Coal 3,88,500 Local market Rail

2 Imported & indegeneous coal 2,90,000 Import &

Raniganja

Rail/Ship

3 Coke 27,505 Raniganja Road

4 Dolo/Lime stone 23,000 Sundergarh Road

5 Mn Ore 68,750 Local Road

6 Pig Iron 1,08,000 Local Road

7 L D O for DRI/FBC Startup 90 KL Refinery outlet Road by Tanker

Other chemicals & materials required with quantities and storage capacity.

Sl No Item Description Unit Quantity Per Annum

1 D M Plant Resins Kg 200

2 Hydrochloric Acid Kl 26

3 Caustic Soda Kg 5000

c. Requirement of water

Total water requirement for the project (including expansion) will be 1077 m3/day. The permission for

1500 m3/day water has been obtained. Water will be supplied by Asansol Municipal Corporation.

d. Requirement of Power

Power requirement for the total project is 48 MW. M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd has proposed 24 MW CPP.

Therefore 24 MW power will be taken from DVC power for which Agreement has been made.

e. Requirement of Fuel

3,88,500 TPA Non coking Coal will be used as fuel in project. LDO requirement will be at every start up of

DRI Kiln. LDO/HFO requirement will be about 90 Kl per Annum

iv) Process description in brief

The plant proposes production of TMT rods, coils etc. through DRI-IF-LF-CCM-Rolling mill route. DRI kilns

will be indigenous Lurgi technology coal based direct reduction. Induction Furnace will melt charge

consisting DRI, Pig and Scrap: using eddy current of electricity. It will be medium frequency core less one.

Additives like Ferro alloys will add to give desired property to steel. Hot metals will be transferred to




Tundish of CCM for casting of billets. Billets in red hot stage above recrystallization temperature will be

fed to rolling mill.

With passage through size reduction apertures, rods of desired diameter will be produced. Red hot rods

will be passing through water bath for short time, so that surface will be quenched while core is still hot.

Temperature will be normalized with heat transfer from core to surface and stress will be released. Thus,

Thermo- Mechanically treated steel rod will be manufactured for sale.

v) Capital cost of the project, estimated time schedule

The total project cost for proposed expansion has been estimated as Rs 100 crore. This will include

pollution control equipments which will be installed. Time schedule of commissioning of the expansion

units is 24 months.

vi) Site selected for the project

The project is located at Ikra, Jamuria Industrial Estate, Burdwan. The modification has been proposed

in the acquired area where existing plant is running. It has well developed infrastructure like road

network, railway siding etc. No national park or wildlife sanctuary or eco sensitive zones or places of

archaeological importance are present within 15 km radius around the project and the site does not come

under critical polluted area. Hence alternate site has not been considered.

vii) Baseline Environmental data

For the preparation of EIA report a monitoring schedule covering winter season of the year was carried

out from Nov 2017 to Jan 2018. The impact identification started with collection of baseline data such as

existing ambient air quality, qualities of ground water, surface water, soil, noise level prevailing in the

area and meteorological parameters like temperature, humidity, wind speed and direction, cloud cover

etc.

Land

The general land use/land cover features of the buffer zone include settlements, agricultural land,

vegetation and forest, collieries both in use & disused, wasteland, water bodies, wet land, and industrial

land, infrastructure and others.

The study area contains both the rural and urban settlement. The settlement occupies about 15.02% of

the total area of the buffer zone.

Agriculture land of buffer zone is about 35.7%, followed by Industries of 11.00 %.

Water

Groundwater condition in the study area is good to very good. Ajay River is of high significance in the

region as it caters to the water requirements to most of the villages and the majority of the industrial

units in the region.

Annual avg. Rain fall project area being 1300mm and project area 18.85 ha there will be rain water

harvesting to meet summer supply to plant i.e. lean period of river Ajay.

The main drainage network of the study area includes River Ajay, River Damodar and canals. The

directions of flow of most of the rivers are controlled by slope which in general is from North to South

East as it was evident from the flow of the rivers in the study area.

Climate

Climate in the study region is generally dry and hot and is characterized with seasonal variations of temp.,

humidity, rainfall etc.

Summer is from March to June. South West monsoon brings rain to the area from mid June to September.

Post monsoon are October & November. November to February are winter in the area.




The area receives fairly good amount of rainfall from the southwest monsoon during June to September.

Light showers of rain occur during the months of October, November and sometimes in December also.

Annual Average rain fall is 1300 mm

Meteorological conditions In order to determine the micrometeorological conditions of the study area a temporary micro-

meteorological monitoring observatory was set up near the site. The average wind velocity found is 0.78

m/s and the calm period is 12.99%. Overall predominant wind direction has been from North-East

direction and North during winter season.

Ambient air

The study area represents mostly industrial environment. Air pollution in the project area is not bad

despite the presence of several polluting industry. The prominent sources of air pollution in the study

area are due to emission from industries, vehicular movement and domestic coal burning as fuel in some

parts of the study area.

During the study period, the concentrations of PM10 measured to vary between 80.4-58.4g/m3 at

different locations of the study area. The concentrations of PM2.5 varied between 38.6-27.4 g/m3 at

different locations of the study area. During the study period, the average levels of SO2 concentrations at

all location varied from 30.0-20.9 g/m3. The concentrations of NOX values varied between 28.6-13.7

g/m3 at different locations. The concentrations of CO value ranged between 463.8-358.6 µg/m3 at

different locations during the study period

Water quality The analytical results of surface water samples at different location for various parameters reveal that all

the parameters comply with IS: 2296 (Class ‘C’) standards indicating their suitability for drinking and

other purposes after conventional treatment followed by disinfection.

Similarly the analysis results of groundwater samples showed all the parameters are within the

prescribed limits as per IS: 10500 standards for drinking water.

Soil analysis

The study area analysis results of the soil parameters are within limits. The bulk density of the study area

ranges from 1.15-1.32 gm/cc. The other nutrient content like nitrogen, potassium and phosphate content

of the soil is very low indicating industrial land.

Flora and Fauna

Flora and Fauna of the study area reveals that no Schedule- I type of fauna found in the study area. In

faunal population; cattle, goats, dogs, rats, insects are common in the study area.

As per IUCN's "Red Data Book", none of the taxa found in this region could be marked as rare or endangered plant species.

Socio Economic

Demography

The socioeconomic features around the 10km radius of the plant site have been collected through

primary and secondary data collection. The study area covers containes 670 household and 3094

inhabitants. Out of the total population SC population is 55.5%, ST 7.0% and other 37.4%.

Literacy

The total literacy level of the study area is found to be 76%.The male literacy in the study area is found to

be 84% and the female literacy in the study area is found to be 67%, the difference in literacy rate

between male and female is found to be much wider therefore female education needs emphasis in CER

consideration.




Medical facilities

Medical facility of the area is also poor. Therefore, Health checkup of local people is to be carried out at

regular intervals with free medicine distribution.

viii) Identification of Hazard in handling, processing and Storage of material and safety systems

provided.

The major on-site emergency situation may occur from the coal storage and handling, molten metal and

slag handling, acids and alkali storage and handling and electrical short-circuits. There will be no off-site

risk. The project is located in an industrial area away from human habitation, school, hospital, jail, etc

(within 1 km areaof the site). All plant and equipment machinery will be procured from reputed vendors.

Proper safety equipment will be provided to the workers and proper standard operating procedure will

be followed during handling and processing hazardous material.

ix) Likely Impact of the project on air, water, land, flora fauna

Air Environment:

The maximum ground level concentration of PM, SO2 and NOx from the expansion unit (after installation

of APC systems) will be 0.012 µg/m3 for PM10, 0.01 µg/m3 for PM2.5 and 36.7 µg/m3 for SO2 The

baseline concentration of PM10, PM2.5, NOx & SO2 are 86.2 µg/m3 , 44.0 µg/m3 , 29.2 µg/m3 & 18.4

µg/m3 respectively. After superimposition of MGLC on the baseline level, the Air Quality will remain well

within the prescribed standards.

Water Management

As the plant water system is designed based on maximum recirculation system.

The effluents to be generated from the proposed units and its management plan are:

Run-off water from Raw Material Storage Yards – Settling tank with OW separator – reused for

dust suppression;

Waste Water from Billet Caster and Rolling Mill – Scale pit with OW separator and recyled

Regeneration waste water from DM Plant – Neutralization pit and reused for dust suppression

Bolier blowdown from power plant – Reused for ash handling

Plant Sewage (toilets and washrooms) & Canteen – STP and reused for gardening

The effluents will be treated in water treatment plant and will be reused / recyled. GFL will follow Zero

Discharge Liquid norms. Air cooled condensors will be installed in Power Plant to conseve water use.

Noise Pollution Management

The noise level within the plant boundary is occupational noise levels and confined within shops. The

level will be further minimized when the noise reaches the plant boundary and the nearest residential

areas beyond the plant boundary, as elaborate green belt development is envisaged for all along the

boundary for attenuation of noise and fugitive emission. All the equipment in the steel plant will be

designed/operated in such a way that the noise level shall not exceed 85 dB (A) as per the requirement of

Standard.

Solid Waste Management

Sl. No Solid waste Quantity in TPA Utilization measure

1 Dolchar from DRI Kilns 72,000 To be fully used as fuel in AFBC

2 Induction Furnace Slag 40,000 To be used as river sand substitute after

grinding and residual Fe recovery




3 Fly ash from DRI 40,000 To be dumped in OCP of ECL mines

4 Fly ash from AFBC 36,540 To be supplied to Brick Manufacturing

plants

5 Bottom ash from AFBC 24,360 To be supplied to Brick Manufacturing

plants

6 Metal scraps 20,000 To be recycled for melting in IFs

7 Fe-Mn slag 24,700 To be used as raw material for Si-Mn

production

8 Si-Mn Slag 13,800 To be used for road making

Measures For Improvement Of Ecology:

There is no wildlife sanctuary within the 10 km radius of the proposed plant. The core zone area is devoid

of plantation. There will not be any loss of plantation because of the project. On the other hand, the

company will provide the comprehensive green-belt cover in 33% of the project area as per the MoEFCC

norms to improve the local ecology. The company plans to acquire the nearby abandoned coal quarries

with deep gorges and holes and will fill the same with the non-hazardous solid waste and will develop

thick green belt cover over the sites. All these steps will considerably improve upon the ecology of the

area.

x) Impact Mitigation measure

Gaseous Emission

a. Hot gaseous emission with particulate matter, SO2 will be generated from DRI kilns, heat will be

recovered in WHRB to produce steam for generation of power and flue gas will pass through

ESPs for separation of particulate matter and clean gas will be sucked by ID fans and vented to

atmosphere through high stack.

b. Fumes generated from Induction Furnace will be cleaned in bag filters and vented to atmosphere

through ID fan and stack.

c. ESP will be installed in Power Plant

The air quality will remain within the prescribed standard.

Liquid Effluent

a. Industrial waste water from DRI kilns, CPP will pass through ETP, where neutralisation and

settling will take place.

b. Domestic waste water will pass through equalisation, aeration and settling tank. Industrial and

domestic effluent water after settling tanks will undergo filtration through gravel & sand bed and

will be used for toilet flushing, green belt watering, dust suppression and vehicle washing.

The plant is designed with ZLD.

Solid and Hazardous Waste

a. Fly ash from DRI kilns & CPP collected in ESPs will be supplied to fly ash brick manufacturers.

Bottom ash of CPP & DRI kiln accretion will be used as landfill.

b. Used oil, DM plant resins and lead batteries like hazardous materials will be handed over to

authorised dealer/suppliers

Effective utilization plan of solid wastes has been provided. MOUs have been executed.




xi) Hazard Identification & Risk Analysis

The major on-site emergency situation may occur from the coal storage and handling, molten metal and

slag handling, acids and alkali storage and handling and electrical short-circuits. There will be no off-site

risk. The project is located in an industrial area away from human habitation, school, hospital, jail, etc

(within 1 km area of the site). All plant and equipment machinery will be procured from reputed vendors.

Proper safety equipment will be provided to the workers and proper standard operating procedure will


Probable Hazards has been identified through the process of HIRA for major units like DRI, SMS, Rolling

mill & CPP. The respective mitigation majors are also enlisted along with the onsite emergency Plan. The

Environmental management plan includes the environmental Risk mitigation measures.

GFL has a well-developed Disaster Management Plan consisting of the preparedness plan for onsite and

offsite disasters and the role of key persons during occurrence of any disaster. An emergency cell headed

by Works Main Controller and followed by Site Controller, Combat Leader, Rescue team operates to

prevent any type of disaster. The DMP also states the activation and closing procedure for onsite

emergency along with the responsibilities of each member.

Hazard identificaton and Risk assessment done and risk mitigation measures suggested which is

adequate to take careof all on-site risk. No off-site risk is involved.

xii) Issues raised during Public Hearing

The Public Hearing was conducted on 06.06.2018 at 12.00 noon onwards at Kazi Najrul Satabarsiki hall

(Jamuria Municipal Hall) Jamuria, Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal in the presence of about 72 numbers

of local people. The hearing started under the chairmanship of Sri Kaushik Mukherjee (WBCS, Exe) Dy

Magistrate Dy Collector (representative of District Magistrate), Paschim Bardhaman. Mr Samit Dutta, Asst

Environmental Engineer, W.B Pollution Control Board.

Sl. No Points raised by

Public

Commitment of Project Proponent Action Plan

1 Public expressed

their concern about

Pollution

APCD has been installed in existsing units

and levels are meeting the discharge

standards

Online monitoring systems has been

installed in all major stacks

Monitoring reports being sent to MOEF,

SPCB and CPCB and displayed at plant gate

and company website.

APCD and CEMS will be installed

before plant commissioning.

Budget (Rs.400 lakhs) has been

earmarked in EMP

Job priority to

unemployed local

youths

PP agreed 250 people will be required for the

proposed expansion. Out of which

200 people will be skilled. Local

employable youths will be identified

through the Employment Exchange.

They will be trained for suitable

jobs like fitter, electrician, rigger,

welder, mason, etc in ITI at Asansol

and Raniganj. Thereafter they will

be employed in the plant.

Measures for

abatement of

pollution

Already clarified and the same will be done

for the proposed units

Afforestation 5715 trees have been planted.

Greenbelt area is 6.22 ha, where

10000 trees could be planted. GFL is




continuing the tree plantation drive.

2 The public have also

raised about the

CSR plan, drinking

water facility, health

camps and

improvement of

living conditions of

women living in

below poverty line.

CSR activities being done by GFL.

CSR/ESC activities with budget are

proposed in next section

Frequency of health camps will be

increased. Now it will be done on

monthly basis.

Action will be taken to revive the

sinking bore wells by proper

maintenance and also insall new

bore wells.

xiii) CER Plan with proposed expenditure

The capital budget for CER purpose is 1% of the project cost. As the cost of the project is 100,000 lakhs, so

contribution towards CER will be 100 lakhs.

Sl.

No

Assignments Implementation 1st Year

Budget in

Lakhs

2nd Year

Budget in

Lakhs

1 Avenue

Plantation

10,000 saplings will be planted in Sarthakpur &

Chandipur villages. Cost of planting and one-year

maintenance will be done through contractor.

7 3

2 Drinking Water 20 sinking bore wells in all surrounding villages will

be identified with the helpof local Councellor &

Borough Chairman (Jamuria Municipality) and made

functional.

10 new bore wells will be constructed in Sarthakpur,

Mahishaburi & Chandipur villages.

25 15

3 Women

Empowerment

Self help group of poor women (BPL) of surrounding

will be formed with the help of Local Councellor.

They will be provided training related to Tailoring,

and Computer. Willing women will be provided

trained as Salewomen and Midwives. After training

they will be provided the sewing machines and

computers for sustainable livelihood.

5 5

4 ITI course to the

unemployed

Local unemployed youth seeking employment in the

industry will be identified through the Employment

Exchange. They will be provided skill development

courses of their interest in ITI at Asansol and

Raniganj. Cost of the course will be borne by GFL.

Successful youths will be offered employment in the

plant, depending upon our requirement.

3 2

5 Energy efficient

street light

Existing halogen bulbs in and around the streets of

the plant premises to be altered with energy efficient

LED bulbs, with due permission of the Electrical

Dept.

4 1

6 Strengthening

of road in

Jamuria

Industrial Area

About two kilometers road in the Januria Industrial

Area will be strengthened(WBM and asphalted /

concreted), with the help of the local authority.

20 10

Total year expenses 64 36

TOTAL 100




xiv) Occupational Health Measures

Sl.

No.

Group Item Potential Health

hazard

Preventive measures

I Raw materials and

products handling

Iron ore fines Eye/skin irritation Water sprinkling’

Coal, lime stone,

Dolchar Other fluxing

minerals

Respiratory track

diseases due to

Dust,

Dry fogging in conveyors,

ID fan bag filter, PPE

Acids/Alkalis Skin & eye injury

Water jet for eye washing,

first-aid

II Major shops

IF Hot metal & slag

Burn injury

Gas poisoning

Keeping area dry so that

molten Iron Metal does

not come in water

Contact, wearing PPE

Billet caster Hot molten metal Burn injury Wearing PPE

AFBC High pressure steam Burn injury and

exposure to high

level noise damaging

ear

PPE like safety shoes,

hand gloves & ear muff

III Utilities

Fuel gas

Distribution

Gas leaks Fire and gas

Poisoning

Use of PPE

Electric power Supply Short circuit Electric shock Use of PPE

IV All shops

Falling from height Collapse of

scaffoldings

Injury, breaking of

bone

Proper scaffolding to

withstand Load

Breaking of slings Use of safety belt

Tested from time to time.

Falling of heavy ,Objects from height

People working over Head, next floor

Head injury Use of helmet and safety

belt

xv) Post Project Monitoring Plan

Depending upon prevailing predominant wind direction AAQ monitoring stations have been decided

where monitoring instruments shall be installed for measuring polluting parameters at regular intervals.

Sl. No. Particulars Frequency of

monitoring

Duration of

Sampling

Parameters required

to be monitored

Air quality

A Stack monitoring Once in a month Particulate matter

B Ambient air quality Twice a week 24 hours

continuously

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX

C Fugitive emission

monitoring

Once in a month Particulate matter

Water & Waste water quality




A Water quality in the

Area

Once in a month, except for heavy metals which will be monitored on Quarterly basis.

Composite

sampling

(24 hourly)

As per IS: 10500

Noise

Noise Monitoring Every Month

Occupational Health

Occupational Health

monitoring of employees

Once in a year




CHAPTER-1

INTRODUCTION

1.1 GENERAL

M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd. an Integrated Steel Plant located at Jamuria Industrial Estate,

At/PO- Ikra, Dist: -Burdwan, WB running since 2004. The project area extends from 230

41‟ 47.87‟‟ N to 230 41‟ 24.03‟‟ N, and: 870 07‟ 04.59‟‟ E to 870 06‟ 57.29‟‟ E, with 105m

AMSL. The company had applied for EC & was permitted to enhance its production

capacity to 0.4 MTPA TMT rods with 24 MW power vide J-11011/232/2010-IA-

II(I),dtd. 11th Mar 2015 and has commissioned some of the facilities granted in EC

At this stage company faced difficulties due to changed market scenario and has

proposed to replace some of the facilities granted in EC by new facilities and thereby

reducing the steel production capacity from 0.4 to 0.3 MTPA.

The proposal is EC modification of Integrated Steel Project of category-A, proposing to

add 1x350 TPD DRI Kiln, 2x20T IF with CCM to existing 4x100 TPD DRI Kilns and 3x20T

IFs, thereby enhancing the production capacity of existing Re-rolling mill from 1x342

TPD to 1x1000 TPD, with an objective of CCM with Hot Rolling Mill as a continuous

casting process and phaseout the existing Re-Heating Furnace route. EAFs as accorded

in previous EC will be replaced by above said 2X20 T IFs and 12 MW AFBC to be replaced

with 4MW FBC + 8MW WHRB.

The project is operating on a land of 18.85 ha. All the units of the proposed project will

be set up on the existing land of running plant.

The Government of India has made it mandatory for all developmental projects to

prepare a detailed EIA study so that the impacts of the proposed developmental activity

can be predicted and a suitable management plan can be implemented before

commissioning of a project as per EIA Notification 2006 and amendments thereby.

In view of the above, this EIA/EMP Report has been prepared in line with the Terms of

Reference (ToR) suggested by Environmental Appraisal Committee (Industry-I) vide

MoEF letter No. F. No. J-11011/232/2010-IA-II(I), dated. 23rd May, 2017

1.2 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT

The purpose of making EIA report after EIA study is to suggest measures to reduce the

burden of environmental impacts for sustainable development and to critically analyse

the manufacturing process of different products proposed to be manufactured with

reference to types and quantity of different raw material consumption, possible source of

waste water, dust/gas emission and hazardous waste generation. EIA study is used as a

planning tool to promote sustainable development by integrating environmental

considerations into a wide range of proposed action plans.

The purpose of EIA:

To provide information for decision-making on the environmental consequences of

proposed actions; and

To promote environmentally sound and sustainable development




No forest land is involved in the project so Forest clearance under Forest Act

(Conservation) is not required.

1.3 IDENTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT:

The Project

It is a primary metallurgical (Ferrous) project proposing modification of facilities

accorded in EC i.e. to reduce production of steel from approved capacity of 0.4 MTPA to

0.3 MTPA, with 24 MW captive power generation from WHRB and AFBC, production of

bulk Ferro-alloys from 2x9 MVA SAF. The project comes under schedule 3(a) Category-A

seeking Environmental Clearance from MoEFCC, New-Delhi.

The Project Proponent

Gen. Tor 2 (ii) Information about the Project Proponent

Project proponent of M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd is Mr. Vinay Kumar Agrawal having 20

years of experience in steel manufacturing, Nitrogen and Oxygen production through Air

separation unit. Besides Gagan Ferrotech Ltd, the proponent has Shakambhari overseas

Trade Private Ltd., which manufactures MS ingots.

The group has annual turnover of about Rs 800 Crores.

1.4 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT:

1.4.1 Location of the project

The proposed project is located at Po- Ikra of Burdwan district in West Bengal, bearing

Latitude: 23˚ 41‟ 47.86” N & Longitude: 87˚ 06‟ 51.26” E, Avg. MSL-105m. The project

is over 18.85 ha of Industrial Land located within Jamuria Industrial Estate.

The project site is well connected by road and rail. National Highway NH 60 is about 3

km away from the existing site. The nearest railway station is „Ikra‟ which is about 0.3

km away from the site. Durgapur and Asansol are two nearest cities where market

facilities are available. The nearest airport is Kazi Nazrul Islam airport, Andal about 14.5

km away from the existing site.

1.4.2 Nature & Size of the Project

The proposed project capacity will be reduced from 0.4 MTPA to 0.3 MTPA TMT Steel

products, by installing 1 x 350 TPD DRI kiln and 2 x 20 T IF against accorded 1 x 35 T

EAF.

Gen. Tor 2(iii) Importance and Benefits of the Project

1.4.3 Importance of the project to the Country and Region

India produced 88.97 million tons(mt) , 89.79 mt and 96 mt of crude steel during 2014,

2015 and 2016 respectively. In lieu of this, Govt. of India has drawn following

strategies:

The Minister of Steel & Mines has reiterated commitment of Central Government

to support the steel industry to reach a production target of 300 Million Tonne Per

Annum (MTPA) in 2025.

Government has planned Special Purpose Vehicles (SPVs) with four iron ore rich

states i.e., Karnataka, Jharkhand, Orissa, and Chhattisgarh to set up plants

having capacity between 3 to 6 MTPA.




1.4.4 National Steel Policy:

The Indian government announced National Steel Policy (NSP) in November, 2005

envisaging a Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) of 7.3% per annum in the steel

sector up to 2019-20. To achieve this, the NSP aims to increase indigenous production

capacity from 38 MT in 2005 to about 110 MT by 2019-20, through a multipronged

strategy.

However in 2006-07 domestic crude steel production grew at the rate of 10.9%

and consumption at 11.6%, accordingly the estimated for production of steel was

revised in 2008 and was projected at 180MT as target to be achieved by 2019-

20.

In 2010-11 India produced 78MT, in 2012-13 81MT, and in 2013-14 84 MT crude

steel. At the same time world steel production in 2013 and 2014 was 1,607 MT &

1,636MT crude steel respectively.

Need to boost per-capita steel consumption in rural area to improve quality of

life.

Appropriate steps must be taken to ensure adequate and timely supply of basic

Raw materials and processed inputs from domestic and over see sources.

In particular, the government thrust on road and infrastructure projects has given a

rise in demand for steel with consumption expected to grow 5.7% year on year to

92.1 million tonne by 2018. This is leading to a growth in demand for value added

steel and steel producers need to gear up to cater to the growing demand.1

1.4.5 Global Steel Scenario:

Steel is a key driver of the world's economy. The industry directly employs more than

two million people worldwide, with a further two million contractors and four million

people in supporting industries. According to the World Steel Dynamics (WSD)

organization, global steel production (as also demand for it or consumption) will grow at

an annual average compounded rate of growth of 1.28 per cent during 2015-2025 to

reach only 1873 million tonnes by 2025. Other well-known forecasts, this figure was to

be achieved by 2020.

China remained World‟s largest crude steel producer in 2007 producing 489.00 million

metric tons and USA 97.20. India occupied 5th position producing 53.10 million metric

tons for the second consecutive year.

1.4.6 Domestic Scenario:

The Indian steel industry has entered into a new development stage from 2007-

08, riding high on the resurgent economy and rising demand for steel.

As per the report of the Working Group on Steel for the 12th Five Year Plan, there exist

many factors which carry the potential of raising the per capita steel consumption in the

country. These include among others, an estimated.

1 Source is from Econommic Times, Jul 18, 2018




infrastructure investment of nearly a trillion dollars, a projected growth of

manufacturing from current 8% to 11-12%, increase in urban population to 600

million by 2030 from the current level of 400 million, emergence of the rural

market for steel currently consuming around 10 kg per annum buoyed by projects

like Bharat Nirman, Pradhan Mantri Gram Sadak Yojana, Rajiv Gandhi Awaas

Yojana among others.

At the time of its release, the National Steel Policy 2005 had envisaged steel

production to reach 110 MTPA by 2019-20. However, based on the assessment of

the current ongoing projects, both in Greenfield and Brownfield, the Working

Group on Steel for the 12th Five Year Plan has projected that domestic crude

steel capacity in the county is likely to be 140 MT by 2016-17 and has the

potential to reach 149mt if all requirements are adequately met.

Further based on the status of MOUs signed by private producers with various

State Govt., it is expected that India‟s steel capacity would be nearly 293 million

tons by 2020.

[Source: Ministry of Steel & Mines]

1.4.7 The World Scrap Scenario:

For any given level of steel output, the demand for DRI/HBI varies directly with respect

to the proportion of electric steel making in the total steel production and to the

availability & price of steel scrap and pig iron. At the general level the scrap and SS

industries can be attributed to the generally improved conditions of the world steel

market and the resultant increase in the demand for all steel making inputs. However, at

a specific level it appears that the current strength in the DRI/ HBI market worldwide

has been led by the changing dynamics in the world ferrous market.

The major events that have changed the ferrous scrap industry worldwide are given

below:

The 15% export tax on ferrous scrap originating in Russia introduced in 1999

continues to exert an upward pressure on world steel prices. World supply of

ferrous scrap was further constrained when in March 2001 the Russian

Government introduced measures to restrict exit points for exports of Russian

scrap.

Collection and processing of ferrous scrap in Russia have gone down as a result of

these restrictions and partly because the relatively stable Ruble robbed the

Russians of a price advantage in the international markets. According to some

estimates, collections in Russia for the first 11 months of 2001 fell by 55 as

compared to 2000. While experts and domestic deliveries went down by 9% and

4% respectively.

1.5 SCOPE OF THE STUDY (As per Terms of Reference)

The process of EIA usually consists of the following stages:

Screening with initial assessment of the environmental conditions and adequacy

of the project components.




Scoping with identification of the resources, issues and logistics for necessary

implementation of the project and action plans for achieving such goals.

Baseline Study to evaluate the state of the environment prior to the

establishment of the proposed project

Identification of Sources of Pollution due to the Project.

Related Environmental Impact Identification, Prediction and Assessment.

Environmental Management Plan for necessitating any mitigation measures.

Deriving Decision making objectives for formulation of strategy as a long term

solution.

Referencing and studying all related documents for this project with screening

and assessment of the pre-existing conditions to be taken up for furtherance of

the project.

Environmental Management Plan:

Environemntal Management Plan is defined to address the identified issues pertaining to

Air, Water, Soil and Work Environment with appropriate mitigation measures. EMP is a

tool to create an open feed back system for better planning and tracking the

environmental status of the Operation.

Taking note of adverse impacts on environment due to project a comprehensive

EMP is considered in detail.

Details of all the pollution control equipment along with their efficiency has been

discussed.

EMP during constructional phase has been discussed. The comprehensive EMP

analyzes all the possibilities of the optimum use of resources in the form of raw

material, natural resources and energy with process optimization for more

production and reduction of waste generation. Preventive maintenance has been

introduced to minimize leakage & spillage and above all the waste utilization plan.

The EMP at operational stage covers all the details in the fields of air, water, solid

waste, noise, ecology and the socio-economic aspects.

Details with regards to design aspects, collection & separation efficiency and

emission norms from the attached stacks of Air Pollution control Equipment (APC)

is analyzed.

Disposal / management of the solid wastes generated from these APC equipment

has been discussed.

Fugitive dust emission from the different storage & transfer points and haul roads

and their detailed control aspects has been discussed.

Considering water as important and valuable utility, company will formulate a

water management plan for minimization of fresh water use in the plant.

Waste water management dealing with treatment methodologies and

recycling/reuse of treated waste water has been dealt with.

Rain water harvesting with Run off management plan has been discussed. The

conservation of water along with Zero discharge norms has been defined in the

comprehensive water and waste water management plan.

1.6 LITIGATION/COURT CASE AGAINST THE COMPANY

Gen. ToR 12 Any litigation pending against the project and/or any

direction/order passed by any court of law against the project, if so, details

thereof shall also be included.

No, litigation or court cases are pending against the project and/or no direction/order




has been passed by any court of law against the project.

1.7 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT:

M/s GLOBAL TECH ENVIRO EXPERTS PVT LTD, Bhubaneswar expresses its deep

gratitude to the management of M/s. Gagan Ferrotech Limited for their support and

assistance in site visits, document management, verification of data as incorporated in

this report as well as their hospitality. Without their whole hearted support, this study

could nothave been completed on time.




CHAPTER-2

PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.0 CONDENSED DESCRIPTION OF THOSE ASPECTS OF THE PROJECT

LIKELY TO CAUSE ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS.

The proposed project is modification of 0.4 MTPA integrated steel project of category-A,

proposing to add 1x350 TPD DRI Kiln, 2x20T IF with CCM to existing 4x100 TPD DRI

Kilns and 3x20T IFs and enhance the production capacity of existing Re-rolling mill from

1x342 TPD to 1x1000 TPD make it Hot rolling mill phasing out the re-heating Furnace &

to reduce final production capacity to 0.3 MTPA.

2.1 TYPE OF PROJECT

Based on the nature of this project, it is categorized as “A” under the Schedule 3(a)

needing Environmental Clearances. As per the Industrial categorization, it comes under

“Red Category”.

2.2 NEED OF THE PROJECT

Steel is a core industry and thus its demand is strongly linked to the overall economic

activity of the Nation. Given the inherent long-term potential of the Indian economy and

its cyclical nature, the long-term prospects of the steel industry are fairly comfortable.

The demand and production has been growing at a healthy rate for the last few years

and the forecast for the next decade and half is also very promising

Despite of being Red Category and Highly Polluting there is need for the set up of the

project.The proposed Integrated steel project aims at manufacturing TMT bars. The

products have high market demand. Steels of different grade have high demand in

construction work, equipment manufacture as well as domestic appliance manufacture

and steel as a whole has forward and backward linkages in terms of material flow,

income and employment generation. So, proper mitigation measures and management

plan will be taken not to degrade the Environmental Conditions.

2.3 LOCATION (MAP SHOWING GENERAL LOCATION, SPECIFIC

LOCATION, PROJECT BOUNDARY & PROJECT SITE LAYOUT)

Gen Tor-4(i) Location of the Project Site Covering village, Taluka/Tehsil,

District and State and Justification for Selecting the Site, whether Other Sites

Were considered.

Modification project of M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd is proposed on existing 18.85 ha of land.

Land is located at Jamuria Industrial Estate At/P.O-Ikra, in Paschim Burdwan district of

West Bengal. The project area extends from 230 41‟ 47.87‟‟ N to 230 41‟ 24.03‟‟ N, and:

870 07‟ 04.59‟‟ E to 870 06‟ 57.29‟‟ E, with 105m AMSL and comes under Toposheet No-

73M/2 (F45 D2)

2.3.1 Location & Selection of Site

M/s Gagan Ferro Tech Ltd has its existing Steel Plant at Ikra, Jamuria in Burdwan district

of West Bengal, with following connectivity.




The location has well developed infrastructure like road network, railway siding

etc

No national park or wildlife sanctuary or eco sensitive zones or places of

archaeological importance are present within 15 km radius around the project and

the site does not come under critical polluted area.

The site is only 0.1 km away from the Jamuria bypass road.

Ikra railway station is 0.3 km away.

NH 60 is around 3 km away & NH 2 is about 4.9 km away from the site.

The transportation load will not add much to the existing load on the said road

system.

Gen. ToR 4(iv) Google map-Earth downloaded of the project site

Gen. ToR 4(iii) Co-ordinates (Lat-Long) of all four corners of the site.

The corner co-ordinates of project site are as follows.

Pt 1: 23041‟ 47.86” N and 870 06‟ 51.26” E

Pt 2: 230 41‟ 24.03” N and 870 06‟ 57.29” E

Pt 3: 230 41‟ 26.66” N and 87007‟ 01.74” E

Pt 4: 230 41‟ 47.87” N and 870 07‟ 04.59” E

Location of a manufacturing plant is influenced by important factors like proximity to raw

material resources, infrastructure facilities like road, railway network, power supply etc.

and availability of water & other utilities. Considering the above factors, the company

has selected the site at Jamuria Industrial Estate, where existing DRI Kilns, IFs and Re-

rolling mills are giving production of TMT rods. The company has already been granted

prior EC for expansion of this unit to give 0.4MTPA steel product by setting up additional

EAFs and Re-Rolling mill on this land.

Hence no other site has been taken into consideration.

2.3.2 Toposheet of Study area

Gen. ToR 4(ii) A toposheet of the study area of radius of 10km and the site

location on 1:50,000/1:25,000 scales on an A3/A2 sheet (including all eco-

sensitive areas and environmentally sensitive places)

Environment Sensitivity around 15 km radius

Sl.No. Areas Name/

Identity

Aerial distance

(within 15 km.)

Proposed project

location boundary

1 Areas protected under international

conventions, national or local

legislation for their ecological,

landscape, cultural or other related

value

Nil Nil




2 Areas which are important or

sensitive for ecological reasons -

Wetlands, watercourses or other

water bodies, coastal zone,

biospheres, mountains, forests

Ajay River

7.0 km

3 Areas used by protected, important

or sensitive species of flora or

fauna for breeding, nesting,

foraging, resting, over wintering,

migration

No Nil

4 Inland, coastal, marine or

underground waters

No Nil

5 State, National boundaries Jharkhand- West Bengal

State boundary.

12.0 km.

6 Routes or facilities used by the

public for access to recreation or

other tourist, pilgrim areas

No No such route

presents within 15

km. radius

7 Defence installations No Not existing

8 Densely populated or built-up area Asansol, Raniganj under

Asansol-Durgapur

Development Authority

Bijaynagar-1.5 km.

Bahardurpur-12 km.

9 Areas occupied by sensitive man-

made land uses (hospitals, schools,

places of worship, community

facilities)

Hospitals, Schools &

Temples are situated

within 15 km. of the

project boundary.

Chinchuria Primary

School-6.18 km

Kazi Nazrul

University BCW

campus-13.7 km

10 Areas containing important, high

quality or scarce resources

(ground water resources, surface

resources, forestry, agriculture,

fisheries, tourism, minerals)

No No adverse effect

11 Areas already subjected to

pollution or environmental damage.

(those where existing legal

environmental standards are

exceeded)

No Nil

12 Areas susceptible to natural hazard

which could cause the project to

present environmental problems

(earthquakes, subsidence,

landslides, erosion, flooding or

extreme or adverse climatic

conditions)

No Zone III of Earth

quake zones

2.3.3 SITE SELECTION

The proposed project is a brownfield project. The modification has been proposed in the

acquired area where existing plant is running. Hence alternate site has not been

considered. Again the land area has been proposed in existing EC for 0.4MTPA steel

production, which will be reduced to 0.3 MTPA, hence existing 18.85 ha land isadequate

to accommodate modification.




2.3.4 LAND FORM, LAND USE AND LAND OWNERSHIP

ToR 4(vii) Land use break-up of total land of the project site (identified and

acquired), Govt/private-agricultural, forest, west land, water bodies,

settlements etc. shall be included (not required for industrial area)

The total land available to M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd is 18.85 ha barren industrial land in

Jamuria Industrial area developed by Jamuria Municipality. No forest land is involved and

there is no settlement on the area. The plot has boundary wall and no settlement inside.

The entire land will be used for setting up plant facilities, rain water harvesting, Raw

material and product storage, Green Belt, solid waste temporary storage and water

storage etc.

Table 2.1 A Land use Pattern of the project site (industrial estate)

Land Category Area in Ha

BAHAL(Agricultural Land 3.85

BAID (Poor Crop Land 4.31

DANGA (Barren Land) 8.74

KANALI (Water Logged

Land) 1.95

Total 18.85

Table 2.1 B Land utilization of the core zone

SL NO Facilities Total Land in Ha

1 Existing facility 8.09

2 Proposed Facility 1.78

3 Raw Material Yard & Finished products 1.33

4 Office & other permanent structures 0.28

5 Internal Road 0.81

6 Rain Water harvesting system 0.2

7 Water Reservoir 0.12

8 Green Belt 6.22

Total 18.85

2.3.5 Project Layout

ToR 4(v) Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as proposed unit

indicating storage area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities etc. If located

within an industrial area/Estate/Complex, layout of industrial area indicating

location of unit within the industrial area/Estate




Additional ToR 14 Details of proposed layout clearly demarcating various units

within the plant.

2.4 SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION (including associated

activities required by or for the project)

Gen. ToR 3(ii) Products with capacities for proposed project&

Gen. ToR 3 (iii) If expansion project, details of existing products with capacities

and whether adequate land is available for expansion, reference to earlier EC if

any.

2.4.1 Project Configuration & Product mix

Details of existing configuration, product & production capacity, proposed expansion cum

modification configuration, product and annual production capacity and capacity after

modification cum expansion has been given in table below.

Table 2.2 Project configuration & product mix

Sl. No

Plant Facilities

Facilities Existing Prior to EC

Configuration For which EC taken vide 232/2010-IA-II(I), dtd. 11th

Mar.2015(including

status of

Implementation)

Proposed facilities for modification of EC

Modified Configuration

Product & Capacity in TPA after modification

1 DRI Kilns 4x100 TPD Nil 1x350TPD 4x100 TPD Sponge Iron 2,40.000

1x350 TPD

2 Induction Furnace

with LF

2x20 T 1x20T 2x20T 5x20T Billet 3,20,000

3 Rolling mill

1x342 TPD Nil 1x1000 TPD (Capacity increase)

1x1000 TPD TMT rods & coils 3,00,000

4 SAF Nil 2x9 MVA Nil 2x9 MVA Any one or all Fe-Mn, Si-Mn. Max=38,200

5 EAF with LRF

Nil 1x35T Nil Not to be installed

Nil

6 AOD Nil 1x30T Nil 1x30T Alloy steel

7 C C M - 2x3 strand Nil 2x3 strand Billet for RM 3,20,000

8 CPP

(WHRB)

8 MW Nil 8MW

16MW

Power

16 MW

9 CPP(FBC) 4 MW 12 MW 4MW (Reduction by 8

MW)

8 MW Power 8 MW

1) 1) 1x35T EAF to be replaced by 2x20T IF,

2) 1x350TPD DRI Kilns to be installed and

3) Capacity of Rolling mill to be enhanced to achieve 0.3MTPA TMT rods.




4) Proposal to add Fe-Cr as in the ToR to existing Fe-Mn & Fe-Si manufacturing has

been dropped by the proponent.

5) As additional power will be generated from proposed 1x350 DRI Kiln, AFBC

capacity has been proposed to be reduced but total captive power will remain

unchanged 24 MW.Ferro allay plants to be commissioned.

2.5 TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESS DESCRIPTION

M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd proposes production of TMT rods, coils etc. through DRI-IF-LF

CCM-Rolling mill route. DRI kilns will be indigenous Lurgi technology coal based direct

reduction. Induction Furnace will melt charge consisting DRI, Pig and scrap: using eddy

current of electricity. It will be medium frequency core less one. Additives like Ferro

alloys will add to give desired property to steel. Hot metals will be transferred to Tundish

of CCM for casting of billets. Billets in red hot stage above recrystallization temperature

will be fed to rod rolling mill.

With passage through size reduction apertures, rods of desired diameter will be

produced. Red hot rods will be passing through water bath for short time, so that surface

will be quenched while core is still hot. Temperature will be normalized with heat transfer

from core to surface and stress will be released. Thus, Thermo- Mechanically treated

steel rod will be manufactured for sale.

2.6 PROJECT DESCRIPTION INCLUDING DRAWINGS SHOWING

PROJECT LAYOUT, COMPONENTS OF PROJECT etc. SCHEMATIC

REPRESENTATION OF THE FEASIBILITY DRAWING WHICH GIVES

INFORMATION IMPORTANT FOR EIA PURPOSE

The project will have following components

1) DRI kilns

2) Induction Furnaces with LF & CCM

3) Ferro Alloy Plant

4) Rolling Mills

5) WHRB & CFBC based captive power plant.

The schematic process diagram has been provided in Fig – 2.4.

Gen.ToR 3(viii)Process description along with major equipments and

machineries, process flow sheet(quantitative) from raw material to products to

be provided.

Addl. ToR 15 Complete process flow diagram describing each unit, its processes

and operations, along with material and energy inputs and outputs (material

and energy balance.

Addl. ToR 16 Details on design and Manufacturing Process for all the unit




Raw materials are 1) Hematite ore 2) Coal 3) Lime stone, 4) Pig Iron & 5) Scrap and

product is TMT rods and by-products are 1) Dolchar 2) Slag & 3) Fly ash

Addl. ToR 16 Details on design and manufacturing process for all the units

The manufacturing process of TMT rods and wires involves production of sponge Iron in

DRI Kilns, Steel melting in Induction Furnaces, Refining in Ladle furnace, AOD, Making

rods followed by water bath. and wire in rolling mill.

Manufacturing of Ferro alloys is for internal use to make alloy steel in LF for sale. Power

requirement is to be met from waste heat recovery from flue gas of DRI making process

and FBC using dolchar from DRI Kilns with fresh coal support.

Detailed design & manufacturing process of units

(A) DRI Kiln

Sponge iron is the metallic form of iron produced from reduction of iron oxide below the

fusion temperature of iron ore (1535◦C) by utilizing hydrocarbon gases or carbonaceous

fuels as coal. The reduced product having high degree of metallization exhibits a

„honeycomb structure‟, due to which it is named as sponge iron. As the iron ore is in

direct contact with the reducing agent throughout the reduction process, it is often

termed as direct reduced iron (DRI).

Sponge iron, also known as "Direct Reduced Iron" (DRI) and its variant Hot Briquetted

Iron (HBI) have emerged as prime feed stock which replace steel scrap in EAF/IF as well

as in other steel-making processes. It is the resulting product of solid state reduction of

iron ores or agglomerates (generally of high grade), the principal constituents of which

are metallic iron, residual iron oxides, carbon and impurities such as phosphorus, sulphur

and gangue (principally silica and alumina). The final product can be in the form of fines,

lumps, briquettes or pellets. Direct reduction processes available can be broadly grouped

under two categories based on the type of reductant used. These are:

1) Solid based processes

2) Gas based processes

Indigenous solid (coal) based Process

Sized iron ore and coal in required proportion are fed in to the kiln with the help of the

weigh feeders at the feed end. Due to the rotational motion of the kiln and due to the

slope provided, the charge moves forward to the discharge end. Thermocouples are

mounted on the kiln to measure kiln temperature of the different heating zones.

Pulverized coal is also injected through the discharge end of the kiln with the help of the

coal injector machines & lobe compressor, to meet the additional carbon and volatile

matter requirement of the reaction. Kiln discharge material which is a mixture of sponge

iron and char (mixture of unreduced iron, uncalcinated limestone, gangue and semi

burnt coal) is taken to a rotary cooler. Water is sprayed on the cooler shell to indirectly

cool the kiln discharge mix to about 120°C. The cooler also has a slope of about 2.5%.

The cooler discharge falls onto a hopper and taken through conveyors for screening of

fines and coarse materials. After separating the -3 mm and +3 mm sizes in the product

screen, the cooler discharge mix is subjected to magnetic separation where sponge iron

is separated from char. Sponge iron and char of coarse and fine sizes are stored in

separate silos or hoppers.




The reducing gases generated from the combustion of the coal, flow counter current to

the direction followed by the solids and emerge from the feed end. The kiln is maintained

at a positive pressure of about +5 mm water column. The flue gases then pass through

the gravitational Dust Settling Chamber (DSC) and pass on to the After Burning

Chamber (ABC) located right above the DSC. In the ABC, the CO is converted to non-toxic CO2. Therefore, in ABC the off-gas laden with combustible matter is burnt.

On the top of the ABC, there is an emergency cap to maintain the kiln pressure by

letting out the accumulated gases.

Fuel oil (LDO/HFO) for DRI Kiln

Light Diesel Oil will be required in the rotary kiln during each start up. An LDO fired

central burner is used for heating the cold kiln. After initial heating LDO is turned off and

the kiln is switched over to coal firing. The lighting up period is around 20hrs. Again, fuel

oil burner support is required in case of fall of temperature for reduction. About 5.0 KL

LDO is required for each cold start up and it is assumed that there will be 4 start ups in a

month per DRI kiln. Similarly, about 200L of oil will be required for each start-up of Boilers. So, a provision of 1500 KLA is envisaged for expansion project`

Technical parameters of DRI plant (1x350 TPD)

No. of working days per annum : 320

No. of shifts per day : 3

Working hours per shift : 8

Productivity rate considering the installed capacity : 14.58MT/h.

Achievable production/annum : 1,12,000Tons per annum

Char generation : 16,800tons per annum

Product quality

Fe (total) : 92% min.

Fe (metallic) : 83% min.

Metallization : 88% min.

Carbon : 0.25% max.

S : 0.03% max.

P : 0.06% max.

SiO2 + Al2O3 : 5% max.

(B) IF-LF

The various types of Induction Furnaces used for Steel making are medium frequency

and high frequency. Mild steel, Stainless Steel and low and high alloy Steel can be made

from these furnaces. Raw materials used are Steel Melting Scrap and DRI. Alloying elements added as per requirement.

Various types of steel and cast-iron production by I.F

Mild Steels: In order to control chemistry of end product, chemical analysis of all input

metallic is taken before snaking the charge-mix. After 50% charging is completed, a

bath sample is sent to laboratory. The chemical analysis is examined; calculations made

and further additions are made of input metallic. If it has high carbon, Sulphur and

phosphorous, percentage Sponge iron in the charge is increased. When 80% melting is

completed a final bath, sample is taken. If carbon is still high, then more of sponge iron

fines are charged, cast iron scrap and turnings are charged. Thus, the chemistry is controlled.

In Induction Melting Furnaces, the oxidation of iron is much less due to absence of

agitation and therefore the Fe losses as oxides are minimal. In IF, Silicon and Manganese




in metal are oxidized by Fe2O3 and FeO. Carbon is reduced by iron oxide in sponge Iron.

Similarly, Sulphur and Phosphorous are diluted by the DRI and hence no tramp-elements

are present in the final product by this process.

Induction Furnace units can also produce Grinding Media. Grinding Media MnCr5, 20

MnCr5, etc. are being produced and exported in IFs located at Ghaziabad, Jhansi,

Ahmadabad and Bangalore. It meets the quality requirements of world standard. When required the company may go for these products

(C) Argon oxygen decarburization (AOD)

It is a process primarily used in stainless steel making and other high-grade alloys with

oxidable elements such as chromium and aluminum. After initial melting the metal is

then transferred to an AOD vessel where it is subjected to three steps of refining; decarburization, reduction, and desulphurization.

Decarburization

Prior to the decarburization step, one more step should be taken into consideration: de-

siliconization, which is a very important factor for refractory lining and further refinement.

The decarburization step is controlled by ratios of oxygen to argon or nitrogen to remove

the carbon from the metal bath. The ratios can be done in any number of phases to

facilitate the reaction. The gases are usually blown through a top lance (oxygen only)

and tuyeres in the sides/bottom (oxygen with an inert gas shroud). The stages of

blowing remove carbon by the combination of oxygen and carbon forming CO gas.

4 Cr (bath) + 3 O2 → 2 Cr2O3 (slag)

Cr2O3 (slag) + 3 C (bath) → 3 CO (gas) + 2 Cr (bath)

To drive the reaction to the forming of CO, the partial pressure of CO is lowered using

argon or nitrogen. Since the AOD vessel isn't externally heated, the blowing stages are

also used for temperature control. The burning of carbon increases the bath

temperature.

By the end of this process around 97% of Cr is retained in the steel.

Reduction

After a desired carbon and temperature level have been reached the process moves to

reduction. Reduction recovers the oxidized elements such as chromium from the slag. To

achieve this, alloy additions are made with elements that have a higher affinity for

oxygen than chromium, using either a silicon alloy or aluminum. The reduction mix also

includes lime (CaO) and fluorspar (CaF2). The addition of lime and fluorspar help with

driving the reduction of Cr2O3 and managing the slag, keeping the slag fluid and volume

small.

Desulphurization

Desulphurization is achieved by having a high lime concentration in the slag and a low

oxygen activity in the metal bath.

S (bath) + CaO (slag) →CaS (slag) + O (bath)

So, additions of lime are added to dilute sulfur in the metal bath. Also, aluminum or

silicon may be added to remove oxygen. Other trimming alloy additions might be added

at the end of the step. After sulfur levels have been achieved the slag is removed from

the AOD vessel and the metal bath is ready for tapping. The tapped bath is then either

sent to a stir station for further chemistry trimming or to a caster for casting.




As heat treaters, we must be aware of what tramp elements are and how they can affect

our heat-treatment operations. While certification sheets and chemical analyses

performed on incoming raw material do a fine job of identifying the major chemical

constituents and may indicate conformance to a particular steel standard, it is those

pesky tramp elements that cause The Doctor sleepless nights. Let‟s learn more.

Tramp elements (e.g., Cu, Ni, Sn, As, Cr, Mo, Pb and others) are highly dependent on

the steel grade and enter the steel through four main sources namely:

Iron ore or pig iron

Impurities in ferroalloy additions

Refractories

Table 2.3 Design Parameters of Induction Furnace

S. No. Parameter Unit Value/Feature

1. Liquid Steel Production T/yr. 3,20,000

2. No. of Furnaces 10 5x20T

3. Type of furnace - A.C medium frequency coreless, twin shell each

with common power pack per furnace.

4. Nominal Transformer Rating KW 5,500 for 1x 20T

5. Heats/Day/Furnace 10

6. Charge Mix

DRI

Pig Iron

Scrap

%

%

%

85

10

05

(D) Power Plant:

A captive power plant (CPP) will be installed to operate the proposed integrated steel

complex and to produce surplus power for meeting the requirement of future expansion

of the plant of the plant.

The plant will be based on the utilization of waste heat of flue gases generated in DRI

Kilns before their discharge to the atmosphere through waste heat recovery boilers as

well as fuel fired circulating fluidized bed for steam generation and feeding to turbo

generator sets.

For this purpose, a 16 MW Power plant based on Waste heat recovery Boiler (WHRB) of

750 TPD DRI Kilns and 8 MW from Atmospheric Fluidized Bed Combustion Boiler (AFBC)

will be installed.

1- Waste heat from flue gas of DRI Plant Existing +Proposed 16 MW

2- AFBC Existing+ Proposed 08 MW

Total 24 MW

The stream generated from the waste heat boilers will be routed through a common

header and joined with the steam header of AFBC boiler for feeding to the central turbo-

generator station. The turbo generator will comprise of two modules of steam turbine

and generator set with a rated capacity of 12 MW each.




Salient features of waste heat boiler

The sensible heat of the exhaust gases coming out from DRI can be utilized to generate

about 15-16 MW power. Boilers of the plant will utilize the sensible heat of exhaust

gases coming out from the DRI. Each boiler will be equipped with necessary routings,

accessories and units. Final temperature of the waste gas at outlet of the waste heat

boiler will be 160-1800 C. The steam generated at high pressure in the boilers will be fed

to the central steam turbine / generator station to generate power. All required

auxiliaries shall be provided.

Outlet steam-- pressure Kg / cm2 abs 66

Outlet steam temperature Deg. C 485

Feed water temperature Deg. C 150

The boilers will be complete with evaporator steam drum, mud drum, bank of super-

heaters, economizer, temperature, ID fans, ESP, internal piping etc. Soot blowing and

super-heater system will also be provided.

The exhaust steam will be cooled through air-cooling system. ID fans will be used to

force air through which the pipes carrying steam will be passed. The steam cools down

by 90% and the remaining heat is cooled by passing through cooling water. Boilers will

be provided with blow down tanks (IBD, CBD etc.) & sample cooler. The exhaust gases

will be discharged from boiler to ESP and then into the atmosphere through induced

draft fan and chimney. The pressure drop in the boiler ducts and ESP will be kept to

match with the requirement of ID fan. The boiler will be of semi outdoor type with a

weather canopy and side covering of trapeze corrugated steel sheets or other suitable

materials as available.

(E) Rolling Mill:

In view of available infrastructure facilities, the company proposes to enhance the

capacity of existing 342 TPD rolling mill to 1,000 TPD Rolling mill to produce 0.3 MTPA

TMT rods and wires.

Red hot steel Billets from concast machine will be cut to desired sizes and fed to hot

rolling mill for processing.

The Billets are then processed through roughing mill, intermediate mills and finishing

mills to get the finished rolled products of desired diameter. Then rolled products are

passed for a short time through water bath to quench the surface while core is still red

hot, heat transfer there after takes place from core to surface and thus TMT is

manufactured.

2.7 MATERIAL BALANCE:

Material Balance for 4x100 TPD & 1x350 TPD DRI Kilns

Input in TPA Output in TPA

Hematite Iron Ore Lumps

& Pellet blend

3,84,000 Sponge iron 2,40,000

DRI grade 2,88,000 Dolchar 72,000




coal(Imp+Indegeneous)

Dolo/Lime stone 9,600 Flyash 40,000

Air injection 11,30,400 Flue gas 14,60,000

Total 18,12,000 Total 18,12,000

Energy balance per Ton of DRI

Coal F-Grade, VM=30%, C=30%, CV=3.0Gcal/T

Imp coal VM=22%, C=49%, CV=5.3 Gcal/T

With 1:1 blend VM=26%, C=40%, CV=4.15 Gcal/T

Input

Heat from VM=Heating value of coal- H.V of carbon in coal (4.15-3.74)=0.41Gcal

Heat from reduction reaction=0.758Gcal

Heat from excess coal over stoichiometric= 1.66Gcal

Total = 2.828 Gcal

Output

Sensible heat loss with DRI= 0.124Gcal

Sensible heat loss with Ash + char=0.094Gcal

Sensible Heat loss with flue gas=1.55Gcal

Heat loss through Kiln, surface radiation,convection & door opening=0.500Gcal

Heat loss with GCV of char =0.480 Gcal

Heat loss to evaporate moisture=0.080 Gcal

Total = 2.828 Gcal

Material Balance of 5x20T IF with LF


Sponge Iron 2,40,000 Liquid Steel 3,20,000

Pig Iron 1,02,000 Slag 40,000

Scrap 30,000 Fume 12,000

Total 3,72,000 Total 3,72,000

Energy Balance of 5x20T IF

Energy consumption =26.2MWH

Molten Steel =41.6T/hr.

Energy per ton melting 26200/41.6=630 KWH/T

Material Balance for 1x9MVA Fe-Mn Plant


Mn Ore 43,900 Fe-Mn 19,060

Dolomite 6,650 Fe-Mn Slag 24,700

Coke 11,400 Gaseous Emission 18,470




Electrode Paste 380 Flue Dust 100

Total 62,330 Total 62,330

Material Balance for 1x9MVA Si-Mn Plant


Mn Ore 24,850 Si-Mn 13,800

Dolomite 4,150 Si-Mn Slag 13,800

Coke 8,280 Gaseous Emission 17,550

Fe-Mn Slag 8,300 Flue Dust 850

Casing Sheet 140

Electrode Paste 280

Total 46,000 Total 46,000

Of 2x9 MVA ferro alloy plants as per the requirement and market demand any one, two

or three alloys will be produced and accordingly the capacity will vary. Material balance

has been shown for any single product from 1x9 MVA plant. Raw material has to be procured as per the required production.

Maximum production will be about 38,000 TPA if only Fe-Mn is produced from two

Furnaces and minimum production will be about 28,000 TPA if only Fe-Si is produced from both the furnaces

Energy source for 8 MW AFBC Captive Power Plant

Fuel Quantity in TPA Calorific value in

Mcal/T

Total energy in

Mcal /Annum

Dolchar 72,000 1,600 115.2x106

Coal 25,000 3,100 77.5 x106

Total 192.7x106

Energy conversion@ 2750 MWH/ Mcal,

Power generated from char 115.2x106/2750x365x24=4.78 MW

Power generated from Coal 77.5 x106/2750x365x24=3.22 MW 8.0 MW

Over all energy consumption

1) imported coal & Indegeneous blend 2,88,000 TPA @4.15Gcal/T = 11,95,200Gcal

2) Boiler grade coal 25,000 TPA @3.1 Gcal/T = 77,500Gcal

5) LDO for DRI Kilns 1000 KL @10,000 kcal/kg = 10,000 Gcal

6) Purchase power 24.00 MW = 5, 70,240 Gcal

Total 18,52,940Gcal




Total Finished steel production 3,00,000 TPA

Hence overall energy consumption is 6.17 Gcal/T of finished steel

Solid Waste Generation from fuel used in AFBC:

Fuel Quqntity in

TPA

% of Ash Fly ash Bottom Ash

Dolchar 72,000 70 30,240 20,160

Fresh Coal 25,000 42 6,300 4,200

Total 36,540 24,360

2.8 ANNUAL RAW MATERIAL INVENTORY

Gen. ToR 3(iv) List of Raw materials required and their source along with mode

of transportation.

Add ToR 2 Quantum of production of coal and iron ore from coal and iron ore

mines and the projects they cater to. Mode of transportation to the plant and its

impact

Table 2.4 Annual gross material requirement, likely source and mode of

transport

Sl.

No

Name of Major Raw

material

Required gross

quantity in TPA


Transportation

1 Hematite Iron Ore

Lump/Pellet

3,96,000 Barbil, Odisha Rail


2 Imported & indegeneous

coal

2,90,000 Import &

Raniganja

Rail/Ship






8 Scrap 30,000 Local Road

Gen. ToR 3 (v) Other chemicals & materials required with quantities and

storage capacity.

Sl No Item Description Unit Quantity Per Annum

1 DM plant resins KG 200

2 Hydrochloric acid KL 26

3 Caustic soda KG 5000

Eastern Coal Fields have reserve of Gondwana Coal of rank bituminous to sub bituminous

with characteristics of Moderate to high ash and low sulphur content. Raniganj coal has

high moisture and high volatile material content.

Add ToR 1 Iron ore/coal linkage documents along with the status of

environmental clearance of iron ore and coal mines




M/s GFL obtains imported Coal from South Africa via ADANI and local Coal from

Raniganj. The linkage document is attached as Annexure VI. Iron Ore will be procured

from e-auction.

IM% VM% Ash% FC% GCV

(kcal/kg)

TM% NCV(kcal/kg) S%

Eastern Coal Field

4.03-

4.91

21.14-

31.7

23.9-

43.5

35.3-

44.3

4511-

5553

8.92-

11.62

4108-4907 0.3-

0.58

Imported Coal-Extracted from Coal supply by Adani Global FZE , 10.05.18

3.00-

3.78

21.78-

22.02

19.42-

20.95

49.77-

49.90

5520-

5562

7.26-

8.90

5327-5340 0.61-

0.7

Additional ToR 11 Trace metals Mercury, Arsenic, and fluoride emissions in the

raw material

M/s GFL is proposing to get Indegeneous as well as imported coal as raw material for its

project. Hence average value of trace elements have been taken into consideration,

which are as follows.

Average range & Average values for trace elements in international coal

Element Average range mg/kg Average, mg/kg

As 0.36-9.8 2.69

B 11-123 47

Be 0.1-2.0 1.0

Cd 0.01-0.19 0.093

Hg 0.03-0.19 0.091

Pb 1.1-22 7.0

Se 0.15-5.0 2.15

Cr 2.9-34 17.6

Cu 1.8-20 10.8

Ni 1.5-21 11.1

Zn 5.1-18 12.7 Source: (Creelman, 2002)

Significant difference between the South African and international coals was in the levels

of As, Se, Hg and B, which are of major environmental concern. South African coals

contained significantly lower concentrations (up to 35% of the levels in the international

coals) of these elements, which are volatile and therefore may be released to the

atmosphere through gaseous emissions and in stack particulate matter. The average

value for As in Indonesian coals was high as in international coals. Significantly higher

concentrations of B and Hg were noted in both the Indonesian and Chinese coals.

Trace elements in coal remains distributed in fly ash and slag and major part goes will

flue gas. Distribution of Hg will be as follows:

Distribution of mercury after combustion of coal is approximately as follows:

Bottom ash -03.0% of 0.12 PPM

Fly ash - 11.0% of 0.12 PPM

Stack - 86.0% of 0.12 PPM




Global avg. Hg concentration being 0.12 ppm in coal, 11% of it is 0.0132 ppm, which is

not a matter of concern for fly ash, but by using fabric filter Hg can be reduced to about

90% due to its adsorption on fly ash deposit on fabric filter. The fly ash when mixed with

cement or converted to bricks Hg is fixed. However balance fly ash can be used in green

belt only avoiding use in vegetable growth.

Arsenic remains mostly with fly ash and gets separated from flue with ash. As is used

up through fly ash brick but storage of fly ash is subject to leaching due to rain water.

Hence to be stored as has been proposed in fly ash silo.

Average concentration of chromium in coals is 20 ppm. The dominant form of

chromium in coal is trivalent chromium (Cr3+), which is essential in small quantities for

certain metabolic processes like glucose, protein and lipid metabolism. However, by the

process of oxidation (combustion of coal) more than 50 % of this benign trivalent

chromium can be transformed into hexavalent chromium (Cr6+).

Chromium is distributed to slag and fly ash and about 95% of chromium remains in the

ash products, due to the mode of occurrence and relative volatility. It is not emitted to

air through stack.

Leaching of Chromium to environment will be prevented by storing fly ash in closed silo

and utilising the slag to manufacture bricks.

Toxicity of trace elements

Cd has no known biological function. It accumulates in the kidneys and liver. It is

carcinogenic and can cause emphysema and fibrosis of the lung.

Cr is also carcinogenic. It accumulates in the liver and spleen. Cr exists in the non-toxic

form CR(III) and tends to be absorbed onto clays, sediments and organic matter. It is

therefore not very mobile in the environment. Cr (VI) is more mobile and more toxic

Exposure to Hg causes neural and renal damage, and cardiovascular disease. Organo-

mercury compounds bio-accumulate, particularly in fish.

Pb causes anaemia and has cardiovascular, neurological and gastrointestinal effects.

Some compounds are animal and possibly human carcinogens.

Although Se is an essential element, the safe range is narrow. Elevated levels cause

gastrointestinal disturbance, liver and spleen damage, and anaemia.

B-rich soils can limit plant growth resulting in decreased crop yields. Limits have been

adopted on the permissible levels of B in wastewater and water for irrigation.

Average range for trace elements in indigenous coal

Element Average range μg/g Average, mg/kg

As 0.19–0.35 2.69

Cd 0.6–0.93 0.093

Hg 0.51–2.13 0.091

Pb 7.6–35.3 7.0 Source: Distribution of trace elements in coal and combustion residues from five thermal power plants in India

Study of coal and ash samples collected from five different thermal power plants across

India were characterized and quantified to determine trace element concentration so as




to understand their distribution, enrichment, and partitioning behavior. Concentrations of

Pb, Cu, Cd, Zn, Fe, Mn, Cr, Ni, Mg, Li, Co, Hg, and As, were estimated in fly ash, bottom

ash, and coal samples

The trace elements are within limits and does not pose any threat to Environment, flora

or fauna.

Trace Metal in Iron Ore

Zn (ppm)

Pb (ppm)

Cu (ppm)

Co (ppm)

Ni (ppm)

As (ppm)

Hg (ppm)

Se (ppm)

S (ppm)

88.89 7.27 10.85 0.36 4.31 0.03 32.28 0.437 378.5

Trace Metal in Dolomite

Zn (ppm)

Pb (ppm)

Cu (ppm)

Co (ppm)

Ni (ppm)

As (ppm)

Hg (ppm)

Se (ppm)

S (ppm)

22.63 21.1 7.84 2.07 8.57 0.05 1.75 4.28 782.6

Specific ToR i Specific water Consumption, Power Consumption and Pollution

Load shall be reduced from present level.

Gen. ToR 3 (vii) & Add ToR 18 Requirement of water, power, with source of

supply, status of approval, water balance diagram, man-power requirement

(regular and contract)

2.9 POWER REQUIREMENT

Table 2.5 Power requirement for the unit after expansion

Facilities Power consumption in MW

4x100 TPD & 1x350 TPD DRI Kilns 2.5

5x20 T IFs, LF & AOD 26.2

1000 TPD CCM with Rolling mill 4.5

2x9 MVA Ferro alloy plant 12.6

A/c & Domestic use 0.5

Power plant internal consumption 1.8

Total 48.0

This power consumption has been estimated based on 100% load running of all the

facilities, which are not always practical.

Specific ToR ii The project proponent shall plan for solar light system for all

common areas, street lights, parking around project area and maintain the

same regularly.

Specific ToR iii The project Proponent shall plan for LED lights in their offices

and residential areas.

Following power saving measures shall be taken up for the project.

1) LED lights in control room and working area

2) Solar light system for internal roads

3) Variable Frequency drive for ID fans and blowers.




4) Capacitor back to improve power factor.

Captive power generation is 24 MW; balance power will be purchased from DVC.

Agreement has been made with DVC for supply of 25 MVA.

2.10 WATER REQUIREMENT

Fresh makeup water requirement for M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd is estimated to be

1077m3/day. The breakup has been given below.

WATER USAGES MAX /DAY

RECYCLE

WATER

FRESH

WATER TOTAL LOSS

WASTE WATER

GENERATION

DRI 84 84 78.4 5.6

SMS & SAF 673 673 673 0

CCM 240 240 5 235

ROLLING MILL 510 510 50 460

POWER PLANT 1129 887 2016 150 1866

UTILITY 60 60 120 120

DOMESTIC 130 130 40 90

GARDENING/ GREENBELT 90 90 90 90

DUST SEPARATION 100 100 100 100

FIRE HYDRANT 10 10 10 10

0 0

0 0

TOTAL USAGES MAX/DAY

IN M3 2896 1077 3973 996.4 2976.6

Fresh makeup water required for the project after expansion has been estimated to be

about 1077 m3/day, which includes requirement for captive power plant also. For steel

production, it is coming 1.01 m3/T of finished steel. This will be achieved by waste water

treatment and reuse in the process.

Additional ToR 13 Trace Metals in Water

F

(mg/l)

Cd

(mg/l)

Cr+6

(mg/l)

Se

(mg/l)

Pb

(mg/l)

Cu

(mg/l)

As

(mg/l)

Zn

(mg/l)

0.53 <0.001 0.002 <0.05 0.007 0.005 <0.001 0.13

The values of trace metals were found to be within the permissible limits as per IS:2296 “Class C limits”

Jamuria Municipality vide their memo No-441/JM dated 20.03.2012 have permitted

drawl of 1500m3/day water to M/s Gagan Ferro tech with 8” „T‟ connection from existing

header.




Additional ToR 10 System of coke quenching adopted with justification

Not Applicable. The project does not involve proposing of coke oven plant.

2.11 OTHER UTILITIES

Fuel oil system

Fuel oil will be required for every startup of DRI kiln after reaching temperature to be

switched over to coal. Fuel oil burner support will be needed when kiln temperature falls

during operation. Fuel oil is to be brought through tankers on road and stored in storage

tank in plant premises, over ground level and provided with fire protection arrangement.

Unloading pump set to be installed near storage tank.

Compressed air system

Compressed air at about 7kg/cm2 will be required for air injection in DRI kilns, dry oil

free compressed air will be needed for operation of pneumatic valves and specially for

scavenging of filter bags in bag house through solenoid valves. Compressed air will also

be required in ash handling pneumatic system, dust silo and other areas. Reciprocating

compressors, cylinder non lubricating type (graphite piston ring) with indicating type silica gel adsorber to be used with air storage tank.

Repair & maintenance work shop

For repair or maintenance of valves, compressors and motors there will be small workshops at each facility area including a central work shop for major work.

Laboratory

A general laboratory and environmental laboratory to be established for day to day

monitoring of important parameters with reporting to management for remedial measure.

Besides these facilities Administrative building for officials, time office, canteen,

dispensary with a doctor and trained nurses and guest house facilities shall be set up.

First aid boxes to be kept in all plant control rooms.

2.12 SOLID WASTE GENERATION AND ITS MANAGEMENT

Following will be the generation of solid waste from various facilities and their

management proposed.

Table 2.6 Solid Waste Inventory

Sl.

No

Solid waste Quantity in TPA Utilization measure


2 Induction Furnace Slag 40,000 To be used as river sand substitute

after grinding and residual Fe

recovery

3 Fly ash from DRI 40,000 To be dumped in OCP of ECL mines

and road making

4 Fly ash from AFBC 36,540 To be supplied to Brick

Manufacturing plants

5 Bottom ash from AFBC 24,360 To be supplied to Brick






7 Fe-Mn slag 24,700 To be used as raw material for Si-

Mn production


Basis of solid waste estimation is that Dolchar contains about 70% by wt. ash and boiler

grade coal about 42% ash and split ratio is 60% fly ash and 40% bottom ash.

Trace elements in bottom ash, fly ash, or slag of steel plants come from fuel used. These are usually As, B, Be, Cd, Hg, Pb, Se, Cr, Cu, Ni & Zn in varied ppm

For a typical coal combustion plant the most important gaseous species are As asAsO,

As4O6, and As2O5, Cd as elemental Cd and CdO, Hg as elemental Hg, Pb as PbO, Sb as

SbO, Se as SeO2, and Zn as element Zn. Co, Cu, Ni and some of the Cr are not volatilised and found in PM2.5 fly ash particles as ferrite spinels

Trace elements when vaporised, deposit on surface of finest ash particle at reduced

temperature and get separated in ESPs or Bagfllters. These are then used in making

bricks or cement and get fixed with them and does not affect the environment. Trace

elements if at all any remain in crystalline lattice of slag and does not leach out.

Additional ToR 12 Trace metals in waste material especially slag1.

Additional ToR 19 Details on toxic metal content in the waste material and its

composition and end use (particularly slag).

Additional ToR 20 Details on toxic content (TCLP), composition and end use of

slag

Composition of Slag

The composition of IF slag shows presence of 15 % of Fe and 85 % of silica. So, Fe is

recovered and is used as substitute of sand in road making and Filling low lying areas.

So, TCLP test is not envisaged as trace elements are not present.

2.13 MANPOWER REQUIREMENT

With the expansion of the project there will be requirement of additional man power to

run the project. The total manpower requirement will be around 750 including 500

employees of the existing unit. Besides these direct employments there will be

employment of contractual workmen to manage canteen, housekeeping and security

service of unit. The workmen will be required to work in shift and in general shift as the

unit will be required to run 24x7 basis.

2.14 ESTIMATED PROJECT COST& TIME OF COMPLETION

Gen.Tor 3 (i) Cost of project & time of completion

The existing Project cost as per EC is is INR 104.33 crore. In proposed modification 1x35

T EAF has been dropped and 1x350 TPD DRI Kiln and2x20T IF has been proposed,

considering costs of equipments and facilities already constructed, the modification

project cost has been estimated to be 100 crore, which include the cost of Pollution

control equipments and cost of CER.

Sl. No. Cost Head Estimated Cost, in Crore




1 Land development earth work & civil structure 2.0

2 Plant Machinery & Pollution control devices 85.0

3 Consultant Expenses 0.8

4 Contingency 2.2

5 Margin for WC 4.0

6 Cost of CER 1.0

7 Misc. Fixed Assets 1.0

8 Prel. Expenses 4.0

Total 100.00

2.14.1 Time of completion of the expansion project

Time is money and completion of project on time is essence and most important aspect

of a project. Zero time of project starts after getting prior EC.

Various activities of project implementation to be chalked out and critical path to be

predicted and due importance to be given to activities in critical path, because other

activities cannot be started if this activity is not completed on time. Project has to be

evaluated and reviewed at every stage to decide course of action.

Major works are to be carried out parallel and a few are to be carried out in series, one

after completion of other. However the estimate is as follows.

Sl. No. Activities Duration

1 Engineering: concept design, Basic

Engineering, detailed Engineering

90 days

2 Floating tender & placement of order for

equipments

45 days

3 Statutory clearances for Establishment:

Road, Railway and port

90 days

4 Civil work: Land development, excavation

& foundation work

90 days

5 Receipt of Equipments (30 days from

placement of order) & placement of order

for commodity items

60 days

6 Erection, Pressure testing, NDT 105 days

7 CTO Clearances 15 days

8 Inspection check list 30 days

9 Trial run 30 days

10 Commissioning & Commercial production 30 days

Total 425 days

Critical Path Method (CPM) and Project Evaluation & Review Technique (PERT) will be

followed for completion of project work. Taking into consideration, ToR, base line study,

preparation of EIA/EMP report, Public Hearing and appraisal by EAC for grant of EC,

consents, construction, trial run, CTO it will take about one year & two months of time.




2.15 DESCRIPTION OF MITIGATION MEASURES INCORPORATED INTO THE

PROJECT TO MEET ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS, ENVIRONMENTAL

OPERATING CONDITIONS OR OTHER EIA REQUIREMENTS (AS PER

REQUIRED SCOPE)

Following mitigation measures have been proposed to be incorporated into the project to

meet environmental standard.

2.16 ASSESSMENT OF NEW & UNTESTED TECHNOLOGY

No new or untested technology has been proposed for the project. DRI and IF

technology are well proven established technology and so many industries in India and

abroad are running in this technology.

2.17 CONCLUSION :

In conclusion of the technology process, raw material use, the power consumption in the

plant, the present environmental status has to be addressed. The same has been

covered in the succeeding chapter as Description of the Environment.

Sl.

No. Section/

Unit Operation

Emission released

waste generated

Types of

pollution

Pollution

Control

Equipments

1. Raw Material

and scrap

Handling

Stock, crushing,

screening, conveyor

transfer & charging

etc.

Fugitive dust

emission

Air pollution

Noise pollution

Bag filters &

Personal

Protective

Euipments

2 Induction

Furnace

Melting of sponge

iron, pig and scrap

Fume and slag Air pollution Bag filter , PPE

3 CCM Casting continuously

molten steel in multi

strand casters

Spillage of hot liquid

metal and contact

with hot water and

mill scale

Land pollution &

air pollution due

hot métal coming

in contact with

water.

ETP for water

treatment,

Separation of

Scraps

4 AFBC Generation of Steam

for power

generation

TSP, CO2, SO2, NOx

and generation of fly

and bed ash

Air pollution,

Water pollution,

Noise Pollution

ESPs with ID

fans, PPEs and

ETP




CHAPTER-3

DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

3.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the existing environmental baseline data of M/s Gagan Ferro Tech

Ltd. Jamuria Industrial Estate Dist-West Burdwan, West-Bengal, with its core zone and

surrounding areas. This includes the physical environment (comprising climate &

meteorology, air, water and land components), biological environment and socio-

economic aspect, which may get affected due to the expansion of existing steel Plant.

“Environment” in EIA context mainly focuses on physical, chemical, biological, geological,

social, economical and aesthetic dimensions along with their complex interactions which

affects individuals, communities and ultimately determines their forms, character,

relationship and survival.

The major purposes of describing the environmental settings of the study area are:

To understand the project need and environmental characteristics of the area.

To assess the existing environmental quality.

To identify environmentally significant factors or sensitive geographical locations.

3.2 STUDY AREA, PERIOD & COMPONENTS

M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd has its existing Steel Plant running at Jamuria Industrial Estate,

in Burdwan (w), district of West Bengal. Latitude of the Plant site is 230 41‟ 42.40‟‟ N and

longitude is 87006‟ 59.15‟‟ E with Average altitude of 105 m above MSL.

3.2.1 STUDY AREA

The study area comprises three parts for the generation of baseline data collection:

Core zone – The plant site covering 18.85 ha where the proposed expansion will

be under taken.

Buffer zone- It consist of 10 km aerial coverage around the core zone.

Environmental Sensitive zone- it extends up to 15 km aerial coverage around the

project site.

The brief description of the present environmental scenario obtained from primary

(monitored) data and partly from the secondary source (Govt. office) the description

covers the major environmental components like.

1) Physio-chemical (air, water, soil, noise etc.),

2) Biological (flora, fauna & ecology),

3) Human (Socio-economic) &

4) Aesthetics

3.2.2 STUDY PERIOD

Base line study of core and buffer zone of project site was winter, from 1st November,

2017 to 31st January 2018. The monitoring data of air, water, noise and soil has been

collected by M/s Kalyani Laboratories Pvt. Ltd, MoEF accreditated laboratory. The

monitoring was done under strict supervision of GTEEPL representatives.

3.2.3 COMPONENTS

SITE DESCRIPTIONS




The proposed modification project is located in Ikra, Jamuria Industrial Estate in the

state of West Bengal. And comes under Asansol Industrial Belt. The area fulfills the

requirement of raw materials , provides market and is easily accessible for industries.

Asansol Industrial Belt was declared as Critically polluted area and moratorium was

imposed by MoEFCC from 13.01.2010 to 31.08.2010. And Subsequently the moratorium

was lifted by OM J-11013/5/2010-1A.11(1) from MoEFCC on 17.09.13.

The Lifting of moratorium Encoraged M/s GFL to opt for expansion and Modification to

meet the market Demands for steel.

3.3 SITE CONNECTIVITY

The site is well connected with road and rail. The project site is Jamuria which is well

connected with the industrial Belt of Raniganj & Asansol west to project site. The NH-

2(Grand trunk road) 5.41Km away from the plant site is passing south of the project

site. The Jamuria Road is 300m away in North direction of project site Jamuria Road is

connected to NH 60 which is 2.9km away from the plant site and connects the NH 2 as

well. The site is about 175 km away from Kolkata city. A number of private &

government buses connect Durgapur Steel city with Kolkata city, the rest of West Bengal

and Jharkhand.

The nearest railway station Ikra is on west direction at 500m away from the plant site.

Ajay River is flowing only 6.7 Km North and Damodar River 11.35 km south from the

project site.

Fig 3.1 Project site connectivity




3.4 TOPOGRAPHY

Ikra, Jamuria is located in between the banks of River Ajay & Damodar in state of West-

Bengal. The largest coal fields of the Raniganj-Dhanbad area is also located close by.

Burdwan district is the only district in West Bengal that has a fine blend of both industry

as well as agriculture. It is one of the largest rice producing zones in India. While about

60 percent of the total population of the district is solely dependent on agriculture, there

is another about 40 percent whose livelihood comes from the non-agricultural sector.

The steel city of Durgapur is in the western part of the district, which is the busiest

Industrial portion in West Bengal.

Different types of soil are encountered in different topographical biological and

hydrological as well as geological condition within the Bardhaman district. In the west

coarse gritty soil blended with rock fragments is formed from the weathering of

pegmatites, quartz veins and conglomeratic sandstones, where as sandy soil

characteristic of granitic rocks and sandstones. This soil is of reddish color, medium to

coarse in texture, acidic in reaction, low in nitrogen, calcium, phosphate and other plant

nutrients. Water holding capacity of this soil increases with depth as well as with the

increase of clay portions.

In the eastern part of the area the thickness of the alluvial cover increases. This soil is

formed by the alluvium that is brought down by the several networks of rivers like the

Ajay, Damodar and others. Such type of soil is sandy, and Alkaline in nature, and is well

drained

This heavily forested land still has remains of the dense vegetation, though most parts

have been cleared up due to civilization purposes. Studies have shown that during the

Miocene period marine transgression has caused deposition of materials, which comprise

of a great variety of rocks, with its pebble beds is a good example of such geographic

change and consists of feldspathic sandstones, green shale‟s, carbonaceous, slates and

traces of dull coal. This area falls in the low hazard zone of Seismic Zone III with an

undulating topography.

Water bodies

There are many tanks, wells, canals, swamps and bils are found all over the area. Within

the Damodar Valley region, there are around 17000 tanks. The Durgapur barrage and

Maithon dam have formed two large reservoirs at the south-western and western

periphery of the district.

The water bodies in the area flowing across the area, either in form of rivers, or small

streams or lakes. There are two major rivers. The Damodar River in the southern parts

while the Ajay River in the northern part. Also, Singaran and Tamla, are small streams

flowing through the area, and ultimately joins the Damodar River. Kunur and Tumuni are

two other beautiful streams that join the Ajay River. During the summer months, the

smaller rivers usually dry up. The Damodar River is also dependent on the flow of water

from the different dams & barrage on the Damodar Valley Corporation.




3.5 LAND USE OF CORE ZONE

Gen.Tor 4(xi) Status Of Acquisition Of Land. If Acquisition Is Not Complete,

Stage Of Acquisition Process And Expected Time Of Complete Possession Of The

Land.

The company has already acquired 46.59Ac/18.85ha of land in which existing plant is

operating. The expansion project will be accommodated within the existing plant

boundary.

Land use break up of buffer zone has been given in table 3.2 below.

Table 3.1 Land utilization pattern of expansion project including existing.

SL NO

Facilities Total Land in Ha

1 Existing facility 8.09

2 Proposed Facility 1.78

3 Raw Material Yard & Finished products 1.33

4 Office & other permanent structures 0.28

5 Internal Road 0.83

6 Rain Water harvesting system 0.2

7 Water Reservoir 0.12

8 Green Belt 6.22

Total 18.85

Fig 3.7 Pie Chart showing the land use pattern of the core zone

Gen.Tor 4(xii) R & R Details In Respect Of Land In Line With State Government

Policy

The project is a brown field project under modification. The land is situated in an

Industrial Estate hence there is no settlement and any proposal of R & R does not arise.

8.09

1.781.33

0.280.81

0.2

0.12

6.22

Existing facility

Proposed Facility

Raw Material Yard & Finished products

Office & other permanent structures

Internal Road

Rain Water harvesting system




Data Base Referred

i. Survey of India: Topographical sheets

ii. False color composites of LISS Band 2,3, and 4 India Remote Sensing Satellite

iii. Limited field investigations for ground truth collection

Procedure Followed

The general land use/land cover features that are identified are built up land, agricultural

land, vegetation and forest, wasteland, water bodies and wet land, mines, water bodies,

settlement and infrastructure and others. The major land class units (LCU) comprising

river, canal, major road, railway line etc. were assessed from the topo map and field

investigation with help of topo sheets of survey of India. The present distribution of land

use unit of the study area is represented in the Table 3.19 and pictorially in Fig 3.21

and in pie chart 3.22

Out of the total study area major portion is agricultural land which covers 35.7% and is

followed by Settlement (15.02%) and industries (11.00%). So agricultural land and

agricultural products become the main source of income of the local people.

Table 3.2 Land Use Pattern in Buffer Zone

LUSE

AREA IN SQ

KM

BRICK KILN 8.51

CROP LAND 156.36

GROVES 0.36

INDUSTRY 15.59

MINING AREA 26.44

PLANTATION 6.10

RAILWAY 2.01

RESERVOIR 0.76

RIVER 8.34

ROAD 5.77

SCRUB LAND 49.78

SETTLEMENT 39.52

TANK 15.57

Additional ToR 4 Recent land-use map based on satellite imagery, high

resolution satellite image data having 1m-5m spatial resolution like quickbird,

Ikonos for 10 km radius area from proposed site.




No National park/wild life sanctuary exists within 15km radius of M/s Gagan Ferro Tech

Ltd. Limited project site. No Biosphere Reserves, no migratory corridor in 10km radius of

project site. Hence comment of Chief Wildlife Warden has not been sought.

Gen. ToR 5(i) Permission and approval for the use of forest land (forestry

clearance), if any and recommendation of the state forest department (if

applicable)

As can be seen from land use map given below that no forest land is nearby and it is not

required to acquire forest land also. The expansion project will be set up inside existing

running project boundary only. Not Applicable

Gen. Tor 5(ii) Land Use Map Based On High Resolution Satellite Imagery (GPS)

Of the Proposed Site Delineating the Forestland (In Case Of Project Involving

Forest Land More Than 40 Ha.

No forest land land has been acquired for the proposed modification project.

Gen. ToR 5(iii) Status of application submitted for obtaining the stage-i forestry

clearance along with latest status shall be submitted.

No forest land land has been acquired for the existing project which is running on

18.85 ha of land and proposed modification will be accommodated within this land.

Hence stage-i forestry clearance is not envisaged.

Gen. Tor 5(iv) The projects to be located within 10 km of national parks,

sanctuaries, biosphere reserves, migratory corridors of wild animals, the

project proponent shall submit the map duly authenticated by chief wildlife

warden showing these features vis-à-vis the project location and the

recommendations or comments of the chief wildlife warden-thereon.

Within 10 km radius of the proposed project no such National Parks, Sanctuaries,

Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals is found. So, map duly

authenticated by chief wildlife warden is not applicable.

Gen.ToR-5(v) Wildlife conservation plan duly authenticated by the chief wildlife

warden of the state government for conservation of schedule I fauna , if any

exists in the study area

Not applicable

Gen.ToR-5(vi)Copy of application submitted for clearance under the wildlife

(protection) act, 1972 to the standing committee of the national board for

wildlife

Not Applicable

Gen. Tor 4(viii) A List Of Major Industries With Name And Type Within Study

Area (10km Radius) Shall Be Incorporated. Land Use Details Of The Study Area.




Table 3.3 List of major industries with name, type, distances and direction

within study area of project site.

Sl.No Name of industry Type Ariel Distance in

km &

Direction w.r.t

project

1 Shyam Sel and Power Ltd. Intigrated

Steel

0.5, E

2 Super Smelters Ltd. Integrated

Steel

2.5, W

3 Shivam Dhatu Udyog Sponge Iron 3.0, SW

4 Kunjbehari Steel Pvt. Ltd. Sponge Iron 2.5, NW

5 Satyam Smelter Pvt. Ltd. Cement 0.8, N

6 Damodar Ispat Pvt. Ltd. Steel plant 5.0, NW

7 Rajshree Industries pvt. Ltd Int.steel Plant 2.0, NW

8 Baba Strip and Tubes Ltd. Rolling mill &

Galvanising

9 Damodar Cement Industries

Pvt. Ltd.

Cement 7.0, SW

10 Satwik Cement Cement 6.5, SW

11 Bakreswar Cement Cement 6.8, SW

12 Bhabani Cement Cement 8.0, SW

13 Kamdhenu Cement Plant Cement 7.0, SW

14 Srijan Cement Cement 7.5, SW

15 Gwalior Cement Cement 6.5, SW

16 Shrishti Cement Cement 8.5, SW

17 Shyam Super Cement Cement 7.0, SW

18 Mangalpur Cement Cement 9.0, SW

The above image has been taken by LISS III (Linear imaging Self-Scanning Sensor 3

camera provides multispectral data in 4 bands. The spatial resolution for visible (two

bands) and near infrared (one band) is 23.5 meters with a ground swath of 141 kms.




The fourth band (short wave infrared band) has a spatial resolution of 70.5 meters with

a ground swath of 148 kms. The final image is obtained by using false colour

composition.

3.6 ESTABLISHMENT OF BASE LINE

ToR-4(ix) Geological Features And Geo-Hydrological Status Of The Study

Area Shall Be Included

3.6.1 GEOLOGY

Jamuria area in Burdwan district of West Bengal is overlain by a thin alluvial cover and

forms a transition zone between hard rock and flat gently sloping alluvial terrain. The

alluvial area stretches eastwards beyond Jamuria to the rest of the district. The thickness

of alluvial cover in the Durgapur area increases in the eastward direction. The master

slope of the district is from west to east and southeast with the land having the highest

altitude at the extreme western corner of approx. 150m msl to about 10m near Kalna at

the eastern border of the district. Laterite and red soil in the western part of the district

and Vindhyan and Gangetic alluvium in rest of the area observed. The district

remarkably presents the entire geological succession from Archaean to recent. The

western part of the district comprising the Raniganj coalfield is underlain by the

Gondwana sedimentary rocks and contains valuable coal deposits. Exploration for ground

water in Durgapur area has revealed the presence of sediments, which are co-relatable

with the Raniganj coalfield rocks. By paleonological findings the age of the rocks are now

fixed as Middle Triassic to Jurassic, against Miocene as thought earlier. The sedimentary

framework is suggested to be mainly continental, with a marine transgression during

Oligocene-Miocene times. The central part and eastern part of the district are underlain

by alluvial formations.

A brief Description of each of the important geological formations commencing from the

most ancient rocks is given below.




Anorthosite Complex:

Anorthosite is a phaneritic, intrusive igneous rock characterized by a predominance

of plagioclase feldspar (90–100%), and a minimal mafic component (0–

10%). Pyroxene, ilmenite, magnetite, and olivine are the mafic minerals most commonly

present.

Anorthosite on Earth can be divided into two types: Proterozoic anorthosite (also known

as massif or massif-type anorthosite) and Archean anorthosite. These two types of

anorthosite have different modes of occurrence, appear to be restricted to different

periods in Earth's history, and are thought to have had different origins.

Many Proterozoic anorthosites occur in spatial association with other highly distinctive,

contemporaneous rock types (the so-called 'anorthosite suite' or 'anorthosite-mangerite-

charnockite complex'). These rock types include iron-rich diorite, gabbro,

and norite; leucocratic mafic rocks such as leucotroctolite and leuconorite; and iron-

rich felsic rocks, including monzonite and rapakivi granite. Importantly, large volumes

of ultramafic rocks are not found in association with Proterozoic anorthosites.

Occurrences of Proterozoic anorthosites are commonly referred to as 'massifs'. However,

there is some question as to what name would best describe any occurrence of

anorthosite together with the rock types mentioned above.

Anorthosites are also common in layered intrusions. Anorthosite in these layered

intrusions can form as cumulate layers in the upper parts of the intrusive complex or as

later-stage intrusions into the layered intrusion complex.[

Panchmarhi formations:

Pachmarhi Formation is constituted entirely of varied types of sandstones developed all

over the region Pachmarhi hills and plateau. However on closer examination the entire

sequence of about kilometer thick sandstone units can broadly be divided into three

members and described in the text with measured section and fossil contents.

Pachmarhi Formation is constituted entirely of varied types of sandstones developed all

over the region Pachmarhi hills and plateau. However on closer examination the entire

sequence of about kilometer thick sandstone units can broadly be divided into three

members

Basal sandstone: Medium to fine grained white micaceous sandstone with red and pink

tints, greenish at places; argillaceous, stray pebbles of quartz; convolutes and current

ripples, small scale troughs and festoons occur within this unit of sandstones;

Cave sandstone: Variegated pebbly sandstone mostly white with diff shades of pink

and brown, poor sorting, thick pebbly layers of sub-rounded quartz and sub –angular

feldspar, argillaceous sandstone with kaolinitic matrix.

Scarp Sandstone (Top Pachmarhi sandstone): Light brown to red medium to coarse

grained sandstone, often silicified, hard, with pebbly layers. Large cross bedded units;

fining upwards sequence, well developed from Pagara to Denwa view point on Pachmarhi

- Piparia road section and also on the Chauragarh and Dhupgarh hill tops.

3.6.2 GEO HYDROLOGY

Hydrogeology is the area of geology that deals with the distribution and movement

of groundwater in the soil and rocks of the Earth's crust (commonly in aquifers). The

term geo hydrology is often used interchangeably. Some make the minor distinction

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Phaneritic

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Intrusive_rock

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Igneous

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagioclase

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Feldspar

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mafic

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pyroxene

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ilmenite

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Magnetite

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Olivine

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mineral

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proterozoic

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Archean

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/History_of_Earth

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mangerite

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Charnockite

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diorite

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gabbro

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Norite

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Leucocratic

https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Leucotroctolite&action=edit&redlink=1

https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Leuconorite&action=edit&redlink=1

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Felsic

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monzonite

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rapakivi_granite

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ultramafic

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Layered_intrusion

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cumulate_rock

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Anorthosite#cite_note-3




between a hydrologist or engineer applying them to geology (geo hydrology), and

a geologist applying themselves to hydrology (hydrogeology).

Hydrogeology is a branch of the earth sciences dealing with the flow of water through

aquifers and other shallow porous media(typically less than 450 m below the land

surface.) The very shallow flow of water in the subsurface (the upper 3 m) is pertinent to

the fields of soil science, agriculture and civil engineering, as well as to hydrogeology.

The study of the interaction between groundwater movement and geology can be quite

complex. Groundwater does not always flow in the subsurface down-hill following

the surface topography; groundwater follows pressure gradients often following

fractures and conduits in circuitous paths. Taking into account the interplay of the

different facets of a multi-component system often requires knowledge in several diverse

fields at both the experimental and theoretical levels. The following is a more traditional

introduction to the methods and nomenclature of saturated subsurface hydrology, or

simply the study of ground water content.

Hydro geological study helps in prediction of future behavior of an aquifer system, based

on analysis of past and present observations. Some hypothetical, but characteristic like:

Whether the aquifer can support another subdivision

Whether the river will dry up if the farmer doubles his irrigation.

Whether the chemicals from the dry cleaning facility travel through the aquifer to

wells and contaminate.

Whether the plume of effluent leaving domestic septic system flow to

drinking water well

Most of these questions can be addressed through simulation of the hydrologic system

(using numerical models or analytic equations). Accurate simulation of the aquifer

system requires knowledge of the aquifer properties and boundary conditions. Therefore,

a common task of a hydro geologist is determining the aquifer properties using aquifer

tests.

In order to further characterize aquifers and aquitards some primary and derived

physical properties are introduced below. Aquifers are broadly classified as being either

confined or unconfined (water table aquifers), and either saturated or unsaturated; the

type of aquifer affects what properties control the flow of water in that medium (e.g., the

release of water from storage for confined aquifers is related to the storability, while it is

related to the specific yield for unconfined aquifers).

Dug wells are more common in the study area. Nearly 30% of the wells are shallow type

and water table is within 8m depth. The deep dug wells are up to a depth of 17m. The

study of fluctuation in ground in groundwater levels by the groundwater board (CGWB)

reveals that the fluctuation is in the order of 2.23m -4.23m bgl during pre-monsoon &

1.82m to 2.3m bgl during post-monsoon.

hree main rivers form the water resource in Jamuria region: Damodar, Barakar and Ajoy

and their tributaries cover the entire district of Burdwan. Damodar is the major river in

the area with a total length of 70 km flowing along the southern boundary of Asansol -

Durgapur Development Authority (ADDA). The town draws its present water supply both

from tube wells and the river Damodar. The raw water from the river was provide

complete conventional treatment and tube well water was disinfected before distribution

to the consumers through public stand-posts as well as individual household

connections. A small fraction of the population is not covered with piped water supply

and they depend upon groundwater drawn through hand pumps, tube-wells and open

dug wells. Of the total drinking water supplied which was approx. 182 MGD, the four

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Subdivision_(land)

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/River

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irrigation

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dry_cleaning

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Water_well

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aquifer_test



https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aquitard

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Water_table

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Storativity




industries namely, Durgapur Steel Plant (DSP), Durgapur Projects Ltd. (DPL), Durgapur

Thermal Power Station (DTPS) and Hindustan Fertilizer Corporation Ltd (HFCL) consume

the maximum water supplied both for industrial and their townships while a smaller

component is supplied to the nonindustrial population within the Durgapur Municipal

Corporation. The river water in Damodar along the entire stretch is found Colonies of

individual industries are fully sewered and well maintained. The present system of

domestic waste disposal in other areas consists of septic tanks / sanitary latrines.

Treated and untreated effluents and sullage drain into Tamla nala, which ultimately joins

river Damodar. The ground water potential is overall noderate in the area about 70% of

the buffer area has moderate potential 30% with good potential & 10% south of Ajay

river basin area has good potential.

3.6.3 DRAINAGE SYSTEM

The river system in Burdwan includes the Bhagirathi-Hooghly in the east, the Ajoy and

its tributaries in the north, and the Dwarakeswar, the Damodar and its branches in the

southwest. Besides, there are innumerable Khals and old riverbeds all over the area. The

notable rivers and khals are Damodar, Bhagirathi, Barakar, Ajay, Dwarakeswar, Nonia,

Singaram, Tamla, Kukua, Kunur, Tumuni, Khari, Banka, Chanda-kanki nala, Behula,

Gangur, Brahmani, Khandesvari, Karulia nala, Dwaraka or Babla, Koiya nala,

Kandarkahal, Kanadamodar, Kananadi, Ghea, Kakinadi etc.

There are many tanks, wells, canals, swamps and bils all over the district. In the

Damodar Valley region, there are around 17000 tanks. The Durgapur barrage and

Mithon dam have formed two large reservoirs at the southwestern and western periphery

of the district.

Nearest river of project site is Ajay which is about 8 km from project site on North. The

basin of river Ajay has a very special shape and this influences its flood pattern. The

river has about 70% of its basin just upstream of Jamuria town. This upper catchment of

Jharkhand plateau, the plateau, generates heavy run-off during high rainfall and is

carried to Jamuria in a short time.

The flowing water finds the lowest parts of the earth‟s surface, forming small rivulets

that merge into larger ones and eventually find their way into a river. When a river

carries much more water than usual, it is said to be “in spate,” meaning “to

flood” settlements beside Damodar River, can be a mixed blessing; for once in a while,

the river may overflow its banks and generate a heavy toll of property losses, income

losses, and sometimes losses of life as well. In some cases, man has learned to live with

such periodic inundations of the fertile floodplain.

Gen. ToR 4(x) Details of drainage of the project upto 5km radius of study area.

If the site is within 1km radius of any major river, peak and lean season river

discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency based on peak rainfall data

past 30yrs. Details of flood level of project site and maximum flood level of the

river shall also be provided (mega green field project).




On an average the normal monsoonal rainfall ranges from 1040.2 to 1182.5 mm per year

and calculated runoff ranges from 321.7 to 438.2 mm per year.

DVC system is providing flood benefit of only 162.56 mm of surface runoff to the lower

catchment in place of 452.0 mm design capacity. The estimated mean monsoonal runoff

(1951–2003) is 355.0 mm, having 172.44 mm of unregulated runoff. This amount of

runoff is not controlled by DVC storage system and is finally released by Durgapur

Barrage into main River and canals. So there are ample chances of peak flood flow and

inundation of Burdwan Plains,

Gen.ToR-6(v) Whether The Site Falls Near To Polluted Stretch Of River

Identified By CPCB/MoEF&CC

No, this site does not fall near to any polluted stretch of river as identified by

CPCB/MoEF&CC. However, the company will draw water from Ajay river for industrial use

purposes, which is not a polluted River as per the CPCB/MoEF&CC.

Gen.ToR-6(vi) Ground Water Monitoring At Minimum At 8 Locations Shall Be

Included.

Table 3.4 Ground water Sampling Location

Sl.

No.

Station

Code Sampling point

Locations Distance

(Km) Direction

Type of area

w.r.t. Project Site

1 BA1 Ikrah

23 41 01.32 N

87 06 28.35 E 1.57 SW Rural Industrial

2 BA2 Topsi

23°39'46.03"N

87° 7'55.90"E 3.77 South Rural Industrial

3 BA3 Searsole

23 38 15.32 N

87 08 15.78 E 6.0 South Industrial

4 BA4 Jadudenga 23°40'35.67"N

87° 6'21.97"E 2.28 South Rural

5 BA5 Raniganj

3°39'18.77"N

87°11'23.68"E 7.48 South Urban Industrial

6 BA6 Bahula

23 39 20.85 N

87 11 23.53 E 8.6 South East Rural, Coal Fields

7 BA7 Jemari

23 38 58.10N

87 6 52.13E 6.92 South West Urban

8 BA8 Mondolpur

23°41'31.16"N

87° 5'11.11"E 3.20 West Rural




Table 3.5 Ground Water Quality in study area

Sl. No.

Characteristics Unit

IS : 10500 Limits+

Ikrah Bore Well

Topsi Bore Well

Searsole Bore Well

Jadudenga Bore Well

Raniganj Bore Well

Bahula Bore Well

Jemari Bore Well

Mondalpur Bore Well

Protocol

Desirable Limit

GW 1 GW 2 GW 3 GW 4 GW 5 GW 6 GW 7 GW 8

1 pH -

6.5-8.5 7.6 7.32 7.27 7.21 7.24 7.42 7.36 7.27 IS3025:PART11:1983

2 Colour Hazen

5 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 IS3025:PART04:1983

3

Odour Un Objectionable

Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable IS3025:PART05:1983

4 Taste

Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable IS 3025:PART7&8:1984

5 Turbidity NTU

1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.3 0.6 0.8 0.7 0.2 IS 3025:PART10:1984

6 Conductivity µmoh/c

m -- 737 710 725 680 665 690 700 635 APHA-22nd Edition (2510

A)

7

Calcium Hardness as Caco3

mg/l

-- 80 68 72 60 64 52 56 48 IS 3025:PART40:1991

(Reaff 2003)

8

Magnesium Hardness as Caco3

mg/l

-- 112 110 115 105 94 117 118 106 IS 3025:PART46:1994

9 Alkalinity as CaCO3)

mg/l 200 192 178 187 165 158 169 174 154

IS 3025:PART23:1986

10 Total Hardness as CaCO3

mg/l 200 180 172 176 160 152 164 168 144 IS 3025:PART21:2009

11 Total Dissolved Solid

mg/l 500 406 390 398 374 366 380 384 350

IS 3025:PART15:1984

12 Iron as Fe mg/l

1 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 IS 3025:PART53:2003

13

Chloride as Cl mg/l

250 30 26 28 20 18 24 26 16

IS 3025:PART32:1988

14 Residual Chlorine mg/l

0.2 <0.04 <0.04 <0.04 <0.04 <0.04 <0.04 <0.04 <0.04 IS 3025:PART26:1986

15 Calcium as Ca mg/l

75 32 27.2 28.8 24 25.6 20.8 22.4 19.2 IS 3025:PART40:1991

16 Magnesium as Mg mg/l

30 27.2 26.7 27.9 25.5 22.8 28.4 28.7 25.8 IS 3025:PART46:1994




17 Copper as Cu mg/l

0.05 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 IS 3025:PART42:1992

18 Manganese as Mn mg/l

0.1 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 IS 3025:PART59:2006

19 Sulphate as SO4 mg/l

200 49 42 46 44 36 40 41 35 IS 3025:PART24:1986

20 Nitrate as NO3-N mg/l

45 1.8 1.1 1.6 1.6 1.1 1.8 2.6 1.8 IS 25:PART34:1988

21 Fluoride as F mg/l

1 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 IS 3025:PART60:2008

22

Phenolic Compound C6H5OH

mg/l

0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.01 <0.001 <0.001 <0.01 <0.001

IS 3025:PART43:1992

23 Mercury as Hg mg/l

0.001 <0.0005 <0.0005 <0.0005 <0.0005 <0.0005 <0.0005 <0.0005 <0.0005 IS 3025:PART48:1994

24 Cadmium as Cd mg/l

0.003 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 IS 3025:PART41:1992

25

Selenium as Se mg/l

0.01 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005

IS 3025 (Part 56):2003 RA 2009

26 Arsenic as As mg/l

0.01 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 IS 3025:PART37:1988

27

Cyanide as CN mg/l 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 IS 3025 (Part 7):1986 RA 2009

28 Lead as Pb mg/l

0.01 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 IS 3025:PART47:1994

29 Zinc as Zn mg/l

5 0.035 0.03 0.025 0.022 0.032 0.02 0.019 0.016 IS 3025:PART49:1994

30 Chromium as Cr+6 mg/l -- <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 APHA-22nd Eds (3500-Cr-B): 2012

31 Aluminium as Al mg/l

0.03 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 IS 3025:PART55:2003

32 Boron as B mg/l

0.5 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 IS 3025:PART57:2005

33

Total Coliform MPN/100ml

Shall not be detected in any 100 ml sample Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent

IS 1622:1981 (Reaff 2003)




Gen. ToR 6 (iv) Surface water quality of nearby river (60m upstream and

downstream) and other surface drains at 8 locations as per CPCB/MoEFCC guide

line.

The ground water and surface water sampling locations along with analysis reports are

provided below:

Table 3.6 Surface water Sampling Location

Sl.

No. Code Location

Location Direction Distance

in KM

W r t proposed plant site

Surface water

1 SW2 Upstream of Ajay River near

Darbardenga

23 45 13.82N

87 08 32.44E N

7.46

2 SW3 Downstream of Ajay River

near Joynagar

23 46 42.69N

87 04 29.61E N

9.2

3 SW4 Pond water of Jamuria

23 42 14.35N

87 04 29.61E W

3.10

4 SW5 Pond water of Nandi

23 41 54.31N

87 04 2.68E W

3.71

5 SW6 Pond water of Sarthakpur

23 39 01.56N

87 06 39.18E SW

2.42

6 SW7 Pond water of Ramsayar

23 39 01.56N

87 05 59.27E S

5.14

7 SW1 Pond water of Ikrah

23 40 55.49N

87 06 22.23E NE

1.79

8 SW8 Pond water of Chakdola

23 41 27.78N

87 09 27.58E E

4.07




Table 3.7 Surface Water Quality in study area

Sl. No.

Characteristics Unit

IS:2296-1982 Class ‘C’ Limits

River Ajoy U/s

River Ajoy D/s

Jamuria Pond

Nandi Pond

Sarthakpur Pond

Ramsayar Pond

Ikra Pond Chakdola Pond

Protocol

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 1 pH - 6.5-8.5 7.3 7.2 7.1 7.0 7.4 7.3 6.9 7.5 IS 3025:PART11:1983 (Reaff

2002)

2 DO Mg/l 4 7.3 6.8 7.4 6.7 6.9 7.2 7.1 7.5 IS 3025:PART58:2006

3 BOD mg/l 3 2.7 4.5 2.4 4.8 4.2 3.2 3.4 2.5 IS 3025:PART44:1993

4 Total Coli form MPN/100 ml

5000 > 1600 > 1600 900 900 500 900 500 > 1600 IS 1622:1981 (Reaff 2003)

5 Colour Hazen 300 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.0 IS 3025:PART04:1983 (Reaff 2002)

6 Electrical Conductivity µmoh/cm 302 320 350 340 310 330 290 368

7 Fluoride (as F) mg/l 1.5 0.07 0.08 0.14 0.13 0.11 0.12 0.06 0.15 IS 3025:PART60:2008

8 Cadmium mg/l 0.01 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 IS 3025:PART41:1992

9 Chloride (as Cl) mg/l 600 28 32 36 34 30 38 24 42 IS 3025:PART32:1988

10 Chromium (as Cr+6) mg/l 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 IS 3025:PART52:2003

11 Cyanide (as CN) mg/l 0.05 0.001 0.001 0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 IS 3025:PART27:1986

12 Total Dissolved Solid mg/l 1500 180 192 210 204 186 200 174 220 IS 3025:PART15:1984 (Reaff 2002)

13 Selenium mg/l 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 IS 3025:PART56:2003

14 Sulphate (as SO4) mg/l 400 38 42 44 48 40 45 32 50 IS 3025:PART24:1986

15 Lead mg/l 0.1 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 IS 3025:PART47:1994

16 Copper mg/l 1.5 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 IS 3025:PART42:1992

17 Arsenic mg/l 0.2 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 IS 3025:PART37:1988 (Reaff 1999)

18 Iron mg/l 50 0.21 0.25 0.29 0.3 0.35 0.42 0.5 0.57 IS 3025:PART53:2003

19 Mercury as Hg mg/l 0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 IS 3025:PART48:1994

20 Phenolics compounds (as

C6H5OH) mg/l 0.005 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 IS 3025:PART43:1992

21 Zinc mg/l 15 0.02 0.025 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.045 0.033 0.062 IS 3025:PART49:1994 (Reaff 2003)

22 Anionic detergents (as MBAS)

mg/l 1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 Annex K of IS 13428:2005

23 Oil & grease mg/l 0.1 < 0.025 < 0.025 < 0.025 < 0.025 < 0.025 < 0.025 < 0.025 < 0.025 IS 3025:PART39:1991

24 Nitrate (as NO3) mg/l 50 0.5 0.65 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.55 0.4 1 IS 3025:PART34:1988




3.6.4 GEOMORPHOLOGY

Different types of soil are encountered in topographical biological, hydrological, and

geological conditions at Durgapur in Burdwan district. In the west, coarse gritty soil

blended with rock fragments is formed from the weathering of pegmatite, quartz veins

and conglomeratic sandstones, whereas sandy soil characteristic of granite rocks and

sandstones. This soil is reddish, medium to coarse in texture, acidic in reaction, low in

nitrogen, calcium, phosphate and other plant nutrients. Water holding capacity of this

soil increases with depth as well as with the increase of clay portions. Towards the east

alluvial soil attains an enormous thickness in the low level plains to the east. This alluvial

soil is formed of alluvium brought down by the Ajay, Damodar, Bhagirathi and other

rivers. These soils are sandy, well drained and slightly acidic.

3.6.5 AIR ENVIRONMENT

3.6.5.1 Climatic Conditions of The Project Site

The climate in the study region is generally dry and hot and is characterized with

seasonal variations of temp., humidity, rainfall etc.

Summer March to June

South west monsoon season July to September.

Post Monsoon season October and November

Winter December to February

The climate setting of the area has been arrived by collecting the existing data from the

IMD station at Durgapur and onsite IMD station set up at the project site.

TEMPERATURE

The temperature profile of this region is presented in the Table 3.8

Table-3.8 Temperature Profile of the Study Area.

Sl.

No.

Description Minimum

Temperature (0C)

Maximum

Temperature (0C)

1 Summer Season mean 24.9 45.0

2 Winter Season mean 6.8 27.0

3 Monsoon season mean 24.3 37.7

HUMIDITY

The maximum and minimum humidity values of the region are given in table-3.9.

Table-3.9: Maximum and Minimum Humidity of the Study Area

Maximum. humidity 81%

Minimum humidity 47%

RAINFALL




The area receives fairly good amount of rainfall from the southwest monsoon during

June to September. Light showers of rain occur during the months of October, November

and sometimes in December also. The rainfall characteristics of the region are given in

the Table-3.10.

Table- 3.10: Rainfall Pattern in the Region

Predominant rainy season (monsoon) June to September

Average annual rainfall (mm) 1400 mm

Most rainy Month July, August

The critical weather elements that influence air pollution are wind speed, wind direction,

temperature, which together determines the atmospheric stability. Hence it is an

indispensable part of any Air Pollution Studies and required for interpretation of baseline

information.

CLIMATIC CONDITION DURING MONITORING PERIOD

Meteorological data was collected by the onsite meteorological station at the project site

during non-monsoon period, i.e., November 2017-January 2018.

In order to determine the micrometeorological conditions of the study area a temporary

micro-meteorological monitoring observatory was set up near the site. The following

parameters were recorded at hourly intervals continually during the study period.

Wind speed

Wind direction

Relative humidity

Air temperature

Cloud cover

Wind speed and direction is measured by Anemometer, air temperature by

Thermometer, relative humidity is measured by Hygrometer and cloud cover recorded

through visual interpretation. At the meteorological station Wind speed & direction,

Temperature, Relative humidity and Cloud Cover were recorded at hourly intervals

throughout the monitoring period. Total Rainfall for the entire monitoring period was also

recorded.

Wind roses on sixteen-sector basis (N, NNE, NE, ENE, E, ESE, SE, SSE, S, SGW, GW,

WGW, W, WNW, NW, and NNW) have been drawn for 1-24 hours.

From the analysis of data the overall predominant wind direction has been from North ,

North East and North West direction during winter season.

The average wind velocity is 3.56 m/s and the calm period is 1.44%. Details of the

overall wind frequency distribution during the study period at the site are given in

Table-3.11.

The Wind Rose diagrams for the month of November, December,and January during the

winter season are given as Fig-3.15, 3.16, and 3.17 & 3.18.




Table-3.11: Summarized Meteorological Data at site.

Jamuria Nov-Jan 2018 Overall

Year Month Day

Hr.(1-

24) CL. Cover DBT RH PR WD WS

2017 12 1 1 1 19 58 983 360 2.5

2017 12 1 2 1 19 58 983 360 2.5

2017 12 1 3 0 19 58 983 360 2.5

2017 12 1 4 0 19 58 983 360 2.5

2017 12 1 5 0 19 58 983 360 2.5

2017 12 1 6 0 19 58 984 360 2.5

2017 12 1 7 0 19 58 984 360 2.5

2017 12 1 8 0 20 50 984 360 2.5

2017 12 1 9 0 20 50 984 360 2.5

2017 12 1 10 0 20 50 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 11 0 20 50 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 12 0 21 50 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 13 0 21 63 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 14 0 21 63 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 15 1 21 64 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 16 1 21 65 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 17 0 21 66 984 315 2.7

2017 12 1 18 0 21 66 984 315 2.7

2017 12 1 19 0 20 65 982 315 2.7

2017 12 1 20 0 20 65 982 315 2.7

2017 12 1 21 0 19 64 982 315 2.7

2017 12 1 22 0 19 64 982 315 2.7

2017 12 1 23 0 19 64 982 315 2.7

2017 12 1 24 0 19 64 982 315 2.7

Source of information:

Primary Data – Data from onsite Meteorological station during study period

(Nov-2017-Jan-2018)

Secondary information on meteorological conditions has been collected from the

nearest IMD station at Durgapur and IMD Book (1981-2011)

Temperature

The maximum and the minimum temperatures recorded during winter season in the

project site during the study period are 27.20C and 6.8ºC respectively, whereas the

relative humidity varied between maximum 66% and minimum 62%.

Rainfall


June to September. Light showers occur during the months of October and November.

The average annual rainfall of the study area is 1400 mm.




3.6.6 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY

The baseline status of the Ambient Air Quality has been assessed through a scientifically

designed Ambient Air Quality monitoring network. The location of the network of

ambient air quality monitoring stations in the study area was based on the following

criteria.

1. Meteorological conditions like downward prevailing wind direction

2. Representation of the site like sensitive areas, settlements, roads, Industrial area,

Major water bodies etc.

3. Influence of the existing sources like urban & Industrial area, infrastructures

4. Major human settlements in the study area

5. Accessibility to the location

The study area represents mostly industrial environment. Air pollution in the project area

is not bad despite the presence of several polluting industry. The prominent sources of

air pollution in the study area are due to emission from industries, vehicular movement

and domestic fuel as coal burning in some parts of the study area.

Methodology adopted for Air Quality Survey

The baseline monitoring was done at two locations in the core zone and eight locations in

the buffer zone. These stations were selected on the basis of even distribution over the

study area taking in to consideration various factors like topography of the region,

proximity of sensitive establishment and human settlements, industrial activities in the

area and its proximity, down wind direction etc. The details of these Ambient Air quality-

sampling stations are shown in Fig 3.13. All the ambient air quality monitoring stations

were installed on flat roof, at least 3m above the ground level with no obstructions and

ensuring free flow of the wind




Duration of sampling

The Duration of Sampling of Particulate Matter (PM10), Particulate Matter (PM2.5), SO2,

NOX, was each twenty four hourly continuous sampling per day and CO was sampled for

8 Hours continuous thrice in 24 hour duration monitoring. The Monitoring was conducted

for two days in a week for three months. This is to allow a comparison with the present

revised standards mentioned in the latest gazette notification of the Central Pollution

Control Board (CPCB - NOV- 18 - 2009)

Sampling Frequency

The Ambient Air Quality Parameters along with their Frequency of Sampling are given

below

Table 3.12 Monitored parameters and frequency of sampling

Parameters Sampling Frequency

Particulate Matter (PM10) 24 Hourly Sampling twice a week for 3 months

Particulate Matter (PM2.5) 24 Hourly Sampling twice a week for 3 months

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) 24 Hourly Sampling twice a week for 3 months

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX) 24 Hourly Sampling twice a week for 3 months

Carbon Monoxide (CO) 8 Hourly Sampling for 24 Hour twice a week for 3

months

Instrument Used for Sampling

Respirable Dust samplers (APM 460BL, FPS 550) have been used for monitoring

Particulate Matter (PM10, PM2.5). Gaseous Pollutants like SO2, NOX, were collected in the

impinger of attachment box (APM - 411) connected with RDS. Charcoal filled glass tubes

were used for collection of Carbon Monoxide.

In General the following points were taken in to consideration during sampling

Height of the inlet must be 3 – 10 m above the ground level.

The Sampler must be more than 20 m from trees.

Distance of the sampler to any air flow obstacle i.e. buildings, must be more than

two times the height of the obstacle above the sampler.

There should be unrestricted air flow in three of four quadrants.

Table 3.13 Techniques used for ambient air quality analysis

Sl. No. Parameter Technique Technical Protocol

1 Particulate Matter (PM10) Respirable Dust Sampler

(Gravimetric Method)

IS: 5182 Part IV

2 Particulate Matter (PM2.5 ) FP Sampler (Gravimetric

Method)

IS: 5182 Part IV




3 Sulphur Dioxide Modified West and Geake

method

IS: 5182 Part II

4 Oxides of Nitrogen Jacob & Hochheiser

method

IS: 5182 Part VI

5 Carbon Monoxide Gas Chromatography IS: 5182 Part X

Table- 3.14: Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations

Sl.

No.

Station

Code

Sampling point Locations Distance

(Km)

Directio

n

Type of area

w.r.t. Project Site

1 CA1 Core - 0 0 Specialized Source Survey

Station

2 CA2 Core - 0 0 Specialized Source Survey

Station

3 BA1 Belbad 23 41 01.32 N

87 06 28.35 E

4.11 SE Surrounded by abandoned

collieries converted to

ponds , red brick kilns and

coal mines nearby

4 BA2 Jambad 23°39'46.03"N

87° 7'55.90"E

8.3 SE Downward prevailing wind

direction

5 BA3 Shibdanga 23 38 15.32 N

87 08 15.78 E

6.12 S High traffic Volume, road

joining NH 2 and approach

road to Jamuria Industrial

Estate

6 BA4 Berala 23°40'35.67"N

87° 6'21.97"E

5.1 SW Surrounded by abandoned

collieries converted to

ponds , red brick kilns and

coal mines nearby

7 BA5 Banali 3°39'18.77"N

87°11'23.68"E

4.16 SW Non –urban Station and

highly populated

8 BA6 Chakdola 23 39 20.85 N

87 11 23.53 E

4.13 E Non –urban Station and

highly populated

9 BA7 Shirpur 23 38 58.10N

87 6 52.13E

7.3 W High traffic Volume, road

joining NH 2

10 BA8 Bagdiha 23°41'31.16"N

87° 5'11.11"E

8.1 NE Downward prevailing wind

direction

CA : Core zone BA : Buffer zone

ToR-6(i) Determination Of Atmospheric Inversion Level At The Project Site And

Site-Specific Micro-Meteorological Data Using Temperature, Relative Humidity,

Hourly Wind Speed And Direction And Rainfall.




Mixing Height

Mixing Height or Mixing Depth is used by meteorologists to quantify the vertical height of

mixing in the atmosphere. The concept of mixing height (MH) is based on the principle

that when the atmosphere is heated from below due to the solar radiation, it becomes

unstable and gives rise to vertical motion and mixing. Mixing height is thus, defined as

the top of a surface based layer in which vertical mixing is relatively vigorous and the

lapse rate is approximately dry adiabatic. These conditions are normally seen during

cloudless condition during day time. In the case of a ground based inversion, the mixing

height is zero or absent. Forecasting of mixing height is done with the aid of the vertical

temperature profile. A radiosonde is sent aloft and temperatures at various altitudes are

radioed back. The altitude at which the dry adiabatic line intersects the radiosonde

measurements is taken as the maximum mixing depth (MMD). The MMD is a function of

stability. In unstable air, the MMD is higher while it is lower in stable air. There is a

seasonal variation of mixing height. During summer daylight hours, MMD can be a few

thousand meters, where it can be a few hundred meters in winter. It also varies during

the course of a day. It is lowest at night and increases as the day progresses. With a

measure of both MMD and wind speed with respect to height, we get a good idea of the

amount of pollutant dispersion.

The mixing height shows increasing trend during the day with the increase of surface air

temperature, achieving maxima around the time of maximum surface temperature and

later in the afternoon over rural /open areas in fair weather situation. However, it is

more likely to remain persistent to heights of roughly a hundred meters or so over urban

area sowing to slower cooling than rural / open areas.

Mixing Height at project site of M/s GFL




Source: Indian Metrological Department, New Delhi

Inversion height is used to quantify the vertical height of mixing in the atmosphere. The

concept of inversion height is based on the principle that when the atmosphere is heated

from below due to the solar radiation, it becomes unstable and gives rise to vertical

motion and mixing. It is thus defined as the top of a surface based layer in which vertical

mixing is relatively vigorous and the lapse rate is approximately dry adiabatic.

ToR-6(iii) Raw Data Of All AAQ Measurement For 12 Weeks Of All Stations As

Per Frequency Given In The NAAQM Notification Of Nov. 2009 Along With-Min.-

Max. Average And 98% Values For Each Of The AAQ Parameters From Data Of

All AAQ Stations Should Be Provided As An Annexure To The EIA Report.

Monitoring report as per notification, range value and 98 percentiles has been given in

table 3.11 below with discussions and data of all 8 locations have been attached as

annexure II to this EIA report

Gen.ToR-6(ii) & Add ToR 5 AAQ data(except Monsoon) at 8 locations for PM10,

PM2.5,SO2, NOx, CO and other parameters relevant to the project shall be

collected. The monitoring stations shall be based CPCB guide lines and take into

account the pre-dominant wind direction, population zone and sensitive

receptors including reserved forests.

The air quality in centre position of core zone and 8 locations in buffer zone of 10km

radius.




Table 3.15 A Summarized Ambient Air Quality data

Location Name

PM10 (µg/m3) PM2.5 (µg/m3) SO2 (µg/m3) NOx(µg/m3) CO in µg/m3

Max Min 98th

perc Max Min

98th

perc Max Min

98th

perc Max Min

98th

perc Max Min

98th

perc

Belbad 98.6 76.4 98.1 54.2 42.0 53.9 18.5 14.6 18.4 33.5 22.8 33.4 635 527 633.9

Jambad 94.6 78.0 95.5 52.8 43.4 52.4 18.7 15.2 18.3 29.7 21.3 29.1 624 518 622.8

Shibdanga 97.5 77.3 96.5 42.3 50.2 49.4 18.5 14.3 18.4 33.4 21.3 33.1 651 541 650.5

Berla 91.4 75.2 90.0 50.1 43.6 50.0 24.1 15.0 22.2 32.1 23.0 30.2 642 533 640.6

Benali 98.1 78.7 96.4 55.1 43.3 54.5 18.9 15.3 18.6 28.4 23.1 28.3 689 572 687.8

Chakdola 96.5 77.9 95.4 54.8 44.2 54.2 24.6 13.8 23.0 33.6 22.8 32.0 569 473 568.4

Shibpur 96.4 77.4 94.3 54.1 44.0 51.8 24.6 15.1 24.1 28.6 22.8 28.6 518 407 503.8

Bagdiha 103.0 73.0 95.3 51.5 43.9 50.4 22.1 15.8 21.0 29.7 22.8 29.5 590 490 589.4

Range of 98

Perc AAQ 90.0-98.1 49.4-54.5 18.3-24.1 28.3-33.4 503.8-687.8

Available Gap

for new project 1.9 5.5 35.9 26.6 1312.2

CPCB Norms

2009

100µg/m3 (24

hours)

60 µg/m3 (24

hours)

80 µg/m3 (24

hours)

80 µg/m3 (24

hours)

2000 µg/m3 (8

hours)

INSTRUMENT

USED AND

METHODS OF

MEASUREMENT

IS:5182 (Part-23)-

2012 Fine Particulate

Sampler SLE- 105

and Gravimetric

Fine Particulate

Sampler SLE- 105

and Gravimetric

IS:5182 (Part-2)

2001,(RA-2012)

Attachment SLE-

133 Spectro

photometric

analysis

IS:5182 (Part-6)-

2012 Improved

West and Gaeke

Air Sampling, 3rd

Edn-Method -401

Indophenol Blue

Outside project boundary during study period from Nov 2017 to Jan 2018 the ambient air monitoring results were like this.

PM10 varied from 90.0-98.1 µg/m3 and PM2.5 varied from 49.4-54.5 µg/m3 while SO2 varied from 18.3-24.1 µg/m3 and NOx varied

from 28.3-33.4 µg/m3, CO from 503.8-687.8 µg/m3




Table 3.15 B Summarized Ambient Air Quality data

Location Name

Ammonia in µg/m3 Lead (Pb) in µg/m3 Nickel (Ni) in ng/m3 Arsenic (As) 10 ng/m3

Max Min 98th

perc Max Min

98th

perc Max Min

98th

perc Max Min

98th

perc

Belbad 34.1 12.3 31.8 0.2 <0.5 0.2 7.4 <4.0 7.4 1.7 <1.0 1.7

Jambad 25.4 <10.1 23.0 0.1 <0.05 0.1 4.7 <4.0 4.7 1.7 <1.0 1.7

Shibdanga 28.3 <10.0 26.0 0.2 <0.05 0.1 4.8 <4.0 4.8 1.7 <1.0 1.6

Berla 29.7 10.7 27.3 0.2 <0.05 0.2 4.9 <4.0 4.9 1.4 <1.0 1.4

Benali 28.3 <10.5 26.0 0.1 <0.05 0.1 5.6 <4.0 5.5 1.8 <1.0 1.8

Chakdola 22.2 <10.0 21.9 0.1 <0.05 0.1 4.8 <4.0 4.8 1.6 <1.0 1.6

Shibpur 22.0 <10.0 21.7 0.2 <0.05 0.2 4.9 <4.0 4.9 1.4 <1.0 1.4

Bagdiha 29.7 <10.0 27.3 0.2 <0.05 0.2 4.9 <4.0 4.9 1.4 <1.0 1.4

Range of 98 Perc

AAQ 23.0-31.8 0.1-0.2 4.7-7.4 1.4-1.8

Available gap for

new projects 368.2 0.8 12.6 4.2

CPCB Norms

2009

400 µg/m3(24 hour

average µg/m3) 1µg/m3(24 Hour µg/m3) 20ng/m3 Annual 06 ng/m3 Annual

INSTRUMENT

USED AND

METHODS OF

MEASUREMENT

Air Sampling, 3rd Edn-

Method -411 UV

Photometric

IS 5182 : Part 22AAS/ICP

method after sampling on

EPM 2000 or equivalent

filter paper

IS 5182 : Part

22AAS/ICP method after

sampling on EPM 2000

or equivalent filter paper

IS 5182 : Part 22AAS/ICP

method after sampling on

EPM 2000 or equivalent

filter paper

NH3 varied from 23.0-31.8 µg/m3 and while Pb varied from 0.1-0.2 µg/m3 and As varied from 1.4-1.8 ng/m3,




3.6.7 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Gen.Tor-6(vii) Noise Levels Monitoring At 8 Locations Within The Study Area.

The physical description of sound concerns its loudness as a function of frequency. Noise

in general is an unwanted sound, which is composed of many frequency components of

various types of loudness level distributed over the audible frequency range. Sound

Pressure Levels (SPL‟s) are measured in decibels on the A-weighted scale, dB (A), where

the A-weighting scheme accounts for the sensitivities of the human ear over the audio

spectrum.

Reconnaissance Survey and Identification of Sampling Locations

A preliminary reconnaissance survey was undertaken to identify the major noise

generating sources in the area. The noise at different noise generating sources based on

the industrial activities, commercial activities, traffic, noise at sensitive areas like

hospitals and schools have been identified. The noise monitoring has been conducted at

all the identified location in the study area once in a season during the study period.

Measured noise levels, displayed as a function of time, is useful for describing the

acoustical climate of the community. Noise levels recorded at each station with a time

interval of about 60 minutes are computed for equivalent noise levels. Equivalent noise

level is a single number descriptor for describing time varying noise levels. The

equivalent noise level is defined mathematically as

Leq = 10 Log L / T∑ (10Ln/10)

Where, L = Sound pressure level at function of time dB (A)

T = Time interval of observation

Noise levels during the night time generally drop, therefore to compute Equivalent noise

levels for the night time, noise levels are increased by 10 dB (A) as the night time high

noise levels are judged more annoying compared to the day time. Noise levels at a

particular station are represented as Day Night equivalents (Ldn). Day Night equivalent

is the single number index designed to rate environmental noise on daily / 24 hourly

basis.

Mathematically Ldn is given by

Ldn = 10 Log {1/24 (16 x 10(Ld/10) + 8 x 10(Ln/10)}

Where Ld = A weighed equivalent for day time period (6am-10 pm)

Ln = A weighed equivalent for night time period (10 pm to 6 am)

Assessment of Noise Levels

The main objective of noise level assessment is to identify all the sources acceptable and

unacceptable to the study region. The acoustical environment varies dynamically in

magnitude and character throughout most communities. The noise level variation can be

temporal, spectral and spatial. The maximum impact of noise is felt on urban areas,

which is mostly due to the commercial / industrial activities and vehicular movement

during peak hours of the day.




The assessment of noise pollution in the study area has been carried out keeping the

above said considerations. The existing status of noise levels within the study zone has

been undertaken through reconnaissance, identification of existing noise sources, land

use pattern for monitoring of baseline noise levels.

Sources of Noise

An inventory was conducted for evaluating the sources of noise generation in the study

area. It was observed that the major sources of noise generation in the study area were

from the Industries, Commercial activities and vehicular movements etc.

Typical considerations in environmental noise assessment can be divided into two

separate categories, one related to noise sources and other related to potential

receivers. Two quantities are needed to describe completely the strength of the source.

1- Sound Power Levels

2- Directivity

Sound Power levels measure the total sound power radiated by the source in all

directions and directivity is a measure of the difference in radiation with direction. The

concept of sound power level and directivity index makes it possible to calculate the

sound pressure level (SPL) created by source. The impact of noise sources on

surrounding community depends on:

Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in nature). It

is well known that a steady noise is not as annoying as one that is continuously varying

in loudness.

The time of the day at which noise occurs, for example, loud noise levels at night in

residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance.

The location of the noise source, with respect to noise sensitive land use, that

determines the loudness and period of noise exposure.

The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from Noise Induced

Hearing Loss (NIHL) to annoyance depending on loudness of noise levels. The

Environmental Impacts of noise from the plant activities is carried out by taking into

consideration the various factors:

Potential damage to hearing

Annoyance

Potential physiological responses

General community responses

Noise Levels in the Study Area

Ten noise monitoring stations were identified for the assessment of the existing noise

levels keeping in view the nature of the monitoring location i.e. residential areas in

villages, schools, bus stations etc. The distance and the direction of the noise monitoring

locations with reference to the Project site is given in the Table -3.17




Table 3.16: Details of Noise Level Monitoring Locations

Sl.

No.

Station

Code Sampling point

Distance

(Km) Direction

Type of area

w.r.t. Project Site

1 CA1

Nothern

boundary wall of

the plant

0.5 N Industry

2 BA1

Eastern Side

outside the

boundary wall of

the plant

1.7 E Industry

3 BA2 Bijaynagar 1.3 E Rural Industrial

4 BA3 Ikra 1.07 SW Rural Industrial

5 BA4 Damodarpur 2.6 NW Industrial

6 BA5 Dhasna 0.7 E Rural

7 BA6 Hijalgora 1.54 N Urban Industrial

8 BA7 Bahadurpur 2.71 E Rural, Coal Fields

9 BA8 Jamuria 3.15 W Urban

Baseline monitoring was carried out to measure the sound pressure level in all the

surrounding villages of the study area for every hour for 24 hours to study the impact of

the noise on the local environment.

The notations for statistical quantities of noise levels are described below;

Hourly Leq values have been computed by integrated sound level meter (SLM 100

Envirotech)

Lday: As per the CPCB Guidelines, The day time limit is between 06:00 AM to

10:00 PM (MOEF Notification number S.O 50 (E) dated 11/01/2010)

Lnight : As per the CPCB Guidelines, The night time limit is between 10:00 PM to

06:00 AM (MOEF Notification number S.O 50 (E) dated 11/01/2010)

A rating developed by Environment Protection Agency (US - EPA) for specification

of community noise from all the sources is the Day – Night sound level (Ldn).

Ldn: It is similar to a 24 Hour equivalent sound level except that during night time

period (10:00 PM to 06:00 AM) a 10 dB(A) weighting penalty is added to the

instantaneous sound level before computing the 24 Hour average. This night time

penalty is added to account for the fact that noise during night when people

usually sleep is judged as more annoying than the same noise during the day

time.

The parameters are analyzed for Lday, Lnight &Ldaynight and the results are presented

below in Table-3.18




Table-3.17 Noise Level in the Study Area

Location

Code

Location Village Lday Lnight Ldaynight

N1 Northern side of the

Boundary wall

72 65.7

70.7

N2 Eastern side outside

of the Boundary

wall

49 40.3

68.2

N3 Bijaynagar 53 42.8 51.4

N4 Ikra 50 40.2 53.3

N5 Damadarpur 51 41.2 49.5

N6 Dhasna 52 44.1 62.3

N7 Hijalgora 53 41.7 51.4

N8 Jamuria 48 40.2 46.6

N9 Bahadurpur 50 41.4 48.5

CPCB

Norms

For Industrial

Area 75 70

For Residential

Area 55 45

Observations

The Noise analysis report shows that the high values of noise observed are primarily due

to the vehicular traffic and other anthropogenic activities.

3.6.8 SOIL PARAMETERS

Gen.Tor-6(viii) Soil Characteristics As Per CPCB Guidelines.

Different types of soil are encountered in different topographical biological and

hydrological as well as geological condition within the west Bardhaman district.

Data Generation

For Studying Soil profile of the region, sampling locations were selected to assess the

existing soil conditions in and around the project area representing various land use

conditions. The Physical, Chemical and heavy metal concentrations were determined.

The samples were collected by ramming a core – cutter in to the soil up to a depth of 90

cm.

The present study of the soil profile establishes the baseline characteristics and this will

help in future in identifying the incremental concentrations if any, due to the operation of

the proposed plant. The sampling locations have been identified with the following

objectives;

To determine the baseline soil characteristics of the study area.

To determine the impact of industrialization on soil characteristics.

To determine the impact on soils more importantly from agricultural productivity

point of view.




Fine Loamy-Typic Ustrochrepts Very deep, well drained, fine loamy soil occurring on

very gentle sloping valley on undulating plateau with loamy surface having moderate

erosion.

Loamy Skeletal – LithicUstorthents Very deep well drained fine loamy soil occurring

on gentle sloping to undulating plateau associated with shallow, well drained top loamy

soil.

Fine Aquic – Hiplustalfs Imperfectly drained deep occurring on gentle slopes towards

undulating plain.

Fine Loamy – Typic Haplustalf Deep well drained soil occurring on the valley slopes

having moderate erosion features.

Fine Aeric – Ochraqualfs Deep but poorly drained fine soil occurring on uplands with

loamy surface features.

Fine to Medium Loamy -Utic Palaeotalfs Imperfectly drained loamy soil with

moderate erosion occurring on the plains.

Fine Loamy – Aeric Uchragnalfs Loamy soil developed on old alluvium on gently

sloping dissected upland with low-moderate erosion.

Eight locations within 10 km radius of the plant site were selected for soil sampling. At

each location, soil samples were collected from three different depths viz. 30 cm, 60 cm

and 90 cm below the surface and are homogenized. This is in line with IS: 2720 &

Methods of soil analysis, part – 1st, 2nd edition, 1986 of American Society for Agronomy

and soil science society of America. The Homogenized Samples were analyzed for

physical and chemical characteristics. The soil samples were collected once during pre –

monsoon season.

Methodology

The methodology adopted for each parameter is described below:

ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR SOIL ANALYSIS

Parameters Methods

Textual Classification

(Sand/Silt/Clay)

Mechanical method (USDA)

Colour Munsen Colour Chart (USDA)

Moisture ASTM D 2216-10

Water Holding Capacity ASTM D 2980-04

Porosity ASTM D 7263-09

Permeability IS 2720:PART17:1986

Bulk Density ASTM D 7263-09

pH pH meter (ASTM D 1293 – 84)

Electrical Conductivity Conductivity Meter (ASTM D 1125 – 82)

Nitrogen Kjeldahl distillation (ASTM D 3590 – 84)

Phosphorus Molybdenum blue, Colourimetric (ASTM D 515 – 82)

Potassium Flame Photometer (ASTM D 1428 – 82)

Chlorides Argentometric (ASTM D 512 – 81 Rev 85)

Boron ASTM D 3974-09

Organic Matter IS 2720:PART22:1972




To assess the quality of soil in and around the study area, soil samples were collected

from six locations for physicochemical analysis (Table 3.18).

Table-3.18 Soil Locations in the Study Area

Sl.

No.

Station

Code Sampling point

Locations

Distance

(Km) Direction

Type of area

w.r.t. Project Site

1 BA1 Ikrah 23 41 01.32 N 87 06 28.35 E

1.57 SW Rural Industrial

2 BA2 Topsi 23°39'46.03"N

87° 7'55.90"E 3.77 South Rural Industrial

3 BA3 Searsole

23 38 15.32 N 87 08 15.78 E

6.0 South Industrial

4 BA4 Jadudenga 23°40'35.67"N

87° 6'21.97"E 2.28 South Rural

5 BA5 Raniganj

3°39'18.77"N

87°11'23.68"E 7.48 South Urban Industrial

6 BA6 Bahula 23 39 20.85 N 87 11 23.53 E

8.6 South East Rural, Coal Fields

7 BA7 Jemari

23 38 58.10N 87 6 52.13E

6.92 South West Urban

8 BA8 Mondolpur 23°41'31.16"N 87° 5'11.11"E

3.20 West Rural

Soil Characteristics

The analytical results of the soil samples collected during the study period are

summarized below in Table 3.19




Table 3.19: The analyzed results of soil samples of the study area

Sl.No Parameter Ikrah Topsi Searsole Jadudenga Raniganj Bahula Jemari Mondalpur

1 Colour Yellowish

Brown

Reddish

Brown

Yellowish

Brown

Yellowish

Brown

Yellowish

Brown

Yellowish

Brown

Yellowish

Brown

Yellowish

Brown

2 Texture Fine

loamy

Clay

loamy

Clay

loamy

Silt

loamy

Sandy

loamy

Fine

loamy Clay Loamy Silt Loamy

3 Water holding capacity % 32.4 33.8 36.7 29.8 26.3 34.1 36.2 29.2

4 pH 6.9 7.2 7.4 7 7.1 7.3 7.2 7.1

5 Electrical conductivity mmhos/Cm 260 252 238 225 240 208 212 202

6 Co-efficient of permeability M3/Sec.

At 200C 0.27 0.29 0.38 0.33 0.32 0.36 0.3 0.24

7 Bulk Density Gm/cc 1.28 1.26 1.2 1.3 1.32 1.27 1.2 1.15

8 Porosity % 34 38 37 32 28 22 36 31

9 Organic carbon % 2.12 1.82 1.65 1.22 1.27 2.23 2.31 1.98

10 Calcium % 0.88 0.98 1.03 0.87 0.92 1.03 0.89 0.97

11 Organic matter % 1.59 1.77 1.39 1.94 2.81 2.73 2.31 1.02

12 Phosphate (PO4) % 0.17 0.19 0.18 0.17 0.16 0.18 0.14 0.21

13 Iron Fe. mg/Kg 5.6 6.2 5.8 4.9 5.1 4.7 5.3 5.1

14 Manganese mg/Kg 1.21 0.98 0.99 1.03 1.1 0.97 1.02 1.07

15 Chromium mg/Kg 0.005 <0.001 0.006 0.003 0.001 0.003 0.004 <0.001

16 Potassium % 0.11 0.15 0.13 0.14 0.12 0.1 0.12 0.1

17 Nitrogen % 0.23 0.21 0.2 0.23 0.21 0.24 0.21 0.19

18 Texture

I sand %w/w 50 45 43 40 51 48 39 42

Ii silt %w/w 33 28 29 41 29 34 32 36

iii clay %w/w 17 27 28 19 20 18 29 22




Physical Characteristics

The soils of the study area are predominantly yellowish in colour and fine loamy in

Texture and also slightly acidic in nature. The bulk density of the study area ranges from

1.15 to 1.32 gm/cc. The other nutrient content like nitrogen, potassium and phosphate

content of the soil is very low.

Most crops grow from pH 6 to 7.5, so pH is suitable for growth of various crops.

Chemical Characteristics

The soils were generally slightly Alkaline with pH range (6.9-7.4). This is probably due to

the presence of sufficient amount of lime in the soil. Electrical conductivity (EC) was

found varying between (202-260) µmhos/cm. In soil samples, calcium content of the

soils varied between (0.87-1.03)%. In this study Nitrogen level varied between (0.19-

0.24)%. Most of the nitrogen is available in form of nitrates, nitrites, NH4+ and organic

nitrogen. The Phosphorous content ranged between (0.14 - 0.21)%. Range of Iron was

(4.7-6.2) mg/kg.

Fertility Status of Soil

The observed level of pH (6.9-7.421-6.71) is not expected to hinder the growth of

agricultural crops. Soils were observed to possess appreciable level of Potassium,

nitrogen, and phosphorous which indicate moderate to good fertility or agricultural

potential of the soils. The levels of other elements were appreciably good. Thus, the

overall fertility status of the soils within the study area is reasonably good and is not

expected to be detrimental to the growth of agricultural and forest crops. The prevailing

edaphic, hydrological and climatological conditions favour the production of paddy,

vegetables and quite a good number of other crops. The prime agricultural crop paddy is

grown during both of the kharif and rabi seasons.

3.7 NATURAL HAZARD

Earth Quake

The likelihood of damaging earthquakes taking place at different locations is different

based on the varying geology throughout the country. The proposed area falls under

Zone III of earth quake hazard zones i.e moderate damage risk zone so this area is not

affected due to earth quake and there are no past records.

Flood Zones

Though Bardhaman district where the existing & proposed plant is situated falls under

Flood Zone Area but the site is about 7 km away from the nearest Ajay river. So, there is

no chance of the area getting affected due to flood.

3.8 TRAFFIC STUDIES

Gen.ToR-6(ix) Traffic Study Of The Area, Type Of Vehicles, Frequency Of

Vehicles For Transportation Of Materials, Additional Traffic Due To Proposed

Project, Parking Arrangement Etc.

Traffic survey was conducted at one location , Ranisayer More i.e. confluence point of Dr.

Bidhan Chandra Roy Avenue and NH 2 for 7 days (from 05.01.2018 to 11.01.2018) to

have a better understanding of traffic density pattern of the area and to assist the

proponent in planning vehicular movement during various phases of the project. The

traffic count was monitored continuously for 24 hours during the study period. The traffic




survey was done for both way movement of vehicles categorized into heavy vehicles

(truck, bus, trailer, Lorries etc.) four wheelers (car, Pickup vehicles etc.), three wheelers

(auto rickshaw etc.) and two wheelers (motorcycle etc.).

Average Traffic study

Time No. of Vehicles

Heavy

Motor

Vehicles

Light

Motor

Vehicles

Two

Wheelers

Three

Wheelers

Total

06.00-07.00 43 12 30 19 104

07.00-8.00 39 14 32 23 108

08.00-09.00 34 20 61 27 142

09.00-10.00 32 41 130 35 238

10.00-11.00 30 34 111 42 217

12.00-13.00 33 21 73 23 150

13.00-14.00 39 16 44 19 118

14.00-15.00 36 21 57 37 151

15.00-16.00 33 37 60 39 168

16.00-17.00 31 21 67 41 160

17.00-18.00 30 13 62 42 147

18.00-19.00 24 11 56 46 137

19.00-20.00 18 14 52 39 123

20.00-21.00 25 18 45 33 121

21.00-22.00 30 19 41 29 119

22.00-23.00 34 13 37 31 114

23.00-24.00 39 10 30 37 115

24.00-1.00 47 12 15 23 96

1.00-2.00 43 9 12 18 81

2.00-3.00 48 5 15 9 77

3.00-4.00 40 4 15 3 62

4.00-5.00 42 2 19 0 63

5.00-6.00 48 4 23 1 76

Total 812 372 1086 615 2885

Equivalent PCU 2834 447 543 461 4285

From the above tables, the Average PCU for 24 hrs is Heavy vehicles - 2834

Light vehicles - 447

Two wheelers – 543

Three wheelers – 461




Interpretation of Traffic Survey Results

The average peak vehicular traffic (238 Nos = 354 PCU) monitored was recorded

between 9.00-10.00hrs. The lowest vehicular traffic load (62 Nos=92 PCU) was recorded

between 03.00-04.00hrs.

Average PCU (passenger car unit) of the existing two-lane is counting to 177.7/hr.

Taking peak hour in to consideration it is estimated to be 532 PCU/hr.

M/s GFL is likely to transport 1.67 lakh tons of Raw material per annum and maximum

3.0 lakh tons product through road. Hence additional PCU/hr., considering to and fro

running of heavy vehicles, other allied works and engagement of 210 additional

manpower will be (9 heavy vehicles/hr + 6 light vehicles/hr + 17 two wheelers/hr) 48

PCU/hr. Hence total load on two-lane road will be 225.7 PCU/hr. The existing road can

absorb this additional load without jamming condition although entry and exit to factory

campus will not be preferred during peak hour existing load.

3.9 ECOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT

Gen. ToR 6(x) Detailed description of Flora & Fauna (terrestrial and aquatic)

existing in the study area shall be given with special reference to rare, endemic

and endangered species. If schedule- I fauna is found within the study area, a

wild life conservation plan shall be prepared and furnished.

3.9.1 ECOLOGY OF THE AREA

Climate of the area is on the boundary of tropical to sub-tropical and dry to sub-

humid. Summer months are hot and dry, rainy months are very few and within four

months of rainy season more than 80% of the annual rainfall is received, winter months

are moderately cool. The area comes under broad category of sub-humid to dry

deciduous, mixed and sal forests. Sal forest is considered to be the sub-climax leading to

mixed forest as the climax formation. Natural vegetation of the area is a forest. Due to

anthropogenic factors, including the cattle grazing, savannah like structures has

developed. These factors are causing also rapid degradation of forest both in the plains

and more importantly in the hills as well.

Soil in the area is mostly sandy loam locally called as “matasi”. The area is under sub-

tropical and dry to sub-humid climate. Winter is mild to cool with lowest temperature

occasionally going down below 10OC in winter while the peak summer temperature may

reach up to 47OC. Although occasional rains are received, but, most testing to the life is

the, post monsoon, long dry spell of about eight months. The dryness becomes more

testing during the dry and hot summer months, particularly the months of March to mid

June, with scorching sun. Relative humidity may go as low as 20% during this period.

Typical climax vegetation of the area is sal forest. Two types of forests are visible in the

area

1. The Moist Peninsular sal forest and

2. Moist mixed deciduous Forest.

Sal, under best protection and lesser disturbance grows to a height of 15 to 20 m with

0.14 to 0.18 percent basal cover. Forests in the area range from heavily degraded

condition to relatively in good condition. The ground is covered with herbaceous and

shrub vegetation during the rainy months up to about middle of the winter months

(January}, after which most of the herbaceous vegetation is dead and most of the

shrubs start shedding leaves.




3.9.2 METHODOLOGIES

Data Collection

The core and buffer zones, both the areas, include revenue forests, grazing lands and

cultivated lands. Hence, the flora and fauna are similar in core and buffer zones and

have been shown also, together. However, data were collected more rigorously for the

core zone as compared to the data collection in the buffer zone.

Period of survey

The area was visited in the month of November 2017 to January 2018. In data collection

the support and help of local forest officials were also taken. Data on the density and

frequency of the tree layer were collected mainly for the reserve and protected forests

and the orange areas. Information on wildlife was obtained mainly through interviews of

the local people.

Methodology for Primary Data Collection and Analysis

The vegetation were studied with the help of square and rectangular quadrants. Plants

with a girth of 20cm or more in girth were taken as trees, while sapling and seedlings of

trees and shrubs below 20 cm. in girth were taken as shrubs. Number and girth of trees

were recorded species wise in each sampling plot while for shrubs and herbs only the

number was recorded in each sampling plot.

The Revenue land:

The revenue land consists of mostly the cultivated land. The cultivated lands are of two

types:

i. Upland

ii. Low land

cultivated Upland:

Up lands are cultivated only during the rainy months thus have only one crop. These are

generally near the village settlements. Crops cultivated on uplands as kharif crop

include:

A. Cereals

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

S.No. Local Name English Name Botanical Name

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. Dhan Paddy Oryzaativa

2. Makka Maize Zea mays

B. Pulses and oil

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. Arhar Pigeon pea Cajanus cajan

2. Til Sesamum Sesamum inicum

3. Kulthi Horse-gram Dolochos biflorus

4. Kusum Safflower Carthemus tinctorius

5. Urad Black gram Phaeolus mungo

6. Mungphali Ground nut Arachis hypogea

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

C. Vegetables

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1.

1.Tamatar Tomato Lycopersicum esculantum

2. Baigan Brinjal Solanum melongena




3. Bhindi Lady‟s finger Abelmoschus esculentus

4. Barbatti Cowpea Vignainensis

5. Karela Bitter gourd Momordica charantia

6. Torai Ridge gourd Luffa acutangula

7. Kaddu Pumpkin Cucurbita moschata

8. Gilki Sponge gourd Luffa cylindrica

9. Palak Beet Beta vulgaris

10. Lalbhaji Amaranth Amaranthus spp.

11. Rakhia Kaddu White Gourd Benincasa hispida

12. Kundru Little Gourd Coccinia grandis

13. Khira Cucumber Cucumis sativus

14. Lauki Bottle gourd Lagenaria siceraria

15. Chichinga Snake gourd Trichosanthes anguina

16 Ghuiyan Pichigi Colocasia esculenta

17. Dhaniya Coriander Coriandrum sativum

After rainy months these area lies fallow, exposed to some level of wind erosion. At

some of the places with irrigation facility some rabi crops, mostly as vegetables, are

raised on these uplands.

List of plant species observed in the buffer area

It is an exhaustive list to prepare all the species of plants, particularly the herbs, from

any sizable area. It may run in to a long list of species. However with the below

mentioned species of trees, shrubs and herbs, some other trees shrubs and herbs were

recorded from the buffer zone. A list of the same is being given below:

Tree species

Botanical Name Common Name Family

Acacia catechu L.f. (Willd) Khair Mimosaceae

Adina cordifolia Roxb. Hook.f. ex Brandis Haldu/Kurum Naucleaceae

Aegle marmelos (L.) Corr. Bela Rutaceae

Albizia lebbeck (Linn.) Benth Siris Mimosaceae

Anthocephalus cadamba (Roxb.) Miq. Kadamba Naucleaceae

Artocarpus heterophyllus Lamk. Kathal (Panasa) Moraceae

Azadirachta indica A.Juss. Neem Meliaceae

Bauhinia variegata L Kanchan/Kachnar Caesalpiniaceae

Bombax ceiba L. Simal Bombacaceae

Boswellia serrate Salai Burseraceae

Bridelia retusa Hook.f.non spreng. Kassi/Khaja Euphorbiaceae

Carica papaya L. Papaya Caricaceae

Chloroxylon swietenia DC. Bheru/Bhirra Flindersiaceae

Citrus limon (L.) Burm.f. Lemon Rutaceae

Cleistanthus collinus (Roxb.) Benth. ex

Hook.f.

Karada/Garari Euphorbiaceae

Cochlospermum religiosum (L.) Alston. Kumbi Cochlospermaceae

Dalbergia sissoo Roxb. Shisham Papilionaceae

Dillenia indica L. Rai/Chalta Dilleniaceae

Diospyros exsculpta Buch-Ham. Kendu Ebenaceae

Diospyros melanoxylon Roxb. Tendu Ebenaceae

Emblica officinalis Gaertn. Anla/Aonla Euphorbiaceae

Ficus benghalensis Linn. Bara/Bad Moraceae

Ficus religiosa L. Pipal Moraceae

Gmelina arborea L Gambhari Verbenaceae

Grew/a tiliaefolia Vahl. Dhubeni/Dhaman Tiliaceae




Holarrhena antidysenterica (L.) Wall, ex DC Kurchi Apocynaceae

Lannea grandis Engl. Moi/Mohin Anacardiaceae

Madhuca indica J.F.Gmel. Mahul Sapotaceae

Mallotus philippensis (Lamk) Muell.Arg Rohini/Sindhur Euphorbiaceae

Mangifera indica L Amba/Mango Anacardiaceae

Melia azedarach L. Maha neem Meliaceae

Moringa oleifera Lamk. Sajna/Sahinjna Moringaceae

Ougeinia oojeinensis (Roxb.) Hochr. Bandhan/Sandan Papilionaceae

Polyalthia longifolia (Sonner.) Dedhachuda/Devdaru Annonaceae

Psidium guajava L. Guava/Pijuli Myrtaceae

Schleichera trijuga Willd. & Klein Kusum Sapindaceae

Shorea robusta Gaertn.f Sal Dipterocarpaceae

Syzygium cumini (L) Skeels Jamun Myrtaceae

Tectona grandis L.f . Sagwan Verbenaceae

Terminalia tomentosa W. & A.Prodr. Asan Combretaceae

Tamarindus indica L Tentuli/lmli Caesalpiniaceae

Xylia xylocarpa (Roxb.) Taub Kongora Mimosaceae

SHRUBS

Calotropis gigantea Ait. Araka Asclepiadaceae

Euphorbia nivulia Ham. Sijhu Euphorbiaceae

Gardenia latifolia Ait. Damgurudu Rubiaceae

Lantana camara L Bholupodi (Besarm) Verbenaceae

Michelia champaca L Champa Magnoliaceae

Ziziphus jujuba (L.) Lam. non Mill. Bara Koli Rhamnaceae

Ziziphus nummularia (Burm.f.) Kantoi koli Rhamnaceae

HERBS

Achyranthes aspera L Puthkunda Amaranthaceae

Aganosma caryophyllata (Roxb. ex Sims) Malti Apocynaceae

Asparagus racemosus Willd. var. Satabari/Satmuli Liliaceae

Dioscorea alata L. Khamalu Dioscoreaceae

Entada phaseoloides (L.) Merr. Nicker bean Mimosaceae

Mimosa pudica L Lajkuli (Lajwanti) Mimosaceae

Mirabilis jalapa (L) Banophulo Nyctaginaceae

Ocimum sanctum L Tulasi Labiatae

Sphaeranthus indicus L Mundi Compositae

GRASSES

Bambusa arundinacea Retz. Willd Kanta bansa Bambusaceae

Cynodon dactylon L. (Pers) Duba Gramineae

Imperata cylindrica (L) P.Beauv. Kharo grass Gramineae

Thysanolaena maxima (Roxb.) O.Kuntze Phulbadhuni Gramineae

Heteropogon contortus Guguchi Poaceae

Eulaliopsis binata Sabai Poaceae

Endemic species No endemic species recorded/reported

as per BSI records

Endangered species No endangered plant species observed

during study period and also from

records of BSI, Red Data Books of

Indian Plants.

Aquatic & Semi aquatic Plants

Sl.No. Common Name Binomial Name Family

1 Banmarich Ammania baccifera Lythraceae

2 Pink Node Flower Caesulia axillaris Astraceae




3 Canscora decurrens Gentianaceae

4 Cyperus sp Cypraceae

5 Eragrostiella nordoides Poaceae

6 Eriocaulon quiquangulare Eriocaulaceae

7 Gnaphalium indicum Asteraceae

8 Jhangi, kureli, saola Hydrilla verticillata Hydrocharitaceae

9 Limnophila chinensis Scrophulariaceae

10 Melastoma malbathricum Melastomataceae

11 Begun Panicum pumilum Poaceae

12 Potamogeton javanicus Potamogetonaceae

13 Rotala indica Lythraceae

14 Utricularia exoleta Utricularia dubia

15 Vallisneria spiralis Hydrocharitaceae

16 Veronica anagallis Plantaginaceae

17 Podda Nelumbo nucifera Nelumbonaceae

18 Kain Phool Nymphaea Nymphaeales

From the survey it was concluded that none of the species indentified are in BSI Red

List, endemic to the area and rare.

Fauna in the buffer zone

Wild faunal species like, Fox and Monkeys were reported to be more common than other

animal species in the area. The major aquatic fauna are fishes, amphibians and water

snakes. The list of faunal species is given below:

Mammals

Sl

No Local Name English Name Scientific Name WPA 72

1 Siyal Jackal Canis aureus Sch II (Part II)

2 Khargosh Indian hare Lepus ruficaudatus IV

3 Gilhari squirrel Funambulus pennanti IV

4 Chamgadad fruit bat Cynopterus sphinx V

5 Chooha Field rat Bandicota benghalensis V

6 Lomadi Indian fox Vulpus benghalensis Sch II (Part II)

7 Bandar Monkey Macaca mulatta III

8 Neola Mangoose Herpetes edwardsi IV

9 Hurra Hyaena Hyaena hyaena III

10 Langoor Common langur Semnopithecus entellus Sch II (Part I)

11 Chital Spotted dear Axis axis III

12 Jangali billi Jungle cat Felis chaus Sch II (Part II)

13 Jangalisuar Wid boar Sus scrofa III

14 Sahi Porcupine Hystrix indica IV

Birds

Common Name Scientific Name Schedule WPA

72

House crow Corvrus splendens V

Comman myna Acridotheris tristis IV

https://www.google.co.in/search?dcr=0&q=Nymphaeales&stick=H4sIAAAAAAAAAOPgE-LUz9U3MC42rjJR4gAx00wLyrR0M8qt9JPzc3JSk0sy8_P084vSE_Myi3Pjk3MSi4sz0zKTE0HixVb5RSmpRQDYcjwwRgAAAA&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwjmjvLhuZjZAhUbS48KHUUlDy8QmxMI2gEoATAe




Brahminy myna Sturnus pagodrum IV

Pied myna Sturnus contra IV

Black drongo Dicrurus adsimilis IV

Spotted dove Streptopelia chinensis IV

Blue jay Coracias benghalensis IV

Parakeet Psittacutla krameri IV

Little Green Bee-Eater Merops orientalis IV

Koel Cuckoo Eudynamys scolopaicea IV

Phakhta Streptopelia chinensis IV

Jangali Kaua Corvus macrorhynchos V

Jangali Tota Taccocua leschenaultia IV

Tania Tota Psittacula cyanocephala IV

Tota Psittacula krameri IV

Neelkanth Coracias benghalensis IV

Bater (Grey Quail) Coturnix coturnix IV

Basanti (Indian cuckoo) Cuculus micropterus IV

Kite Milvus migrans IV

Redwhiskered bulbul Pycnonotus jocosus IV

Besra Sparrow-Hawk Accipiter vigratus IV

Paddy Bird/Pond Bird Ardeola grayii IV

Small Blue Kingfisher Alcido atthis IV

Scaup Duck Aythya marila IV

Common Hoopoe Epupa epops IV

Reptiles

Sl.No. Local Name Scientific Name WPA 72

1

Dhaman/Indian Rat

snake Ptyas mucosus Sch II (Part II)

2 Dhondwa/Water sanke Enhydris enhydris Sch IV

3 Nag/Cobra Naja naja Sch II (Part II)

4 Common Karait Bungarus caeruleus Sch IV

5 Russel viper Vipera ruselli Sch II (Part II)

6 Sita Ki Lath Amphiesma stolata Sch IV

7 Girgit (Garden lizard) Calotes versicolor Sch IV

Amphibians

Sl.No. Common Name Scientific Name WPA 72

1 Mendhak Bull frog Hoplobatrachus tigerinus Sch IV

2

Mendhak Common

toads Duttaphrynus melanostictus Sch IV

3 Mendhak Skipper frog Euphlyctis cyanophlyctis Sch IV

4 Mendkak Small frog Microhyla ornata Sch IV

5 Mendhak Tree frog Polypedates maculatus Sch IV

Fishes




Sl.No. Local name Scientific Name

1 Kotri/Karwadi Puntius sophora

2 Karwadi Puntius ticto

3 Tengna Mystus cavasium

4 Bam Mastocembelus armatus

5 Padhan Wallago attu

6 Magur Clarius batrachus

7 Singi Heteropneustes fossilis

8 Maral Chana marulius

9 Bhunda Ophiocephalus striatus

10 Bhanga Labeo bata

11 Dandai Rasbora daniconius

12 Karwadi Barbus ticto

13 Catla Catla catla

14 Mrigal Cirrhina mrigala

15 Mongri rou Labeo fimbriatus

16 Dingra Mystus aor

17 Tengra Mystus seenghala

18 Singhara Mystus vittatus

Endemic animal species: Nil, Migratory animal species: Nil, Route of migratory

animal species: No migratory route of wild animals.

Gen.Tor-6(xi) Socio-Economic Status of The Study Area.

3.10 SOCIO-ECONOMIC SCENARIO

The study area covers three blocks namely Rajgangapur, Kutra and Raiboga within a

radius of 10 km from the project site. The 10 km radius study area around the project

covers 80 villages of Kansa of West Bardhaman district. The socio-economic profile of the

study area is presented based on the secondary data available from various agencies and

District Census Hand Books for Census 2001.

SOCIO- ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

This section describes the baseline socio economic environment of 10 km radius of

proposed solid waste management site the area in general. The result of the analysis will

help in predicting the impact of the proposed project on the local people, their physical

and psychological health and well being, economic facilities, heritage and culture and

their lifestyle in general. The issues under focus are demographic structure, economic

activity, education, literacy profile, infrastructure facilities, etc. The assessment and

evaluation of potential socio-economic impacts will thereby assist in the formulation of

necessary guidelines for impact mitigation and management of human environment. The

information provided in the following sections has been primarily derived from secondary

sources (Census of India, District Information Centre, District Statistical Handbook, City

Development plan etc). Primary information on block socio-economic infrastructure has

been gathered through informal discussion with locals. The village-wise secondary data




(obtained from Census) has been taken into consideration for analyzing the socio-

economic profile in a comparative manner for the exploratory block.

3.10.1 OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY

The main objectives are as follows:

Assess Social Status : people‟s way of life, demographic changes, interaction

with each other on a day-to-day basis and impacts on family life;

Evaluate Financial Structure : job/occupational issues, financial security,

economic status , living standard etc. ;

Analyze Political Systems : the extent to which people are able to participate

in decisions that affect their lives, the level of democratization that is taking

place, and the resources provided for this purpose;

Community Assessment : its cohesion, stability, character, services and

facilities;

Cultural Assessment : Cultural beliefs, customs, values and language or dialect;

Environmental Assessment : The quality of the air and water people use; the

availability and quality of the food they eat; the level of hazard or risk, dust and

noise they are exposed to; the adequacy of sanitation, their physical safety, and

their access to and control over resources;

Health and wellbeing factor : Health is a state of complete physical, mental,

social and spiritual wellbeing and not merely the absence of disease or infirmity;

Personal and property rights : Particularly whether people are economically

affected, or experience personal disadvantage which may include a violation of

their civil liberties;

Fears and aspirations: Their perceptions about their safety, their fears about

the future of their community, and their aspirations for their future and the future

of their children.

3.10.2 DEMOGRAPHIC PROFILE

1 2 3 4 5

Sl.No Feature Male Female Total

1 Population 1843 1751 3594

SC 107 114 221

ST 885 835 1720

OC 851 802 1653

2 Children (0-6 years) 214 218 432

3 Literacy

Literates 1371 1020 2391

Illiterates 472 731 1203

4 Sex Ratio 1000:950

SC 1000:944

ST 1000:1065

OC 1000:942

Children 1000:1019




Sex Compostion of Study Area

Female 1751

Male 1843

Caste Composition

6%

46% SC

ST

48% OC

Caste wise Sex Composition

Male Female 885 835 851

802

107 114

SC ST OC

Sex

Composition of the area

Caste Composition of the Area

Caste Composition of Male & female

3.10.3 Education & Literacy




Literacy Profile

31%

69%

Literates

Illiterates

The average literacy rate of the study area is 63%. The total percentages of male and

female literates are 59% and 40% respectively. The data indicates that emphasis is

required on education and specially on female education

3.10.4 Workers Profile

The study village area has 31% (1102) population engaged in either main or marginal

works. 53% male and 7% female population are working population. 49% of total male

population is main (full time) workers and 4% are marginal (part time) workers. For

women 6% of total female population is workers.

Worker Main Worker Marginal Worker Non Worker

Total 31 28 2 69

Male 53 49 4 47

Female 7 6 1 93

3.10.5 GAP ANALYSIS

Due to the industrialization people have somehow detached out of their traditional

livelihood practice and have come to be a safeguard of industrial development within the

area. They need to emphasize in order to actualize inclusive growth through involvement

and participation methodology. Therefore a process is adopted to come to concertize

their issues on the major problems they are facing and address them on priority basis as

have been given below.

The water for irrigation and drinking purpose to revive at least backyard

gardening.

Health and sanitation program with safe drinking water and toilet facility for all.

Limited livelihood opportunities due to limited farm land and lack of water supply.

Air and water pollution due to industrialization.

Lack of educational facilities particularly for girl students and education for all.

Unemployment issues tied with lack of skills and opportunity.

Lack of entrepreneurial skills amongst the youth of the area

3.10.6 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR IMPLEMENTATION




The concept of private-public partnership (PPP) should be applied in the effective

implementation of CSR i.e. government and business houses should act in collaboration

for the cause.

The Human Resource department (at the political and private level both) should be

entrusted with the responsibility of measuring and evaluating in CSR activities. It can be

done in two forms –

(a) Direct results, such as, economic and financial savings (b) indirect results like

increase in employee satisfaction, less absenteeism, less employee turnover evaluated

by staff surveys

Periodic review of the CSR activities should be conducted by every business entity

so as to identify the pitfalls and the areas left out.

Innovation should essentially be a matter of concern; be it searching the

untouched areas and scope of CSR or the formulation of CSR strategy or the

implementation thereof.

NGOs should be encouraged to act in collaboration for the CSR activities under

different schemes and projects as they play a crucial role in the upliftment of the

masses.

Detailed SIA study report is attached as Annexure III

3.11 CONCLUSION

Environmental Status of the present environment with all parameters has been

discussed in this chapter. In consideration of the process and present environmental

status the impact on the surrounding environment along with mweasures has been

elaborated in the next Chapter 4




CHAPTER-4

ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT & MITIGATION MEASURE

4.0 OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ASSESSMENT

The objective of Impact Prediction for the proposed modification cum expansion project

under consideration is to identify the potential impacts on the specific site prevailing

environmental setting and degree of impacts. This will enable to draw up an appropriate

Environment Management Plan (EMP) to consider other alternatives so as to ensure that

the proposed project activity does not impair the present environmental setting. The

findings of EIA are drafted in the form of Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) and are

communicated to the people.

Impact prediction is a way of mapping„ the environmental consequences of the significant

aspects of the project and its alternatives. Environmental impact can never be predicted

with absolute certainty and this is all the more reason to consider all possible factors and

take all possible precautions for reducing the degree of uncertainty.

The following impacts of the project in general are assessed:

Climatic condition

Changes in present climatic condition such as temperature, atmospheric pressure,

humidity & rainfall due to the pollutants emitted from the proposed project

Leads to Greenhouse effect & Global Warming

Air

Changes in ambient levels and ground level concentrations due to total emissions

from point, line and area source

Effects on soils, materials, vegetation, and human health

Noise

Changes in ambient levels due to noise generated from equipment and movement

of vehicle

Effect on fauna and human health

Water

Availability to competing users

Changes in quality

Sediment transport

Land

Changes in land use and drainage pattern

Changes in land quality including effects of waste disposal

Changes in shoreline/riverbank and their stability

Biological




Deforestation/tree-cutting and shrinkage of animal habitat Impact on fauna and

flora (including aquatic species if any) due to contaminants/pollutants

Impact on breeding and nesting grounds

Socio-Economic

Impact on the local community including demographic changes

Impact on economic status

Impact on human health

Impact of increased traffic

The objective of having an EIA for the proposed plant under consideration is to identify

the potential impacts on the site specific prevailing environmental setting and degree of

impacts. This will enable to draw up an appropriate Environmental Management Plan

(EMP) to consider other alternatives so as to ensure that the proposed activity does not

impair the present environmental setting beyond the assimilative capacity of the region

and ambient and other environmental standards are not exceeded at any point of time.

This is because ambient standards are maintained to protect human health with an

adequate margin of safety.

4.1 DETAILS OF INVESTIGATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS DUE TO

PROJECT LOCATION, POSSIBLE ACCIDENTS, PROJECT DESIGN,

PROJECT CONSTRUCTION, REGULAR OPERATIONS, FINAL

DECOMMISSIONING OR REHABILITATION OF A COMPLETED

PROJECT.

4.1.1 Environmental Impacts Due To Project Location

The proposed expansion is expected to be carried out within the premises of the existing

project. In this process, no trees or plantation will be cut or destroyed. The existing

infrastructures like roads, pipelines, gridlines will be used. No national park or wild life

sanctuaries or any places of archaeological or historical importance is present within 10

km radius of the area.

4.1.2 Environmental Impacts Due To Possible Accidents

Storage of any volatile gas is not envisaged so as to spread beyond the boundary in case

of any hazard. But 90 KL of LDO with other lubricants will be stored for use in the

process. The hazardous waste handling, management and Trans-boundary Movement

Rules, 2016 will be followed.

4.1.3 Environmental Impacts Due To Project Design

No new or untested technology for steel production has been proposed for the project.

DRI Kilns, IFs or FBC based power plants all have been proposed, based on proven and

well-established technology. Hence there is no risk of technological failure




4.2 IMPACT PREDICTION & ASSESSMENT

The description of the proposed project and the existing baseline status in the core as

well as in the buffer zone has been dealt in detail in the earlier chapters. These

information forms the basis of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) of the proposed

project and the same is discussed in this chapter with prediction and evaluation of these

objective of having an EIA for the proposed project under consideration is to identify the

potential impacts on the site specific prevailing environmental setting and degree of

impacts. This will enable to draw up an appropriate Environment Management Plan (EMP)

to consider other alternatives so as to ensure that the proposed project activity does not

impair the present environmental setting.

4.2.1 Pollution Potential

The plant processes like DRI, IF, power plant, etc are prone to air pollution. The sources

and type of pollution in the process operation are presented in the Table 4.1. It may be

observed that heat, dusts, SO2, CO, and NOX to the air environment are the prime

pollution parameters from the proposed project. However with proper planning and

innovative management technique and the use of suitable pollution control devices, it is

possible to run the manufacturing processes without much endangering the air

environment.

4.3 METHODS USED FOR THE STUDY OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

After screening and scoping the identification of potentially significant environmental

impacts constitute one of the preliminary steps of Environmental Impact Assessment

(EIA). There are three principal methods for identifying environmental effects and

impacts; these are checklists, matrices and flow diagram

a) Checklists:

Checklists are comprehensive lists of environmental effects and impact indicators

designed to stimulate the analysts to think broadly about possible consequence of

contemplated action.

The environmental issues that need to be considered include:

Air quality

Noise and vibration

Water management and water quality

Soil conservation

Flora and fauna

Archaeology and heritage protection

Transport

Rehabilitation

Visual impacts

Hazard and risk assessment

Waste management

Socio-economic issues




b) Matrices:

Matrices typically employ a list of human action in addition to a list of impact indicators.

The two are related in a matrix, which can be used to identify cause and affect

relationship. The environmental attributes that may be affected due to the construction

and operation of the proposed project are:

Air Environment

Noise Environment

Surface Water Environment

Ground Water Environment

Discharge of wastewater

Land environment

Biological Environment

Socio-Economic and Cultural Environment

Infrastructure

c) Flow Diagrams:

Flow diagrams are used to identify action (cause)-effect-impact relationship. It helps the

analysts to visualize the connection between action and impacts. Of the three, the matrix

method is chosen to list the potential impacts of the proposed project during

construction, operation and post operation phases. The impact identification matrix is

presented in Table 4.1.

4.4 EVALUATION OF IMPACTS:

The identification of activities and their likely impact on each of the environmental

parameters has already been done earlier in this chapter. Majority of activities, which occur

during the construction phase have impacts, which are temporary in nature, but the activities

during normal operational phase have little or no impacts. In order to have meaningful

evaluation, a matrix comprising of project activities during construction as well as operation

and maintenance phase versus environmental components namely human, biological and

physico-chemical have been prepared in the form of EIA Matrix.

Introduction to Matrix Method:

The identification and prediction of impacts on various environmental parameters is followed

up by quantification of impacts. There are several methods available to quantify the

environmental impacts. The Leopold matrix method is one of the most widely adopted

methods and has been used for quantification of impacts for this study. The methodology

involves first, the identification of activities, which occur during the two phases (construction

and operation) of the project and second their likely impacts on the environmental

parameters.




Matrix Method

In this method, the effect of various activities on the environment is ranked on a scale of 1 to

5 based on the order of increasing importance to arrive at the Parameter Importance Value

(PIV).

The score of each parameter has been converted to a probability value and then recalculated

by multiplying each value by a factor of 1,000 so that the sum of all the recalculated values

becomes 1000. The values thus conform to the units of the standard scale, generally used for

evaluating the degree of impact on a set of project activities on total environment.

The matrix used for EIA consists of project activities on the X-axis and the environmental

components likely to be affected by such activities on the Y-axis. The degree of impact upon

the environmental components due to each anticipated project activity is graded as per the

index scale given below:

A (+) or (-) sign has been assigned to each value depending on its beneficial or detrimental

effect. The environment impact has been framed with the four major project activities as

column in X-axis and 14 environmental components as rows in Y-axis. The PIV values for

each row as determined in Table.4.2, is placed at the first column. An appropriate impact

value based on judicious subjective assessment is assigned to each of the project activity.

The impact score for each environmental component (SCI) have been calculated as under:

n

SCI = (PIV)iIij

J=I

Where is the impact value (on a scale of 1.0 to 10.0 positive or negative) due to the

effect of a project activity (j) on the environmental component (i).

The n= total number of project activities.

The Total Impact Score (TIS) is arrived at as follows:

n

TIS = (PIV)ISCI

I=1

Where n= Total number of environmental components.

The Total Impact Score (TIS) is determined as per the procedure outlined above. The

score has been evaluated against the following Assessment Value Index Scale:

SL. NO. DEGREE OF IMPACT IMPACT VALUE

1 Minimal 1-2

2 Moderate 3-4

3 Appreciable 5-6

4 Significant 7-8

5 Extreme 9-10




Up to (-) 2000 No appreciable impact on environment. Adverse impact minimal.

(-) 2000 to (-) 4000 Appreciable impact on environment but not injurious in general.

Adequate mitigating measures are important.

(-) 4000 to (-) 6000 Significant impact upon the environment. Major environmental

control measures to be taken.

(-) 6000 to (-) 8000 Major injuries impact on environment. Site selection to be

considered

(-) 8000 and above Alternative site to be considered.

Up to 2000 Minimally beneficial.

Up to 4000 Moderately beneficial.

Up to 6000 Appreciably beneficial.

Up to 8000 Significantly beneficial.

8000 and above Extremely beneficial.

Table 4.1 Parameter Impact Value of Environment Components

Environment

Components

Importance

Rank

Weight age

(W)

Parameters

Importance Value

(PIV)= W X 1000

Soil 1 1/16 62.5

Resource 1 1/16 62.5

Water 1 1/16 62.5

Air 1 1/16 62.5

Terrestrial flora 1 1/16 62.5

Aquatic Biota 0 0 0

Terrestrial fauna 0 0 0

Economic 2 2/16 125

Education 2 2/16 125

Public Order 1 1/16 62.5

Infrastructure & services 1 1/16 62.5

Security & Safety 1 1/16 62.5

Health 2 2/16 125

Cultural 2 2/16 125

Total 16 1000




Table 4.2 Impact Identification Matrix

Environment

Component

PIV

Burn

ing of

Waste

s,

Refu

ge &

Cle

are

d

Vegeta

tion

Site

Pre

para

tion/

Change

in

Topogra

phy

Civ

il

Work

s

such

as

Eart

h

Movin

g

&

Buildin

g

of

Str

uctu

res

Inclu

din

g

tem

pora

ry S

tructu

res

Heavy E

quip

ment

Opera

tion

Dis

posal of Constr

uction W

aste

s

Genera

tion o

f Sew

age

Influx o

f Constr

uction W

ork

ers

Defo

resta

tion

Tra

nsport

ation o

f M

ate

rial

Ere

ction o

f Equip

ment

Raw

Mate

rial use &

Handling

Em

issio

n fro

m M

eta

llurg

ical P

rocesses

Efflu

ent

from

Meta

llurg

ical Pro

cess

Solid W

aste

fro

m M

eta

llurg

ical Pro

cess

Wate

r Extr

action

for

Meta

llurg

ical

Pro

cess

Em

plo

ym

ent

genera

tion

Energ

y U

se &

Dem

and

To

tal

TIS

Sco

re

Soil 62.5 -1 -2 -2 -1 -1

-7 -437.5

Resource 62.5 -1 -2 -1 -1 -1 -1 -2 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -14 -875

Water 62.5 -3 -1 -3 -1 -8 -500

Air 125 -1 -2 -1 -3 -1 -8 -1000

Terrestrial flora 62.5 -2 -2 -1 -5 -312.5

Aquatic Biota 0 0 0

Project

activity




From the matrix table Total impact score (TIS) is found to be “-812.5” which means as there will be moderately negative impact on the

environment. However with adequate mitigating measures the degree of beneficial impact will be higher.

_ Negative or adverse Impact

+ Positive or beneficial Impact

Terrestrial fauna 0

0 0

Economic 125 +2 +1 +1 +1 +3 +4 +4 +1 -2 -1 -1 +2 +8 +23 2875

Education 62.5 +3 +3 +2 +3 +11 687.5

Public Order 62.5 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -10 -625

Infrastructure &

services 62.5 -1 -1

-2 -125

Security & Safety 125 -1 -1 -1 -2 -1 -1 -1 -1 -2 -11 -1375

Health 125 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -5 -625

Cultural 125 +3 +4 +4 +1

+12 1500

Total -812.5




4.5 IMPACT ASSESSMENT OF SIGNIFICANCE OF IMPACTS (CRITERIA FOR

DETERMINING SIGNIFICANCE, ASSIGNING SIGNIFICANCE)

The description of the proposed project and the existing baseline status in the core as

well as in the buffer zone has been dealt in detail in the earlier chapters. These

information forms the basis of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) of the proposed

project and the same is discussed in this chapter with prediction and evaluation of these

objective of having an EIA for the proposed project under consideration is to identify the

potential impacts on the site specific prevailing environmental setting and degree of

impacts. This will enable to draw up an appropriate Environment Management Plan

(EMP) to consider other alternatives so as to ensure that the proposed project activity

does not impair the present environmental setting.

The last step in the impact assessment process is determining the magnitude and

significance of impacts. This determination provides decision makers with the

information needed to determine if a project should be approved or modified in some

way that would make impacts acceptable.

Impact magnitude depends on the degree and extent to which the project changes the

environment and usually varies according to project phase. In general, most project

impacts are associated with construction and operations. Site characterization has fewer

impacts and decommissioning and reclamation impacts are relatively short-lived and

should result in an improvement in conditions relative to the operational period.

Determining the significance of impacts can be one of the most difficult aspects of an

impact assessment. Quantification of impact magnitude is typically an objective,

scientifically based process. But once impact magnitude is determined, the analyst must

decide on the significance of those impacts. Decision makers typically consider only the

significant impacts in deciding among alternatives. Significant impacts will be the focus of mitigation measures and possible adjustment of project features.

Factors to consider in determining impact significance often parallel those factors used to determine impact magnitude. These factors include but are not limited to:

Area of Influence: Impact significance is often directly related to the size of the

area affected. An example would be the acres of land disturbed.

Percentage of Resource Affected: The greater the percentage of a resource

affected, the more significant the impact.

Persistence of Impacts: Permanent or long-term changes are usually more

significant than temporary ones. The ability of the resource to recover after the

activities are complete is related to this effect.

Sensitivity of Resources: Impacts to sensitive resources are usually more

significant than impacts to those that are relatively resilient to impacts.

Status of Resources: Impacts to rare or limited resources are usually

considered more significant than impacts to common or abundant resources.

Regulatory Status: Impacts to resources that are protected (e.g., endangered

species, wetlands, air quality, cultural resources, water quality) typically are

considered more significant than impacts to those without regulatory status. Note

that many resources with regulatory status are rare or limited.

Societal Value: Some resources have societal value, such as sacred sites,

traditional subsistence resources, and recreational areas. Note that some of these

resources also have regulatory status.

https://teeic.indianaffairs.gov/glossary/glossary.htm#114









4.5.1 CATEGORY OF IMPACT

Small Impact: This is an impact that is limited to the immediate project area,

affects a relatively small proportion of the local population (less than 10%), and

does not result in a measurable change in carrying capacity or population size in

the affected area.

Moderate Impact: This is an impact that extends beyond the immediate project

area, affects an intermediate proportion of the local population (10 to 30%), and

results in a measurable but moderate (not destabilizing) change in carrying

capacity or population size in the affected area.

Large Impact: This is an impact that extends beyond the immediate project

area, could affect more than 30% of a local population, and could result in a

large, measurable, and destabilizing change in carrying capacity or population

size in the affected area.

4.5.2 FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN DETERMINING IMPACT MAGNITUDE INCLUDE

BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO:

Area of Influence: The impact magnitude is often directly related to the size of

the area affected. In this case 10km radius of GFL project site.

Overlap Between Area of Influence and Resource of Interest: The impact

magnitude is often directly related to the area of overlap between resources and

the overall area of influence for the project.

Deviation from Current or Baseline Conditions: For projects that affect air or

water quality, how much would concentrations of contaminants increase. For

projects that result in a large influx of workers, what is the current capacity of

housing, schools, and other support services?

Project Duration: Magnitude is often directly proportional to the lifespan of the

project, beyond which it is likely to have much less impact.

Sensitivity of the Resources: Some species appear to be very sensitive to

disturbance whereas others are fairly tolerant of disturbance (e.g., many plant

species adapt to disturbance).

Project Timing: Project activities that occur during periods of sensitivity (e.g.,

nesting season, high-precipitation periods) have greater impacts than at other

times.

Quantifying Impacts

Impact magnitude is usually quantified on the basis of the factors listed above. Simple

calculations (e.g., summing area of influence, calculating areas of overlap between

resources and area of influence, determining project duration) or complex mathematical

models (e.g., modeling changes in water concentrations or air emission dispersions) are used to quantify impacts.

Often, the magnitude of impacts cannot be readily quantified. This can result from

incomplete data or a poor understanding of the effect the project will have on resources.

In these cases, professional judgment is usually used to describe in qualitative terms

what the magnitude of impacts would be.

When determining impact magnitude, conservative assumptions are often used.

Examples of conservative assumptions include assuming that all plants and animals in




the project footprint will be killed, that the project will result in a fairly high decrease in

property values, and that emission control features will be some percentage below

design levels. Sometimes a “worst-case” situation is assumed. The purpose of using

conservative assumptions is to ensure that impacts are not underestimated.

Conservative assumptions can sometimes result in unrealistically high estimates of

impact magnitude. The use of professional judgment in identifying assumptions is

essential to ensure that the results are conservative but not unrealistic.

Impact determinations are often based on a number of assumptions. Each of the

assumptions has some uncertainty associated with it. To compensate for uncertainties,

conservative assumptions are usually made to ensure that impacts are not underestimated.

Even with conservative assumptions, impacts that are poorly understood (e.g., the

response of resources to the environmental changes brought about by the project is not

known) can be underestimated or improperly characterized. Conservative assumptions

can result in greatly overestimating impacts and unnecessary costs for a project if mitigations are not properly directed and scaled to the impact.

For impacts that are quantified using a model, the analyst typically has a good sense of

where the uncertainties lie. Often, sensitivity analyses can be performed with models to identify which variables contribute the most uncertainty to the results.

Identifying uncertainties associated with less quantitative assessment methods will rely

heavily on the professional judgment of the analyst. A determination will have to be

based on the current understanding of the resource and its response to environmental

change. This may be based largely on existing literature, studies, or measured resource responses in other geographic areas.

Monitoring programs are usually developed to determine or verify the impacts to various

resources. An important component of any monitoring program will specifically address

uncertainties. Resolving uncertainties will be important for future related projects, fine-

tuning of operations, and refinement of a mitigation strategy.

For M/s GFL; significance of impact has been taken on 10km radius of project site and

dispersion model of PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and NOx has been made using software and

concentration of these pollutants of different villages have been shown on isopleths in

this chapter and impacts have been found to be within allowable limit, with installation of

pollution control equipments

4.5.3 POLLUTION POTENTIAL

The plant processes like DRI, IF, Ferroalloy Plant & power plant, etc. are causes of air

pollution. The sources and type of pollution in the operation process have been

presented in the Table 4.3. It may be observed that heat, dust, SO2, CO, and NOX to

the air environment are the prime pollution parameters from the proposed project.

However, with proper planning and innovative management technique and the use of

suitable pollution control devices, it is possible to run the manufacturing processes

without much endangering the air environment.






Table 4.3 Sources and type of Pollution from the Proposed Project

4.6 IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE:

Construction activity will constitute excavation, civil construction and mechanical

erection. Transport of various construction materials and stockpiling them will also be a

major activity. These activities will be of transient nature and its impact on environment

will be of significance during construction phase only. Several temporary measures will

be taken during construction period to minimize the impact.

Site Development:

Site development is one of the prime activities for any project. This activity mainly

involves clearing of the land from all hindrances to bring the site to a condition of

starting construction work. As the expansion project will be carried out in the existing

premises of the plant and the site is already developed for Industrial purpose, there will

be no significant impact due to site development.

Civil & Structural Work:

This work can be divided into two groups, foundation work and structural work. Certain

foundation work may involve pile-driving rigs etc. These activities may generate noise

pollution. Besides, foundation work will involve excavation and concreting work. Dust

pollution, especially during dry season, will be the major problem unless appropriate

measures are adopted to contain/ minimize the dust nuisance. The structural work will

involve steel, masonry work etc. and will involve use of equipments like hoists, cranes,

mixers, welding machines etc. There may be dust & noise pollution from this work.

During construction stage water will be required for dust suppression, civil construction

and domestic purposes. So the dust emission and noise will pose some impact on

Environment. However, the dust emission will be controlled by water sprinkling. Noise

will be controlled by adoption of adequate preventive measures like acoustic covering;

by taking adequate precautions the impact due to fugitive emission and noise will be

reduced to negligible level.

Sl.

No Section/ Unit Operation

Emission released

waste generated Types of pollution

1. Raw Material

and scrap

Handling

Stock, crushing,

screening, conveyor

transfer & charging

etc.

Fugitive dust

emission

Air pollution Noise

pollution

2 Induction

Furnace & Billet

casting

Melting of sponge

iron, pig and scrap

Fume and slag Air pollution

Water pollution

3 DRI Reduction of Iron

Ore

Fumes Air Pollution

4 AFBC Generation of Steam

for power generation

Particulates, CO2,

SO2, NOx and

generation of fly and

bed ash

Air pollution Land

pollution

5 CCM Casting continuously

molten steel in multi

strand casters

Spillage of hot liquid

metal and contact

with hot water and

mill scale

Land pollution &

air pollution due

hot métal coming

in contact with

water.




Mechanical & Electrical Erection:

The mechanical erection work involves extensive use of mechanical equipment for

storage, retrieval and erection, site fabrication etc. leading to considerable noise

pollution and air pollution to some extent. Pollution from Electrical work, however, is

negligible.

Source of construction materials:

For any project construction, the requirement of stone chips and sand is inevitable.

These Construction materials are available locally and as the volume of civil construction

is less, the impact due to this activity will be less.

Air Environment:

Civil work and erection of structures are undertaken during construction phase. These

construction activities along with transportation of construction material generate a lot of

dust. Welding of different structures also produce gases. But these dusts are inorganic in

nature and are generated at ground level. Due to the heavy nature of these dusts, these

are not expected to be carried over to long distance to cause inconvenience to

surrounding people. The impact on ambient air quality due to fugitive dust generated

during construction period is not permanent in nature, and will cease with the completion

of construction activity. The bulk of civil work is expected to be completed within 12

months. With the completion of construction phases, the impact on air quality due to

fugitive dust will be minimized.

Water Environment:

The water requirement during construction activity will be met by surface water supplies.

A lot of debris and other solid wastes are expected to be generated during construction

period and during monsoon with the surface runoff, the debris will be washed away

contributing a lot of suspended solids in nearby stream. This will be minimized through

provision of temporary garland drains around the dumping site of debris. Again this is

temporary in nature and will cease with the completion of the construction work. The

impact on water environment during construction phase is also temporary in nature.

Noise Environment:

The general noise levels due to construction activities such as welding, fabrications and

erection of DRI, Rolling mill, & Power plant for installation of other machineries may

sometimes go up to 80-90 dB (A) at the work sites during day time for very shot

interval. The workers in general are likely to be exposed to an equivalent noise level of

65 – 75 dB (A) in 8 hour shift for which statutory precautionary measure as per the law

will be taken.

Land Environment:

The proposed project site is already acquired and industrial developed land within the

existing premises, so there will not be any vegetation loss or tree cutting and will also

very less impact on the land use pattern.

Soil Environment & Solid Waste:

During construction phase, solid waste such as excavated soil, debris, metal cutting,

cotton waste, oil and grease from machineries/vehicles used in construction etc. will be

generated. These wastes may contaminate soil at plant site temporarily and would be

restricted to a small area.




Certain hazardous wastes such as; used oil filter & used oil etc. will be generated during

constructional activities. The generation of solid waste during construction phase will be

temporary in nature and will be confined to the construction site only. Hence the impact

due to this will be insignificant, reversible and short term in nature.

ToR 10 Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel,

restroom etc. to be provided to the labor force during construction as well as to

the casual workers including truck drivers during operation phase.

The proposal is for modification of an existing running, with additional facilities and

capacity increase. The expansion infrastructure shall be carried out in the vacant space

of existing running unit and adjacent new land.

Existing plant has all sanitary infrastructures for its employees, casual workers, truck

drivers transporting raw material and product to and out of the existing running project.

There is a subsidized canteen with hygienic environment to cater tea, snacks and meals

to all concerned including visitors.

Sanitary MSW disposal system, soak pit and STP exist for the existing system. Bath

rooms, latrines separate for gents and ladies with regular cleaning and sanitation exists

for workers and temporary workers. There is a rest room with attached bath room and

latrine for people working in night shift or continuing two shifts.

There is a first aid center with pharmacists for free checkup, free medicine and first-aid

provision for its employees.

All these existing infrastructure facilities will be extended to additional work force of

expansion project.

There will be no need of burning fossil fuel by contractor workers for cooking purpose as

canteen coupons will be issued to them through registered contractors. If situation so

demands gas cylinders will be provided to them on chargeable basis.

Socio-economic environment:

The construction activity will help in infusing a large amount of funds in that area and

thus will generate a lot of employment, both direct and indirect. The socio-economic

conditions will improve during construction phase of the project.

This might also result in a steep rise in agricultural wages in the surrounding villages,

especially at the time of harvesting for short duration. Hence, short-term positive

impacts on socio-economic conditions of the area are anticipated during the construction

phase.

Ecology:

The total area acquired for the existing as well as proposed project is 6.22 ha. Out of

that a major portion i.e. above 60% of the total area will be utilized for plant facilities,

storage & for disposal of solid wastes. About 33% will be used for green belt

development. Balance is for internal roads, rain water harvesting pond etc. The proposed

site does not cover any area with vegetation. Thus the construction activity will have

least impact on the ecology of the area. It will have no impact on the buffer zone.




4.7 MITIGATING MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Mitigating Measures for Site Development:

Side Development for the M/s. Gagan Ferrotech Ltd. has no significant impact as the

proposed plant is planned inside the existing plant premises.

Mitigating Measures for Civil & Structural Work:

During construction stage water will be required for dust suppression, civil construction

and domestic purposes. However, the dust emission will be controlled by water

sprinkling. Noise will be controlled by adoption of adequate preventive measures. By

taking adequate precaution the impact due to fugitive emission and noise will be reduced

to negligible level.

Mitigating Measures for Ambient Air Quality:

The impact on ambient air quality due to fugitive dust generated during construction

period is not permanent in nature, and will cease with the completion of construction

activity. However, use of tarpaulin for covering the material being transported in trucks,

sprinkling of water will control the dust emission and proper maintenance of vehicle and

use of Euro/Bharat- III/IV vehicles will reduce emission. With the completion of

construction phase, the impact on air quality due to fugitive dust will be minimized and

this impact is reversible in nature.

Mitigating Measures for Water Environment:

During monsoon with the surface runoff, the debris will be washed away to contribute a

lot of suspended solids in nearby pond. This will be minimized through provision of

temporary garland drains around the dumping site of debris. Water consumption and

discharge of wastewater is not likely to have any significant impact on the water

environment during construction phase. Again this is temporary in nature and will be

ceased with the completion of the construction process. Moreover, storm water run-offs

will occur only during the monsoon which last for about three months in the study area.

Domestic effluent generated from labor camp will be treated in septic tank and will be

discharged to soak pit.

Mitigating Measures for Noise Pollution:

The workers in general are likely to be exposed to an equivalent noise level of 80-90 dB

(A) in 8 hour shift for which all statutory precautions as per the law will be implemented.

Uses of proper personal protective equipments like earplugs, earmuffs etc shall further

mitigate any adverse impact of noise on the construction workers. By using standard

practice of operation, these impacts can be minimized and made insignificant. Impacts

on the noise levels will be temporary for short duration and reversible in nature. As far

as possible noisy work during night time will be avoided.

Mitigating Measures for Soil Quality & Solid Waste:

The excavated top soil will be stored near boundary and will be used for back filling/road

work/bund preparation/landscaping. The other wastes will be collected and segregated

and will be disposed of properly without causing any public nuisance and environmental

contamination.




The management, handling & disposal of this hazardous waste will be carried out in

accordance with the Hazardous Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989 and

amendment thereof.

Table 4.4 Action Plan for Excavation and Muck Disposal during Construction

Phase.

Sl.

No.

Solid Waste Generated Action Plan

1. Excavated soil for preparation of

foundation work of buildings and

machineries.

Will be kept aside near the boundary wall

for later use for filling of low-lying areas.

2. Leveling of Site Top soil removed during leveling of the site

will be kept aside for development of

Green Belt.

3 Metal scrap generated due to

fabrication of equipments.

The scrap will be stored in scrap yard for

use/sale.

4 Debris generated during the

Construction.

Will be suitably disposed in low lying areas.

5 Muck or sludge generated due to

piling jobs.

Will be transferred nearer to boundary wall

to be used later as filling material in low

lying areas.

Mitigating Measures for Ecology Impact:

M/s Gagan Ferrotech has already developed the green belt within its existing premises.

The Greenbelt will be helpful in constricting the noise & dust.

Mitigating Measures for Socio-Economic Impact:

Some health check up facilities will be provided to the nearby areas from the plant side

and some work facilities will be given to the non-workers that may contribute to direct or

indirect employment.

4.8 IMPACTS DURING OPERATIONAL PHASE

With the incorporation of the steel plant with other facilities the impacts both beneficial

and adverse are anticipated on ambient air quality, Noise quality, land use, water

quality, soil, ecology and socioeconomic environment.

Impact on Air Environment

Additional Tor 9 Plan for utilization of energy in off gasses

During operational phase there will huge amount of heat generation due to chemical

reactions inside DRI kilns which unless removed would increase atmospheric

temperature and influence the climate.




WHRB has been proposed where this waste heat shall be used to generate steam for

generation of power for the project. Thus 16 MW power will be generated from waste

heat recovery.

Gen.Tor-7(i) Assessment Of Ground Level Concentration:

The impact on Air environment of an integrated steel plant depends on various factors

like production capacity, plant configuration, process technology involved, type of raw

material used, type of fuel used, in plant control measures adopted, operation and

maintenance of the various units of the plant. Apart from these, there will be other

activities associated e.g., transportation of raw material and finished products, storage

facilities and material handling within plant premises which may contribute to air

pollution.

The steel plant will affect the air quality parameters like PM10, PM2.5. The raw material

handling plant, steel melting shops and other downstream units will emit dust and

fumes. Apart from the above there will be fugitive dust emissions due to transportation,

storage and processing of huge amount of ores and minerals as raw materials.

The impact on air quality due to emission from a single source or group of sources is

evaluated by the use of mathematical models. When the air pollutants enter into the

atmosphere, they transport and diffuse in the atmosphere resulting in pollutant dilution.

Air meteorology is the important factor in pollution status evaluation. The air quality

models are designed to stimulate these processes mathematically and relate emission of

primary pollutants to the resulting downwind air. The model inputs are basically emission

load, meteorological data and topographic features.

Plant Emissions

Emitting Stacks are major sources of air pollution in the proposed expansion. Different

plant units are to be provided with necessary air pollution control devices like, Bag

filters, ESPs, Venturi Scrubbers & Dust catchers etc. to control dusts, heat & gases and

also to limit emission within the prescribed standard. The emission factors, air handling

capacity of the proposed installation and emission norm has been used to estimate the

amount of emission that will be generated from the proposed expansion . The emission

inventory is prepared on the basis of CPCB norms, air pollution equipment efficiency

standards and actual field tests carried out for similar processes elsewhere.

Ambient Air Quality: Air quality modeling and prediction

During the course of operation of the proposed expansion, pollution load on the air

environment is envisaged which would influence the ambient environmental conditions of

the site and adjoining localities.

Air borne pollution envisaged to be caused by wind and traffic movement from accessible

roads. Also fugitive dust will be generated from handling and feeding of raw materials.

Based on the above discussion and considering ambient air quality of the study area,

dust emission has been considered as critical pollutant for dispersion modeling. Dust

emissions will be controlled by adopting adequate Air Pollution Control Measures.

Modeling Procedure




Prediction of ground level concentrations (GLC‟s) due to proposed expansion of Steel

plant has been made by Industrial Source Complex, Short Term (ISCST3) as per CPCB

guidelines. ISCST3 is US-EPA approved model to predict the air quality. The model uses

rural dispersion and regulatory defaults options as per guidelines on air quality models.

The model assumes receptors on flat terrain.

Model input parameters: Control options

The options used for short term computations are:

The plume rise is estimated by Briggs formulae, but the final rise is always

limited to that of the mixing layer;

Buoyancy Induced Dispersion is used to describe the increase in plume

dispersion during the ascension phase;

Calms processing routine is used by default;

Wind profile exponents are used by default.

Flat terrain is used for computations;

It is assumed that the pollutants do not undergo any physico-chemical transformation

and that there is no pollutant removal by dry deposition.

Briggs rural dispersion coefficient has been considered 24 hours averaging are taken into

consideration.

Model input: Source input parameter

ToR-7(v) Details of Stack emission and action plan for control of emissions to

meet standards.

The different point source input parameters in the form of stack and emission data are

considered.

Stack emissions are major sources of air pollution from the proposed plant. The

proposed expansion steel plant is to be provided with necessary air pollution control

devices like bag filters, dust catchers etc to control dusts and gases and also limit

emission within the prescribed standard. The emission factors, air handling capacity of

the proposed installation and emission norm has been used to estimate amount of

emission from the proposed plant with the height of emission. Particulate emission is

based upon the Air Pollution Control Device (APCD) with design stack emission limited to

<50 mg/Nm3.

Table 4.5 Stack Inventory Data

Production Units

Stack Height (m)

Top Dia (m)

Temp (k)

Velocity (m/s)

Flow rate m3/hr

TSP gm/s

SO2 gm/s

NOx APC Equipment

1x350 TPD

DRI attached

with WHRB

42 2.0 393 10.8 1,22,500 1.5 9.75 - ESP

2x20 IF 30 1.8 343 10.4 95,410 2.34 - - 2Bag Filters

SAF 2x9

MVA

30 1.6 353 10.3 74,676 2.8 - - 2Bag filters




All the stacks will be provided with suitable port hole and platform for stack

monitoring.

Model input parameters: Receptor Data input

The impact has been predicted over a 10Km radius area with location of emitting stacks

as center point. The receptors are located in a rectangular coordinate system with

respect to the central stack in 16 possible wind directions (N to NNW). As a result 1681

grid points with 500m spacing were chosen to predict the incremental GLC at different

receptor locations.GLC have been calculated at every 500 m grids points to have better

results. Predominant Wind direction is mainly from NW.

Model input Meteorological parameters

The primary meteorological data was collected at the site and same was compared IMD

data of Durgapur which were input to the model. Atmospheric inversion level at project

site and site specific micro-meteorological data has been given in chapter-4 under ToR-

6(i) which has been considered for preparing the isopleths model.

Determination of ground level concentration of pollutants in 10km study area

Table 4.6 Input Meteorological data

Jamuria Nov-Jan 2018 Overall

Year Month Day

Hr.(1-

24) CL. Cover DBT RH PR WD WS

2017 12 1 1 1 19 58 983 360 2.5

2017 12 1 2 1 19 58 983 360 2.5

2017 12 1 3 0 19 58 983 360 2.5

2017 12 1 4 0 19 58 983 360 2.5

2017 12 1 5 0 19 58 983 360 2.5

2017 12 1 6 0 19 58 984 360 2.5

2017 12 1 7 0 19 58 984 360 2.5

2017 12 1 8 0 20 50 984 360 2.5

2017 12 1 9 0 20 50 984 360 2.5

2017 12 1 10 0 20 50 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 11 0 20 50 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 12 0 21 50 984 315 2.5

8 MW AFBC

to be

connected

to existing

AFBC

40

1.5 373 7.5 48,320 0.54 8.67 - ESP




2017 12 1 13 0 21 63 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 14 0 21 63 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 15 1 21 64 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 16 1 21 65 984 315 2.5

2017 12 1 17 0 21 66 984 315 2.7

2017 12 1 18 0 21 66 984 315 2.7

2017 12 1 19 0 20 65 982 315 2.7

2017 12 1 20 0 20 65 982 315 2.7

2017 12 1 21 0 19 64 982 315 2.7

2017 12 1 22 0 19 64 982 315 2.7

2017 12 1 23 0 19 64 982 315 2.7

2017 12 1 24 0 19 64 982 315 2.7

Model Output: Maximum anticipated Ground Level Concentration (GLC) of

pollutants without mitigation measures.

The modeling results indicate that there will be release of very high unacceptable levels

of incremental particulate emissions and hence adequate mitigation measures must be

taken up. The model was set up for calculation of 24-hour average concentration values.

Mitigation Measures Suggested

Adequate pollution control measures are proposed to meet the emission standard

prescribed by the regulatory authorities. Different APC measures with their efficiency are

enlisted in

The Isopleth model was set up using without APC stack data of Table-4.7 for calculation

of 24-hour average concentration values. The incremental ground level concentration

values (GLC) at different receptor locations are shown in following Table- 4.8 and

corresponding isopleths of pollutants are shown in Fig. 4.1, 4.2, 4.3.




Table 4.7 Assessment of GLC of pollutants without APC equipments

Location Name GLC for PM10 (µg/m3)

GLC for PM 2.5(µg/m3)

GLC for SO2(µg/m3)

Monitore

d G

LC a

t

sam

pling s

ite

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Monitore

d G

LC a

t

sam

pling s

ite

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Monitore

d G

LC a

t

sam

pling s

ite

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Belbad 98.1 12.83 110.9 53.9 9.67 63.6 18.4 24.5 42.9

Jambad 95.5 9.62 105.1 52.4 8.47 60.9 18.3 32.6 50.9

Shibdanga 96.5 11.22 107.7 49.4 7.26 56.7 18.4 32.6 51.0

Berala 90.0 12.83 102.8 50.0 9.67 59.7 22.2 28.6 50.8

Banali 96.4 11.22 107.6 54.5 8.47 63.0 18.6 8.17 26.8

Chakdola 95.4 12.83 108.2 54.2 9.68 63.9 23.0 28.6 51.6

Shirpur 94.3 9.62 103.9 51.8 8.47 60.3 24.1 24.51 48.6

Bagdiha 95.3 12.83 108.1 50.4 9.67 60.1 21.0 24.51 45.5

NAAQS

STANDARD

100 60 80

Description

The monitoring results when added up with predicted values from isopleths the resultant

GLC value in different sampling locations indicated in table- 4.6.The maximum resultant

of PM10 and PM2.5 value will be 110.9 g/m3& 63.9 g/m3 and SO2 will be 51.6 g/ m3.

The highest value was due to the fugitive emissions from semi urban area, traffic and

collateral effect of neatby industries.The predicted contributions of different pollutants

from the proosed steel plant when added with the monitored existing background levels

of PM10, PM2.5, and SO2 respectively it will increase a little but all the values will be within

the NAAQS norms.

Impact on Water Environment:

ToR 7(ii) Water quality modeling-in case, if the effluent is proposed to be

discharged into the local drain, then water quality modeling should be

conducted for the drain water taking into consideration the upstream and

downstream quality of water of the drain.

Waste water generated from process shall be treated in the proposed ETP & STP and the

treated effluent shall confirm to the prescribed standard. The treated effluent will be

reused in the process. No water will be discharged outside the plant premises.

ToR 7 (iii) Impact of the transport of the Raw materials and end products on

the surrounding environment shall be assed and provided. In this regard,

options for transport of raw material and finished products and wastes (large

quantities) by rail or rail cum road transport or conveyor-cum-rail transport

shall be examined.




Majority of raw material and product shall be transported through rail. NH-2 is the

nearest highway through which balance Raw material and product will be transported to

and from project site. About 4.5 lakh tons of balance material consisting Raw material

and product per annum will be transported which will bring additional load of 72 trucks

per day on existing road, i.e. about 3 nos of additional trucks to and fro per hour.

Existing National high way can take care of this additional load but road connecting

project NH to be widened and strengthened.

Materials to be transported through pollution compatible Euro or Bharat III/IV vehicle.

Materials transported through trucks are to be fully covered to avoid spillage on roads.

Fly ash to be transported through tankers or moistened if required to be transported

through open truck.

Internal roads are to be black topped with regular water sprinkling and wheel washing

arrangement. This along with road side plantation and green belt will control dust

emission during transportation of material.

Impact on Traffic

Road traffic to and from the plant during operation of expanded plant will be heavier

than at present as envisaged mode of transport of the materials is via road.

Traffic density will be increased marginally as a result of expansion. In turn, it will

contribute to noise as well as ambient air quality in term of dust and other gaseous

pollutants. The regular maintenance of vehicles and transport of materials under cover,

will limit the pollution within limits. The present road conditions are reasonably good for

proposed movement of traffic.

Prediction of Impacts Due To Vehicular Movement

All the major raw materials will be transported by Rail up to the nearest station and from

there in covered trucks by road. Hence there will not be much fugitive dust generation

during transportation of raw materials. Remaining raw materials and products will also

be transported by road in covered trucks. The proposed site is well connected by Grand

trunk road which is capable of absorbing additional truck movement due to

transportation. Thus there will not be generation of fugitive dust and hence no adverse

impact on vehicular traffic due to the proposed plant. However fugitive emission from

internal roads shall be minimized by black top internal roads with regular water

sprinkling arrangement.

Traffic studies was carried out on road connecting Ranisayer More to project site. Total

length of the road is 11.8 km and it is estimated that additional 185 Bharat Standard IV

heavy vehicles with will use the road. Line source modelling was carried out for

calculating CO, TSP and NOx emissions.

TSP for proposed scenario




In proposed Scenario the road connecting the plant with NH 2 will accomodates

additional 3 no. heavy vehicles, 2 no light vehicles, 3 no two wheelers per day. The line

source modeling depicts additional CO emission as 73.39 µg/m3, NOx as 1.268 µg/m3 &

TSP as 0.502 µg/m3.

Impact on Ecology:

The proposed expansion unit will be set up in the existing premises. Abandoned mine of

Eastern coal field will be considered as solid waste dumping site. No waste water will be

drained outside plant boundary. Hence not much of impact on ecology is anticipated.

Socio-economic Impacts:

It is rather obvious that nearby villages will have more impact (adverse or beneficial),

therefore the study area was divided into three zones with 3 km, 7 km & 10 km radius

with central point of the combined project site as the centre to assess the socioeconomic

impact of the project on the surrounding environment. The interview followed by the

questionnaire method was followed to assess the people‟s perception of the project and

also to assess the change in socioeconomic pattern due to setting up of the integrated

steel plant. The sample of villages from each stratum as well as the respondents /

households within each sampled village was selected by two-stage stratified random

sampling. On the first stage; villages from each stratum were selected and on the

second stage; households/respondents are selected from sampled village by simple

random sampling. Efforts were made to allocate sample of villages from each strata in

proportion of their size. From each selected village, at least two respondents were

selected randomly to account intra village variability among the respondents.

Composition of the Questionnaire

A detailed questionnaire was designed for this study to assess the impact of the project

on the surrounding environment in terms of socioeconomic benefits likely to accrue from

this project. The project objective was kept in the mind all along while designing the

questionnaire. Households/respondents were interviewed with the structured

questionnaire. The questionnaire consisted of following major sections:

Name, age and sex of the respondent.

Composition and size of family

Educational status

Information and agricultural situation (land use, cropping pattern, productivity,

net return etc.)

Income and employment

Information and family budget

Consumption and saving

Family health status

Family asset base

Respondents perception about the project

Educational Status

The local educational levels will be raised with additional facilities provided to schools

through various CSR programs, such as scholarships, awareness programs, child care

facilities, and cultural events, self- help groups and community participation in area

developments.

Impact on Public Health and Safety




Discussion with the medical officers reveals non- existence of major disease in the study

area. Health awareness among the villages may grow with the industrial development,

especially regarding cleanliness.

4.9 MITIGATION MEASURES DURING OPERATION PHASE

Mitigation measures for Ground water:

Until recently it was a common myth that groundwater is pristine i.e. potential

contaminant percolating through the subsurface would adhere to the soil or be degraded

by natural process and therefore would not enter or greatly affect groundwater quality.

Thus the groundwater was regarded as a safe and convenient depository for the waste

and non-waste by-products, generated by the society.

However, with the passage of time and increasing number of serious incidences, there is

a growing concern of groundwater pollution. Raw material of the project will be stored on

compact pure clay mixed with Bentonite layer covered with HDPE layer therefore there

will be no seepage from the raw material piles. Again, the material will be stored under

shed so as to prevent the leachate through runoff.

Mitigating Measures for Air Environment:

The impacts of primary air pollutants on air quality due to emission from single source or a

group of sources is evaluated by use of mathematical models. Needless to say the adequate

air pollution control measures like bag filter, ID Fan and stack will be installed to reduce

impact to a larger extent.

Air pollution control at different point source

The proposed steel plant will emit gases and fumes which will have negligible impact on

human health, animals, vegetation and material. Here under, action plans are proposed to

address the pollution problem to meet the NAAQS 2009 Standard.

Stacks will be provided with porthole and working platform so that stack monitoring can

be done as per norms of statutory authority and proper Air Pollution Control Devices

shall be installed

The isopleths diagrams after providing efficient equipments to arrest particulate matter is

given in Fig 4.6,4.7 & 4.8

Details of stack emission and action plan for control of emission to meet standard has

been given in chapter-4 under Tor-3(vi). ESPs for DRI kiln and bag filters for IFs& Raw

material handling section have been proposed to control dust emission of stacks,

50mg/Nm3.

As standard of emission has been revised, size of ESPs to be adequate by increasing

number of plates and corrugations or possibility of switching over to MEEP.

ToR-7(vi) Measures for fugitive emission control

Primary Fugitive Emission

During operations, dust emissions may associate with: -

Delivery of raw materials to site;

Storage of huge quantity of different minerals;

Processing;

Operation of the stockpiles and reclamation;




Transportation of by-products off site;

Vehicle movements on the margins of the stockpiles and on unpaved

roads;

Secondary Fugitive Emission

Secondary fugitive emission like dust and fume from steel melting shop comprising of IF, will

be equipped with swiveling hood.

Following mitigation measures will be carried out

Adequate capacity dust extraction measures with swivel hood, ID fan shall be

provided at different loading, unloading and transfer points in the raw

material handling section.

Fumes and gases in IF section shall be removed by Fume extraction system

with bag house followed by stack.

Adequate dust suppression system in the form of water sprinklers shall be

provided at raw material yard, solid waste dump site and along the vehicular

roads.

There will be dedicated roads for vehicles carrying raw material and product.

Adequate plantation will be undertaken all along the plant boundary and

along the roads. The organization will bring at least 33 % of the total area

under green belt.

For control of fugitive emission dry fog system inside closed material conveyors to be

installed. Water sprinklers by the side of internal roads and in material unloading/loading

area to be installed.

Fly ash will be pneumatically collected and stored in closed bin fitted with a bag filter at

the top of it to filter return air while pneumatically conveying fly ash or loading to

tankers for disposal.

Swivel hoods over IF and SAFs will control dust emission through ID fan and stack so

that emission remains within limit prescribed by CPCB.

Dedicated black topped internal roads for exclusively transporting raw material and

product will also control fugitive dust emission.

Foliage trees of green belt around boundary wall of project, by the side of internal roads

and around RMHP will act as dust sink to mitigate fugitive emission.

The isopleths after installing the air pollution control systems are given below:




Table 4.8 Assessment of GLC of pollutants with APC equipments

Location Name

GLC for PM10 (µg/m3) GLC for PM2.5(µg/m3) GLC for SO2(µg/m3)

Monitore

d G

LC a

t

sam

pling s

ite

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Monitore

d G

LC a

t

sam

pling s

ite

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Monitore

d G

LC a

t

sam

pling s

ite

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Belbad 98.10 0.01 98.11 53.9 0.01 53.91 18.4 24.5 42.90

Jambad 95.50 0.01 95.51 52.4 0.01 52.41 18.3 32.6 50.90

Shibdanga

96.50 0.01 96.51

49.4 0.01 49.41

18.4 32.6 51.00

Berala 90.00 0.01 90.01 50.0 0.002 50.00 22.2 28.6 50.80

Banali 96.40 0.01 96.41 54.5 0.01 54.51 18.6 8.17 26.77

Chakdola 95.40 0.01 95.41 54.2 0.007 54.21 23.0 28.6 51.60

Shirpur 94.30 0.01 94.31 51.8 0.01 51.81 24.1 24.51 48.61

Bagdiha 95.30 0.01 95.31 50.4 0.01 50.41 21.0 24.51 45.51

NAAQS STANDARD

100.00 60 80

Description

The monitoring results when added up with predicted values from isopleths after

installation of APC the resultant GLC value in different sampling locations indicated in

table- 4.7. The maximum resultant of PM10 and PM2.5 value will be 98.11 g/m3 & 54.51

g/m3. The highest value was due to the fugitive emissions from semi-urban area,

Collateral effect of Industries.The predicted contributions of different pollutants from the

proposed steel plant when added with the monitored existing background levels of PM10,

PM2.5, and SO2 respectively it will increase a little but all the values will be within the

NAAQS norms.

ToR-7(vii) & Add ToR 17 Details of hazardous waste generation and their

storage, utilization and disposal. Copies of MOU regarding utilization of solid

and hazardous waste shall also be included. EMP shall include the concept of

waste-minimization, recycle/reuse/recover techniques. Energy conservation

and natural resource conservation.

The various types of solid waste encountered from an Integrated Steel Plant

are:-

A. Municipal Solid Waste

B. Hazardous Waste

C. Industrial Waste

A. Municipal Solid Waste

Very small amount of Municipal Solid waste will be generated from canteen& Guest

House which will be converted to compost through Organic Waste converter and will be

utilized as manure in green belt.




B. Industrial Waste

Fly Ash Management

Total Fly ash generation from CPP has been estimated to be 36,540 TPA which will

be supplied to B.S.C refarctories & Ceramics, Jamuria as per their request letter.

Fly ash from DRI Kilns will be disposed off in abandoned coal mines of ECL for

which permission has been obtained.

All the request letter are annexed

Bottom Ash Management

Total Bottom ash generation from CPP has been estimated to be 24,360 TPA which will


Hazardous Waste Management

Sl.

No.

Type of

Hazardous

Wastes

Schedule Source of

Generation

Unit of

Measureme

nt

Quantity

Generated

/Annum (

approx )

Mode of

Disposal

1

Used Grease 5.2 Moving equipments Kg 500 Stored

temporarily and

being lifted by

Authorized

Vendor.

2

Used Oil

Filters

35.1 Compressors, power

packs, vehicles.

Nos. 26 Stored

temporarily and

being lifted by

Authorized

Vendor.

3

Waste

Jute/Cotton

& Used PPE's

like Gloves,

shoes etc .

5.2 Use for cleaning

machines

Kg 200 Stored

temporarily and

being lifted by

Authorized

Vendor.

4

Oily Sludge 34.4 Power Pack Rooms Kg 40 Stored

temporarily and

being lifted by

Authorized

Vendor.

5

Used Oil 5.1 Transformer and all

Mechanical Engines

KL 6.2 Being stored in

containers and

will be sold to

Authorized

vendors.

.

Add ToR 8 Plan for slag utilization

Table 4.9 Solid Wastes utilization & disposal measures

Sl.

No



2 Induction Furnace Slag 40,000 To be used as river sand




substitute after grinding and

residual Fe recovery

3 Fly ash from DRI 40,000 To be dumped in OCP of ECL

mines and road making






7 Fe-Mn slag 24,700 To be used as raw material for

Si-Mn production


ToR-7(viii)Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per Fly ash

Notification, 2009.

M/s Gagan Ferrotech Limited has proposed to supply fly ash to brick manufacturing

units.

Total Fly ash generation from CPP has been estimated to be 36,540 TPA which will


40,000 TPA Fly ash from DRI Kilns will be disposed off in abandoned coal mines of

ECL for which permission has been obtained.

4.10 IMPACT QUATIFICATION

The impacts of a development intervention are often difficult to quantify. That is no reason

for not quantifying them. If the objectives of the intervention are strictly qualitative, that may

be a better reason. Even then however, some degree of quantification may be necessary in

order to assess the extent to which the intervention has succeeded

Employment : 250 people will get direct employment

Traffic load : The Raw material & most of the products will be transported by

road.

Emission load: PM10, & PM2.5 load in main gate is predicted to be 107.2µg/m3

and 53.6

µg/m3

respectively which is the maximum predicted value in comparison to all other

settlements within10 km radius. This value is well within the allowable limit.

Total water requirement for the project after proposed modification has been estimated

to be about 1077 m3/day. The permission for existing requirement has been obtained

from Jamuria Municipality.

Total power requirement for existing & expansion plant will be 48.0 MW

Captive power generation 24.00 MW

Power to be purchased from local grid 24.00 MW




4.11 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

EMP AT DESIGN STAGE

Technological Improvement

For this steel plant the technologically viable, less energy intensive, less polluting route has

been chosen. With advanced technology in emission reduction and energy conservation will

be taken in to consideration, while selecting the suitable design. Some of the important

design considerations at the design & implementation stage are as follows.

A proper layout plan has been chosen for the optimum utilization of the available

land and resources.

The design aims at minimum use of water.

Conservation of water through waste water treatment, recycling & reuse.

ETP & STP are proposed to meet Zero discharge norms proposed with proper

planning and its implementation.

Efficient dust extraction, dust suppression and dust collection measures have

been planned in the design of plant equipment to reduce the dust emission

considerably.

The noise producing equipments will be designed with dynamic balancing and

vibration dampening by proper grouting so as to produce minimum noise.

The operation control rooms and pulpits would be provided with noise shield walls.

4.11.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLANT (EMP) AT CONSTRUCTION

STAGE:

Site Preparation:

The project site preparation requires some leveling activities. During dry weather conditions,

dust may be generated by activities like excavation and transportation through un-metallic

roads. The dust will be suppressed using water sprinkling. As soon as construction is over the

surplus earth should be utilized to fill up low-lying areas, the rubbish should be cleared and

all un-built surfaces reinstated. Appropriate vegetation should be planted and all such areas

should be landscaped.

For Maintaining Water quality

During construction, volume of debris & mud will be generated, which during the rainy

season, can contaminate the storm water run-offs with suspended solids. Efforts will be made

to reduce the suspended solids content of storm water run-offs by routing the storm water

drains through catch pits. Moreover, storm water run-offs will occur only during the monsoon

season which lasts for about 2-3 months in the study area. These impacts will be temporary

lasting only during the construction period of the proposed plant. Pathways for pollution via

seepages, evaporation, residual remains are to be studied for surface water will be done after

running of expansion project

For Maintaining Air Quality

During the construction phase, civil work will be carried out to put the units in place. The

construction work leads to generation of fugitive dust. However the fugitive dust is not

expected to spread too far. Water spraying will be undertaken to suppress dust. Due to




construction activities, impacts on ambient air quality will not be permanent and will cease

once the construction is completed.

To Maintain Noise Level in the Vicinity

The construction equipment will be chosen by criteria of environmental friendly

technology and shall generate less noise level. Noise levels during the limited

construction period are likely to increase initially due to increased movement of trucks

and other diesel powered material handling equipment. This is unavoidable and limited

during day time only. The movement of trucks and machinery will be regulated to reduce

the impacts of increased noise. The construction phase will be limited to short period.

Hence it is temporary. Therefore the impact on ambient noise levels will be insignificant

and ceases once the construction is completed.

Ecological Aspects

The construction activity won‟t affect the surrounding ecology of the proposed steel plant

as the construction is well confined within the site premises.

4.11.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLANT (EMP) AT OPERATIONAL PHASE

Air Environment Management:

There will be dust & Gas Emission from IF and material handling site. With use of Swivel

Hood, Bag Filter & Stack this emission will be appreciably reduced & there by Air

Pollution will be under control.

The dust generated in the material handling system will be extracted through suction

hoods located at various drop points. The hoods will be connected to a common duct

which will be provided with a motorized damper for isolation. An on-line booster fan will

be provided for generating the necessary suction at the suction hoods.

Air pollution Control devices proposed for the project

E S Ps

M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd proposes ESPs for control of dust emission for DRI kilns and

captive power plant.

Charged or emitting electrodes will be connected to 66KV DC. 220V AC will be stepped

up to 66KV and converted through rectifier to DC. Dust collecting plates will be earthed.

Emitting electrodes will be placed between collecting electrodes and equidistance from

them.

Inlet duct of ESP will have gradual expansion and perforated diffuser plate to reduce

pressure to facilitate dust separation and equal distribution of gas to all rows. Corona

discharge will create drift or migration velocity by charging dust particles and pushing

them towards collecting electrodes.

Deposited dust over collecting electrodes will be periodically dry cleaned by automatic

hammering process and collected dust from bottom hopper of ESPs will be pneumatically

conveyed to storage bunker for disposal.

Gas outlet duct is gradually narrowed down to inlet duct size and pressure is recovered.




E S P Field showing corona emitting electrodes and dust collecting grounded

electrodes.

ESP dust separation efficiency is minimum 99%, the area of collecting plates „A‟ is

calculated using Anderson-Deutsch equation.

ฑ= 1-e-Vpm A/Q,whereฑis efficiency of ESP

1) ESP for 350 TPD DRI kiln

A = ln(1-0.99)/-(Vpm /Q) = 4.605/- (Vpm /Q)

Where A = area of ESP plates taken together, Dust migration velocity Vpm= 0.2m/s (assumed) and Q=

volumetric flow in Nm3/sec

Q= 12,25,500Nm3/hr=34.02Nm3/s, Vpm= 0.2m/s, ฑ=99%

Area of collecting plates A= 4.605/0.0058= 783.32m2&takingdesign safety factor 1.5

times = 1175m2.

With plate height of 9m, the total plate length is estimated as 130m

ESP can have 10 rows with plate length of each row =13m




with 0.5 m width of each plate, no. of plates in each row will be 26 so total no. of

plates will be 260.

1x350 TPD DRI Kiln will have1 ESPs, ID fan& high single stack

Bag filters

Bag filters have been proposed for EAFs and IFs

Pulse jet bag filter has been proposed with bag material needle felt polyester, hence Air

to cloth ratio i.e. dust migration velocity Vfhas been taken as 5m/min.

1) Bag filter for 2x20T IF

Gas flow rate of each IF, Q=1590Nm3/min,

Ac, Area of filter cloth = Q/Vf= 318m2

and taking design safety factor 1.5times the calculated value, area of cloth comes to

477m2

Filter media cloth will be stitched to cover a cylindrical MS wire cage with circular bottom.

Dimension of each bag diameter=15cm and length 3.6m, Area of cloth for each

cage=1.7m2 with additional margin for folding inside at connection of bag with Ventury.

Number of bags required will be 280 bags. As 2/3 of bags will be under service and 1/3

under cleaning at a time, total bags will be 420. The bag filter will have 21 rows and each

row will have 20nos of bags. There will be two chambers, Dust separation chamber and

plenum chamber. Dust laden flue gas will enter into separation chamber; pass through

needle felt polyester bags due to suction of ID fan. Dust will be retained on surface of

bags and clean gas will enter into plenum chamber and finally vented through stack due

to discharge of ID fan.

PULSE JET BAG FILTER




Differential pressure gauge between two chambers will give performance of filtering

media. When dp across is high the pulse jet will operate through timer action and clean

bags. During cleaning of bags dust will be deposited in bottom hopper of bag house and

will be removed through Rotary air lock valve and pneumatically conveyed to storage

bunker or recycled to process.

For 2x20T IF, there will be 2nos of bag filters, 2nos of ID fans but single stack

Additional Tor-6 All Stock Piles Will Have To Be On Top Of A Stable Liner To

Avoid Leaching Of Materials To Ground Water.

The raw materials at the RMHP site will be stored on a platform made up of pure clay

mixed with bentonite and covered by HDPE liner to avoid leaching of materials.

Moreover, the raw materials will be stored under a shed to avoid the contact with rain

water.

Water Management

ToR 7(iv) A note on treatment of waste water from different plant operation,

extent recycled and reused for different purposes shall be included. Complete

scheme of effluent treatment, characteristics of untreated and treated effluent

to meet the prescribed standards of discharge under E(P) Rule.

Waste Water Management

As the plant water system is designed based on maximum recirculation system and

effective discharge from plant will be insignificant. The effluents likely to be generated

from the proposed plant are:

Backwash Waste from Filtration Plant;

Run-off water from Raw Material Storage Yards;

Waste Water from Billet Caster;

Cooling tower blow-down of various shops; and

Plant Sewage & Canteen Effluents.




Waste Water Management and Its Disposal

Waste water is generated from:

Softeners –backwash

Blow down Water from various cooling systems.

Efforts are made to reuse most of the water in the plant itself. This water comes under

the category of „Waste Liquor‟ and has to be treated to render it harmless. Backwash

from Filtration Plant will be led to pits for removing suspended solids. The overflow from

the pits will be reused in the plant water system. The sludge from the pits will be dried

and dumped. Effluents from the SMS are likely to contain suspended solids and oil &

grease. These effluents will be routed to settling pits fitted with oil & grease trap. The

clarified water will be reused in the plant. Cooling Tower Blow-down from various

recirculation systems will be cascaded for reuse in other qualitatively compatible

systems. Thus, proposed plant will recycle water to the maximum extent possible. The

Blow Down water from various plant units will be collected along with the drainage water

and used for Dust Suppression by Spraying and for gardening purpose.

All storm water drains from the raw materials and solid waste handling areas will be

routed through garland drains into catch pits of sufficient volume to settle out suspended

solids present in the storm water run-offs. The clear water will be discharged into natural

drainage channels. This type of effluent is anticipated only in monsoon season. The

sewage from the Plant and Canteen waste water will be treated in Sewage Treatment

Plant. The treated sewage will be diverted for irrigation of green cover.

Waste Water Treatment Plant




The proposed plant will require industrial water on a continuous basis for process

requirement, cooling purposes, cleaning/scrubbing purposes, ash handling etc. In order

to minimize consumption of fresh water from the source, industrial water after treatment

is proposed to be recycled and reused. After cooling and suitable treatment makeup

water will be added to compensate for the losses in closed circuit circulation system.

The various control measures are:

All storm water drains from the raw materials and solid waste handling areas will be

routed through garland drains into catch pits of sufficient volume to settle out suspended

solids present in the storm water run-offs. The clear water will be discharged into natural

drainage channels. This type of effluent is anticipated only in monsoon. The sewage from

the Plant and Canteen waste water will be treated in Sewage Treatment Plant. The

treated sewage will be diverted for irrigation of green cover.

The effluents to be generated from the proposed units and its management plan are:

Run-off water from Raw Material Storage Yards – Settling tank with OW separator

– reused for dust suppression;

Waste Water from Billet Caster and Rolling Mill – Scale pit with OW separator and

recyled

Regeneration waste water from DM Plant – Neutralization pit and reused for dust

suppression

Bolier blowdown from power plant – Reused for ash handling

Plant Sewage (toilets and washrooms) & Canteen – STP and reused for gardening

The effluents will be treated in water treatment plant and will be reused / recyled. GFL

will follow Zero Discharge Liquid norms. Air cooled condensors will be installed in Power

Plant to conseve water use.

ToR-7(x) Action plan for rain water harvesting measure at plant site shall be

submitted to harvest rain water from roof top and storm water drain to

recharge the ground water and also to use for the various activities at the

project site to conserve fresh water and reduce the water requirement from

other sources.

4.12 RAIN WATER HARVESTING

Run Off Water Management during Monsoon/ Post Monsoon Period

Table 4.10 Rainfall & temperature data during monsoon season (June to

Oct.)

Month Total Monthly Rainfall (mm) Average temperature (0C)

June 241.3 30.5

July 600.4 28.4

August 364.9 23.1

September 442.0 23.0

October 93.7 26.9

TOTAL 1342.3

Average rainfall during the monsoon period 268.46 mm/month




Average annual rainfall of project area 1300 mm

M/s. Gagan Ferrotech plans to have rain water harvesting ponds to collect the storm

water and rain water particularly during the monsoon and will use the same for plant

purposes as and when required. It has allocated low lying land for the purpose. In the

absence of any other data, the general run off calculated is based on Rational Formula as

mentioned hereunder.

Annual average rain fall of the project area =1300mm

Q = CIA

Where Q = Run off in m3/annum

i = Precipitation =1.3m (average annual rainfall)

Total catchments area A =3.9ha =39000 m2

C= Considering avg. Run off coefficient of the area= 0.7

Run off calculation from this area/annum

Q= 1.3mx39000 m2 x0.7=35,490 m3

Rain water harvesting pond

About 0.2 ha of land has been allocated to store rain water for plant use so that make up

water drawl can be reduced. Rain water can be stored for 10 days for utilization in

process during lean season although permission has been granted by Jamuria

Municipality for supply of requisite amount of water.

4.13 MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENTS:

The Pollution Control Equipment will be examined and maintained in annual shutdown.

As a measure of preventive maintenance sets of ESP plates and filter bags for bag

filters will be kept ready to meet any eventuality of mal performance of

equipment in position.

Preventive maintenance also will be taken up so as to avoid break downs.

Noise Pollution Management

During normal operations of the plant, noise levels will increase significantly only close to

the turbines/compressor but this will be confined only within plant boundary. However,

noise levels will increase during bleeding-off of excess steam. But such incidents are

occasional and will last only for few seconds at a time only. Steam vent line shall be

provided with silencer to decrease pitch of sound.

The noise level within the plant boundary is occupational noise levels and confined

within shops. The level will be further minimized when the noise reaches the plant

boundary and the nearest residential areas beyond the plant boundary, as elaborate

green belt development is envisaged for all along the boundary for attenuation of noise

and fugitive emission. All the equipment in the steel plant will be designed/operated in

such a way that the noise level shall not exceed 85 dB (A) as per the requirement of

Standard.




In the proposed plant, the primary sources of the noise pollution are compressors, turbo

generator & crushers. The noise pollution management will be taken up in following

manner

By selecting low noise generating equipment, which would have below 75 dB at

1m distance. This is taken care at the equipment design stage.

By isolating the noise unit from the working personnel‟s continuous exposure by

providing acoustic aids for plant personnel.

By administrative & safety measures, providing noise level monitoring, remedial

measures, providing noise safety appliances.

The noise impact on the surrounding environment during the construction phase

will be within acceptable limits. The operation of high noise generating equipment

shall be restricted during the night time.

Various measures proposed to reduce noise pollution include reduction of noise at

source, provision of acoustic lagging for the equipment and suction side silencers,

selection of low noise equipment and isolation of noisy equipment & proper

maintenance and lubrication. The plant personnel in noisy area will be provided

with PPE such as ear muffler & also the duration of exposure of the personnel will

be limited as per the norms.

Thick green belt development is planned for the attenuation of noise pollution and

to maintain ambient noise quality within the statutory limit.

Solid Waste Management

The steel plant will consume small quantities of mineral raw material and hence will

generate negligible amount of solid waste in the form of slag. The comprehensive EMP

enlists below the management plan for each individual unit.

Raw Material Handling

Solid waste generated in the raw material handling area is particulate matter. This is

collected using de-dusting equipment like Bag Filters and routed back into the process.

Measures For Improvement Of Ecology:

There is no wildlife sanctuary within the 10 km radius of the proposed plant. The core

zone area is devoid of plantation. There will not be any loss of plantation because of the

project. The resultant ambient air and noise quality levels after the operation of the plant

will be within the prescribed limits to have any impact on surrounding flora and fauna.

Moreover, there will not be any wastewater discharge and solid waste disposal to outside

the factory premises to cause any impact on the local ecology. On the other hand, the

company will provide the comprehensive green-belt cover in 33 % of the project area as

per the MoEFCC norms to improve the local ecology.

The company in principle shall adhere to

Plantation program will be undertaken in all available areas. This will include

plantation along the plant boundary, in the proposed plant premises, along the




internal and external roads, on solid waste dump yards and along the

administrative building and the stacking yards.

People will be educated and trained in social forestry activities by local

governmental and non-governmental organizations.

Plantation in residential and industrial areas will be done along the narrow and

broad internal roads. This will not only improve the flora in the region but also

add to the aesthetics of the region.

ToR-7(ix)Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33% area i.e. land

with not less than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species, width of

plantation, planning schedule etc. shall be included. The green belt shall be

around the project boundary and a scheme for greening of roads used for the

project shall also be incorporated.

4.14 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT

Green vegetation cover is beneficial in many ways leading to conservation of biodiversity,

retention of soil moisture, recharge of ground water and maintaining pleasant micro

climate of the region. In addition, vegetation cover can also absorb pollutants from the

environment and helps in effective pollution control.

Green belts are planned open spaces safeguarded from developmental activities such as

construction of buildings, factories, dams, etc. Safeguarded in the sense that no

infrastructural development will be allowed on such designated areas and these areas will

only be used for growing vegetation cover on it. Green belts in and around urban and

industrial areas are important to the ecological health of any given region.

The common objectives are to protect natural environments such as biodiversity, etc, to

improve air quality of the region, pollution control, to maintain micro climate of the

region, etc. Green Belt Development is an important tool that aims at overall

improvement in the environmental conditions of the region

Industrial development is causing severe health hazards due the exceeded level of

pollution.

Green belt not only restrict environmental pollution but it helps to maintain the ecological

balance of the region.

As on Date Plantation Status

Sl. No. Year of

Plantation

Type of Trees No.s

Planted

Area of Plantation Ha of Land

for

Plantation

Cost of

Plantation

in Lakhs

1 2013-2014

Debdaru, Neem, Arjun,

Legestromia, Gulmohar,

Krisnachura

1500

Along boundary wall-Tier I

1.0 1.5

2 2014-2015 Akasia, Neem, Arjun,

Mango, Debdaru, Palas 1500

Along boundary wall-Tier II 1.0 1.5

3 2015-2016

Debdaru, Neem, Arjun,

, Krisnachura 1500

DRI-I Areas, Power Plant

Areas, Solid Waste Dump

area, Raw Material Handling

1.0 1.7

4 2016-2017 Sheesum, Neem, Arjun, 1495 Rolling Mill Areas, SMS 1.0 1.3




Chatim, Debdaru,

Kamini

Areas, Project Office Areas,

Pond Side Areas

5 2017-2018

Mango, Pyara,Chatim,

Kamini, Karanj 1671

DRI Plant Areas, Power Plant

Areas, Ferro Alloys Plant

Areas , Rolling Mill Areas,

1.3 2.0

Total 7666

5.3 8.0

Proposed Target Our target is to plant 1700 saplings of tree/plants in and around of our plant areas for

next year (2018-19) and also to replenish the dead plants.

Target of FY 2018-19:- Plantation of 1700 various saplings in various areas of plant are

following:-

SL.NO Type of Tree/plants Size of

Sapling

No of

plantation

Approx cost of

per Sapling

Area of

Plantation Ac

1 Sonajhuri, Mango, Pyara,Chatim 3ft 340 210

2.27 2 Sishu, Gulmohar, Krisnachura 3ft 340 210

3 Neem, Arjun, Mango, Debdaru 4ft 140 170

4 Debdaru, Sheesum, Neem, Arjun, 4ft 520 180

5 Ashok, Pyara,Chatim 2ft 360 220

4.15 SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT

The proposed plant site has been chosen primarily because of its proximity to the raw

material source and infrastructure facilities. The benefits include;

• Generation of employment;

• Establishment of small and medium scale engineering ancillaries, with cascading

employment opportunities;

• Increased revenue to the state by way of taxes and duties;

• Improved green cover;

• Better communication and transport facilities;

The proposed project shall enhance the prospects of employment. Recruitment for the

unskilled workers for the proposed plant will be from the nearby villages. The

development of the basic amenities viz. roads, transportation, electricity, drinking water,

proper sanitation, educational institutions, medical facilities, entertainment, etc. will be

developed as far as possible.




Table 4.11: Total Impact Score (TIS) for Project activities with EMP

Environment

Component

PIV

Burn

ing

of

Waste

s,

Refu

ge

&

Cle

are

d V

egeta

tion

Site

Pre

para

tion/

Change

in

Topogra

phy

Civ

il W

ork

s s

uch a

s E

art

h M

ovin

g

& B

uildin

g o

f Str

uctu

res I

nclu

din

g

tem

pora

ry S

tructu

res

Heavy E

quip

ment

Opera

tion

Dis

posal of Constr

uction W

aste

s

Genera

tion o

f Sew

age

Influx o

f Constr

uction W

ork

ers

Defo

resta

tion

Tra

nsport

ation o

f M

ate

rial

Ere

ction o

f Equip

ment

Raw

Mate

rial use &

Handling

Em

issio

n

from

M

eta

llurg

ical

Pro

cesses

Efflu

ent

from

M

eta

llurg

ical

Pro

cess

Solid

Waste

fr

om

M

eta

llurg

ical

Pro

cess

Wate

r Extr

action f

or

Meta

llurg

ical

Pro

cess

Em

plo

ym

ent

genera

tion

Energ

y U

se &

Dem

and

To

tal

TIS

Sco

re

Soil 62.5

-1 -1

-2 -126

Resource 62.5

-1 -1 -1 -1

-4 -252

Water 62.5

-1

-1 -62.5

Air 125

-1 -1 -1 -3 -375

Terrestrial flora 62.5

0 0

Aquatic Biota 0

0 0

Terrestrial fauna 0

0 0

Economic 125

+2 +2 +2 +2 +2 +2 +2 +2 -1 -1 -1 +2 +2 +17 2125

Education 62.5

+1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +6 378

Public Order 62.5

-1 -1 -2 -126

Project

activity




From the matrix table Total impact score (TIS) is found to be “1064” which means as there will be beneficial impact on environment.

Infrastructure & services 62.5

-1

-1 -62.5

Security & Safety 125

-1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -5 -625

Health 125

-1 -2 -250

Cultural 62.5

+1 +2 +2 +2

+7 441

Total

1064




4.16 IRREVERSIBLE AND IRRETRIEVABLE COMMITMENTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL

COMPONENTS

A resource commitment is considered irreversible when impacts from its use would limit

future use options and the change cannot be reversed, reclaimed, or repaired.

Irreversible commitments generally occur to nonrenewable resources such as minerals or

cultural resources, and to those resources that are renewable only over long-time spans,

such as soil productivity.

A resource commitment is considered irretrievable when the use or consumption of the

resource is neither renewable nor recoverable for use by future generations until

reclamation is successfully applied. Irretrievable commitments generally apply to the loss

of production, harvest, or natural resources and are not necessarily irreversible

Total of 18.85 ha land is available with M/s GFL where the plant would actually be

developed, it is likely that the entire site would be unavailable for other uses, once the

project comes into operation. However, after the operational life of the project is over

and the plant and linear facilities have been decommissioned and reclaimed, the land

would again be available for other uses. Therefore, during the lifespan of the project,

land use would experience an irretrievable impact.

Existing facilities would be cleared, graded, and filled, as needed, to suit construction of

the project. These actions would result in additional impacts that are irreversible and/or

irretrievable. Existing vegetation and soils would be removed, causing mortality of some

wildlife, such as burrow-dwelling species and slow-moving species that are unable to

relocate when ground-disturbance activities begin.

The loss of top soil, which requires a very long time to generate would constitute an

irreversible and irretrievable resource commitment; however, reclamation would likely

include replacing any lost topsoil and not relying on natural soil-producing processes.

Therefore, it is likely that the soil removal would ultimately be an irretrievable impact but

not irreversible.

It has been proposed to store this valuable resource which is excavated during

construction stage and reused in green belt etc. Again fly ash generated from the project

will be used as brick in construction work, so that conventional use of making brick from

topsoil and burning and damaging it can be avoided.

Process water would be used primarily in the cooling towers, which would convert the

water to vapor. Potable water used during construction and operations would be

discharged through a septic system. The project would not directly discharge any of the

process or potable water to source of surface water. Rain water to be harvested and

used in the process or can be charged to ground water table.

4.16 CONCLUSION

The impact and its predictive measures has been discussed in this chapter and there is

no alternative proved technology to include. The monitoring of the Environment

Managemnt Plan is an important tool to keep the Environment Impact Minimum & Ensure

proper functioning of the Equiments which has been elaborated in following chapters.




CHAPTER-5

ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY & SITE)

M/s Gagan Ferrotech Limited is running its project on 18.85 ha of land at-Ikra, Jamuria

Industrial Estate in Paschim Burdwan district of WB. Existing plant is running with DRI

kilns, IF, Rolling mill and CPP and has taken prior EC for o.4 MTPA steel production.

The company is now proposing its modification to reduce its production capacity from

0.4 MTPA to 0.3 MTPA steel, generate 24 MW power from waste heat recovery and AFBC completely utilizing char from DRI Kilns.

The process route of steel billet production is DRI Kiln-IF-LRF. This route is well

established and proven and many steel plants in the country and abroad are successfully

running on this route. No alternative technology/ new technology has been proposed for the project.

No alternative has also been proposed for the project, as themodification will be carried

out on available vacant space of the existing 18.85 ha of land. The land is adequate for

0.3 MTPA steel manufacturing project.




CHAPTER-6

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME

M/s Gagan Ferrotech Limited (GFL) has taken ToR for modification of facilities accorded

in EC for 0.4 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant with replacement of 1x35T EAF facilities with

2x20T IFs and 1x350 TPD DRI Kilns at- Jamuria Industrial Estate in Burdwan district of

WB.

The company has already chalked out a comprehensive Environmental Monitoring

Program for sustainable targeted production for existing unit and this will be extended to

the expansion units also.

6.1 TECHNICAL ASPECTS OF MONITORING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF

MITIGATION MEASURES

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters like air, water, noise and soil as well as

performance of pollution control facilities and safety measures in the plant are important

for proper environmental management of any project. Therefore, the environment and

safety cell has already been formed to handle monitoring of air and water pollutants as

well as the solid wastes generation & utilization as per the directive of State Pollution

Control Board and Central Pollution Control Board. Proposed monitoring schedule for

environmental parameters is given in the table below.

6.2 ADVANTAGES OF MONITORING

Monitoring is a wide term explains the planning method and tools for supervisdion of any

action. In environmental setting monitoring means data analysis of the project.

Regular monitoring of different checking methods have the following advantages

Represents a clear idea about the concerned environment status.

Enables to take necessary remedial measures

Helps to finalize Environmental Management plan

Check efficiency of pollution control devices

Requirement of upgradation/Improvement in Equipments

Laboratory Facilities

The company has an Environmental laboratory to analyze important pollution parameters

like pH & BOD of water, analysis of raw material, product, noise monitoring near various

equipments etc. However, NABL/MoEF Accredited laboratory is being outsourced for

periodic monitoring of stack flue gas, ambient air quality, surface and ground water

quality and other various parameters.

Depending upon prevailing predominant wind direction AAQ monitoring stations have

been decided where monitoring instruments shall be installed for measuring polluting

parameters at regular intervals.

Pollution load is normally high during winter days and predominant wind direction in

project buffer zone is North West and North. Hence, following villages in South East and

South direction at different distances from project site and having settlements have been

selected for installing regular monitoring stations.




In fact isopleth of pollutants at these stations show comparatively higher value than

other locations.

6.3 SAMPLING LOCATIONS

i. All Pollution control equipment will be provided with separate electricity meter

and totalizer for continuous recording of power consumption.

ii. The amperage of the ID fan will also be recorded continuously. Non-functioning of

Pollution control equipment will be recorded in the same logbook along with

reasons for not running the Pollution Control Equipment.

iii. The safety cap/emergency stack of rotary kiln type plant, which is generally

installed above the After-Burner Chamber (ABC) of feed end column will not be

used for discharging untreated emission, bypassing the air pollution control

device.

iv. In order to prevent bypassing of emissions through safety cap and non-operation

of ESP or any other pollution control device, software controlled interlocking

facility has been proposed to be provided on the basis of real time data from the

plant control system, to ensure stoppage of feed conveyor, so that, feed to the

kiln would stop automatically, if safety cap of the rotary kiln is opened or ESP is

not in operation. The system should be able to take care of multiple operating

parameters and their inter relations to prevent any possibility of defeating the

basic objective of the interlock. The system should be foolproof to prevent any

kind of tempering. The software based interlocking system, proposed to be

installed by industry should be get approved by the concerned State Pollution

Control Board, for its adequacy, before installation by the industry.

Stack Emission from de-dusting units. All de-dusting units should be connected to a

stack having a minimum stack height of 30 m. Sampling porthole and platform etc. shall

be provided as per CPCB emission regulation to facilitate stack monitoring. De-dusting

units can also be connected to ABC Chamber and finally emitted through common stack

with kiln off-gas emissions. Fugitive Emission The measurement may be done, preferably

on 8-hour basis with high volume sampler. However, depending upon the prevalent

conditions at the site, the period of measurement can be reduced.

6.4 DATA ANALYSIS

The Ground water samples are to be analyzed for various parameters as per IS: 10500

and Surface water as IS: 2296 Class-C standards with the specified procedure. The

methodology which will be adopted for monitoring & analysis of PM10, PM2.5 SO2, NOx will

be as per IS: 5182 standards. Samples are to be analyzed for SO2 using improved West-

Gaeke method for air samples using a spectrophotometer at a wavelength of 560 nm.

Samples will be analyzed for NOx using Jacob and hocheiser modified (Na-As) method,

for air samples using a spectrophotometer at wavelength of 400 nm. RPM & SPM in

ambient air can be found by using respirable dust sampler (RDS).

6.5 REPORTING SCHEDULE

After every six months of plant operation six monthly reports covering all the parameters

of study period has to be prepared engaging external accredited agency and after

completion of analysis a copy of all the analysis reports are to be sent to the State

Pollution Control Board. A copy of the reports are to be maintained in the plant and will

be made available to the concerned inspecting authorities. Abnormality to be reported to

Board of Directors to take decision on remedial measure




Gen.ToR-7(xii) Action plan for post project environmental monitoring shall be

submitted.




Table-6.1 Monitoring schedule table for Environmental Parameters

monitoring

Sl

No

Environ

ment

particula

rs Description Areas/Locations

Frequency of

Monitoring

Duration of

sampling

Monitoring

Parameters Data Analysis

Reporting

Schedule

Action

Plan

1

Air AAQ

1. Belbad

2.Jambad

3.Banali Twice in a week 24 hrs

PM10,PM2.5,SO

2,NOx, CO,

Ammonia, Lead,

Nickel, Arsenic

West-Gaeke

Method using

Spectroohoto

mer, Jacob

and

Hocheiser

method

After every six

months of

plant operation

six monthly

reports

covering all the

parameters of

study period

has to be

prepared

engaging

external

accredited

agency and

after

completion of

analysis a copy

of all the

analysis

reports are to

be sent to the

State Pollution

Control Board.

A copy of the

reports are to

be maintained

in the plant

and will be

made available

to the

concerned

inspecting

authorities.

Abnormal

ity to be

recorded

and

intimated

to Head

of

Organisat

ion and

corrective

Measures

to be

Impleme

nted

Fugitive 1. RMHP

2. Internal

Roads Once in a Month SPM

Stack

Emissions 1. DRI Kilns

2. CPP

3. IFs Online Monitoring Continuous

PM10,PM2.5,SO

2,NOx, CO,

Flow rate,

Temp.

West-Gaeke

Method using

Spectrophoto

mer

2

Water Surface Water 1. Pond water of

Jamuria

2. Pond Water

of Nanda

3. Pond water of

Ikra

Twice in a year

1. Pre-Monsoon

2. Post-Monsson

Heavy Metals will be

monitored Once in a

month.

Grab

Sample

Parameters as per Class"C"

IS:2296

3

Ground Water 1.Tubewell of

Ikra

2.Tubewell of

Jadudenga

3. Tubewell of

Mondalpur

Twice in a year

1. Pre-Monsoon

2. Post-Monsson

Heavy Metals will be

monitored Once in a

month.

Grab

Sample

Parameters as per Class"C"

IS:10500

4

ETP

Inside plant Once in a Month

Grab

Sample

pH, COD,

TSS,Oil &

Grease, BOD

5

STP

Inside plant Once in a Month

Grab

Sample

pH, COD,

TSS,Oil &

Grease, BOD

6 Noise Noise

1. Along the

boundary wall

2. Dhasna

3.Ikra

4. Bijaynagar Once in 6 Months

8 hrs

continuous

with 1 hr

interval

1.Lday

2. Lnight

3. Ldn

7

Occupati

onal

Health

1. Workers in

the plant Once in a year

Monitoring for green belt survival rate weekly twice.

Monitoring of accidents and their prevention.

Continual training program to employee and contractors.




6.6 BUDGETORY PROVISIONS FOR EMP

Gen.Tor-7(xi) Total Capital Cost And Recurring Cost/Annum For Environmental

Pollution Control Measures.

ToR 8(iv)Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of

all contract and casual workers.

The company will invest 4.0 Crore (about 4 % of expansion project cost) as capital

investment towards implementation of Environmental Management Plan. The Annual

recurring cost will be about 40 lakhs details are as follows.

Investment towards EMP Implementation & its yearly maintenance is given in Table 6.2

Table 6.2 Investment towards EMP, Implementation & its yearly

maintenance

Category

Capital Cost

(INR lakh)

Recurring Cost

(INR Lakh)

Air pollution Equipments 175 17.5

Water Pollution Control Machinery & Construction

50 5

Rainwater Harvesting 44 4.4

Occupational Health 9 1

Green Belt Development 42 4.2

Environmental Monitoring 10 1

Solid Waste management 28 2.8

Safety & Disaster Management 42 4.2

EMS & Capacity Development 01 0.1

Total 400 40.2

Sl. No

Unit Pollutant Quantity kg/day

Generated

Control device

Post control Quantity

kg/day

Cost in lakh

1 1x350 TPD DRI

SPM,CO & SO2

1,22,500 SPM

1no ABC, WHRB ,ESP,

ID fan & high stack

122 (99.9% efficiency)

125(WHRB)

2 2x20T IF SPM 95,410 Bag filter, ID fan & Stack

95 45

Total 170

Additional ToR. 7 plan for the implementation of the recommendations made

for the steel plants in the CREP guidelines




All the charter on corporate responsibility for environmental protection (CREP)

recommendations for integrated steel project will be implemented & followed strictly

which has been stated in table below.

Table 6.3 CREP compliance

Sl.

No. CREP Conditions Compliance

1 Technology The organization will adopt the latest state of the art

technology with in-built pollution control measures

2 Fugitive emissions reduction

in SMS

Dedusting of Cast house at tap holes, runners, skimmers

ladle and charging points, swivel hood, Fume Extraction

Chamber followed by adequate capacity bag filtration

will control emission within the norms. RMHS-Dust

extraction &suppression using water sprinklers, Dry Fog

in closed conveyors & Bag filters

3

Direct inject of reducing

agents in MBF. Energy

recovery of top BF gas.

MBF has not been installed and there is no provision for

installation.

4

To operate pollution control

equipment efficiently and to

keep proper record of run

hours, failure time and

efficiency with immediate

effect. Compliance report in

this regard be submitted to

CPCB/SPCB every three

months

Energy meter has been proposed to be installed in ESPs

to keep record of running hours and reported to SPCB,

WB. Non-conformance to be reported to Board of

Directors.ESP will control dust emission.

5

To reduce specific water

consumption to 5 m3/t for

long products and 8 m3/t for

flat products

Unit proposes production of flat product and water

consumption is proposed with 6,388 m3/day water

excluding power plant consumption but including

domestic, coke oven etc. hence it is coming to about 1.7

m3/t, there is no provision of rolling mill at present to

produce long or flats.

6

Reduction Green House

Gases by Reduction in power

consumption, Use of

byproducts gases for power

generation. Promotion of

Energy Optimization

technology including energy/

audit.

Power recovery from DRI kiln flue gas, use of Variable

frequency Drive ID fans, Silicon-controlled rectifier,

capacitor Bank, hot metal charging in LF/IF, selection of

medium frequency coreless IFs and minimization of air

consumption in FBCs are the power saving steps

suggested for the unit

7 Installation of Continuous

stack monitoring system

Continuous stack monitoring system to be implemented

and regular ambient air monitoring will be done as per

the guidelines.

8 L C A

Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) is a decision cum

management tool which provides information on the

environmental effects of various products and processes




so as to arrive at necessary corrective measures to

make the entire process efficient with optimal utilization

of resources and minimal wastes generation. Steps to be

taken to minimize pollution from receiving ore from

mines to utilization of end product and in every

intermediate stages.

9 Solid Waste /Hazardous

Waste Management

There will be generation of fly ash, bottom ash, IF slag,

from the plant processes. Fly ash will be fully utilized in

brick making by external manufacturing agencies, and

fly ash in cement plants and. Small amount of non-

process hazardous waste like used oil and exhausted

batteries shall be handed over to authorized resources.

10 Good house keeping

Green belt along boundary and tree plantation by the

side of internal roads, material handling area, regular

water sprinkling on roads and removal of MSW on

regular basis will help in good housekeeping. Again,

scheduled preventive maintenance and regular

lubrication of moving machineries will losses due to

break down and help in good house keeping and thereby

prevent accidents. M/s GFL is a polythene free Plant.




CHAPTER 7

ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 RISK ASSESSMENT & DISASTER MANAGEMENT:

M/s GaganFerrotech Limited is running its project on 18.85 ha of land at-Ikra, Jamuria

Industrial Estate in Paschim Burdwan district of WB. The company has been granted prior EC for production of 0.4 MTPA finished steel.

The company is proposing its modification and expansion to reduce its production

capacity from 0.4 MTPA to 0.3 MTPA steel, generate 24 MW power from waste heat recovery and AFBC completely utilizing char from DRI Kilns.

After modification, the facilities will be as follows:

1. 4x100TPD&1x350 TPD DRI Kilns

2. 5x20 T IF

3. 2x9 MVA SAF

4. 1x30 T AOD

5. 2x3 strand CCM

6. 16 MW WHRB Power Plant&8 MW AFBC power Plant

7. Rolling Mill 1000 TPD

The process for production of above products carries a pool of Hazards & Risk, which can

cause major Accidents if full proof action will not be taken within the purview of a full

proof system. The Hazards may convert to risks due to the following major actions

1. due to leakage of toxic gases and red hot metal

2. one month‟s fuel stock at all the time of a year.

3. Coal will be stocked under shed

4. LDO in 1200 KL above ground tank; these are combustible and Fire/ pool fire is

anticipated from these materials

5. Handling of Acid & Alkali

6. Release / leakages of steam

7. Electrocution

8. Explosion of Boilers etc

The proposed steel plant would be designed and engineered with all possible safety

measures and standard code of practices of engineering. In spite of this, there may be

some design deficiency or due to operation and maintenance fault which may lead to

accidental events causing damage to the life and property. This chapter presents an

overview of both environmental & physical risks associated with the production facilities,

suggested remedial measures and a model outline of the emergency preparedness plan.

7.2 OBJECTIVES

The objectives of environmental risk assessment are governed by the following, which

excludes natural calamities:

To identify the potential hazardous areas so that necessary design safety

measures can be adopted to minimize the probability of accidental events.

To identify the potential areas of environmental disaster which can be prevented

by proper design of the installations and its controlled operation




To manage the emergency situation or a disastrous event, if any, from the plant

operation.

Managing a disastrous event will obviously require prompt action by the operators and

the crisis management personnel using all their available resources like alerting the

people and other plant personnel remaining inside, deployment of firefighting equipment,

operation of emergency shut off valves, opening of the escape doors, rescue etc.

Minimizing the immediate consequences of a hazardous event include cordoning off,

evacuation, medical assistance and giving correct information to the families of the

affected persons and local public for avoiding rumors and panic.

Lastly, an expert committee is required to probe the cause of such events and the losses

encountered and suggest remedial measures for implementation so that in future such

events or similar events do not recur.

7.3 DEFINITION OF HAZARD & RISK

The following terms related to environmental risks are defined before reviewing the

environmental risks:

Harm Damage to the person, property or environment.

Hazard Something with the potential to cause harm; this could

be a Characteristic of material being processed or

malfunctioning of the equipment. An environmental

hazard is thus going to be a set of

circumstances, which leads to the direct or indirect

degradation of environment and damage to the life and

property.

Risk The probability of the harm or likelihood of harmful

occurrence being released and its severity.

Environmental risk is a measure of the potential threat

to the environment, life and property.

Consequence: Effect due to occurrence of the event, which may

endanger the Environment permanently or temporarily

and, or, loss of life and property.

Environmental

Disaster:

The consequence is so severe that it can extensively

damage a one or all the four components of the

environment, namely, (i) Physico-chemical, (ii)

biological, (iii) human and (iv) aesthetics.

7.4 IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS

The hazards are attributable due to raw materials and chemicals used in steel making

and the plant operation. A list of major raw materials used in the plant and the process

units with their hazard potential is presented in Table below.

Table 7.1 Hazard Identification of the Proposed Steel Plant




Sl.

No.

Group Item Hazard

Potential

Remarks

I Raw materials

and products

Iron ore

Coal

Other fluxing minerals

Product steel

Acids/Alkalis

Lube oil

None

Moderate

None

None

Major

Moderate

-

Fire

-

-

Bio corrosive

Flammable

II Processing

DRI Kilns Dust

DRI off gas

Moderate

None

Environmental Pollution

-

Steel making in

IF

Fume

Liquid steel

Molten slag

None

Major

Major

Personnel injury & fire

Personnel injury

Captive power

plant

Fly ash

Acid and alkali

Moderate

Major

Environmental Pollution

Highly corrosive & Personal

injury

High pressure

Boilers

Leakage of steam at

very high temperature

Venting of High

pressure steam

Major Fatal accident

Noise pollution

Damage of adjacent

equipments

III Utilities

Fuel & gas

Distribution

Oil &Gas leaks Major

Fire and CO

Pollution

Electric power

Supply

Short circuit

High voltage shock

Major

Fire

Fatal accident

From the Table, it may be observed that the major on-site emergency situation may

occur from the organic coal chemicals storage and handling, fuel gas handling, molten

metal and slag handling, acids and alkali storage and handling and electrical short-

circuit. The off-site environmental disaster may occur if large-scale fire and explosion

occurs, the effect of which extends beyond the plant boundary. The off-site

environmental disaster may occur due to significant environmental degradation for a

sustained period. Off-site environmental disaster not envisaged for this integrated steel

plant. However pool fires from fuel oil storage tanks are not ruled out, and needs

addressable.

7.5 RISK EVALUATION

From environmental hazards point of view for the raw materials and consumable

chemicals and processing of the same in various production units, relative risk potential

analysis is made on the following three factors:

Likelihood of occurrence

Likelihood of detection

Severity of consequences

Each of these factors is graded and compiled to determine the risk potential. The factors

governing the determination of relative risk potentials are presented in the Table 7-2.

Table 7.2 – Determination of Risk Potential




Likely hood of

occurrence Likelihood of detection

Severity of

consequences

Criteria (A) Rank Criteria (B) Rank Criteria (C) Rank

Very High 5 Very High 1 None 2

High 4 High 2 Minor 4

Moderate 3 Moderate 3 Low 6

Low 2 Low 4 Moderate 8

Very low 1 Very low 5 High 10

RISK POTENTIAL (RP) = (A+B) X C

Based on the above stated criteria for assessing the risk, each probable event has been

evaluated by addressing several questions on the probability of event occurrence in the

view of the in-built design features detection response, operational practice and its likely

consequence. A summarized list of environmental risk potential for the likely events is

presented in Table below

This evaluation has been done with the presumption of common events as observed

from the past experience in the operation of an integrated iron and steel plant and best

practicable designs for the proposed project. The present risk potential evaluation is

primarily based on human errors or faulty operation or failure of the control systems.

Table7.3: Environmental Risk Potential Evaluation

Rank

Sl

N

o.

Event Likelihood

of

Occurrence

Likelihood

of

detection

Severity

of

Conseque

nce

Risk

Potential

1 Fire at the coal Stockyard Very low (1) High (2) High (10) 30

2 Fuel gas leaks from the

Pipeline/valves

High (4) Low (4) High (10) 80

3 Splashing of molten Metal and

slag

Very low (1) Very high

(1)

High (10) 20

4 Uncontrolled dust

emissions/failure of Emission

control

High (4) Moderate

(3)

Moderate

(8)

56

5 Release of untreated Waste

water

Low (2) Very low

(1)

High (10) 30

6 Leakage of acids/Alkalis Low (2) Very low

(5)

Moderate

(8)

56

7 Failure of gas Cleaning

Plant/Fume Extraction

Moderate (3) Moderate

(3)

Moderate

(8)

48

8 Unsafe disposal of oily Wastes of

Rolling Mills

High (4) Low (4) Moderate

(8)

64

9 Wet scrubbers Running dry Low (2) Moderate

(3)

High (10) 50

10 Oil wastes/ oil sludge Handling Low (2) High (2) Moderate

(8)

32




From the table 7.3, it appears that some events carry risk potential above 50. These

events will be considered as risk prone hazardous events and need adequate safe design

operation and maintenance in order to reduce the risk.

7.5.1 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION & RISK ASSESSMENT OF

ENVIRONMENTAL& PHYSICAL HAZARDS

ToR 3 (ix) Hazard Identification and details of proposed safety measures




Table 7.4 Hazard Identification & Risk Assessment

ACTIVITY CREATING HAZARD

Likelihood of occurrence

(A)

RANK Likelihood of detection (B)

RANK Severity of consequence ( C )

RANK Risk potential= (A+B)XC

Preventive Measures

DRI

1 Cleaning of cooler

transfer chute

HIGH 4 VERY LOW 5 MODERATE 8 72 Safety rope and PPE

to be used

2 cleaning of dust settling chamber

HIGH 4 VERY LOW 5 MODERATE 8 72 Use of PPE like safety shoes, helmets, gloves, aprons and goggles

SMS

1 Fall of material due to

Excess N2 purging

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 HIGH 10 70 Purging to be done

with calculated amount of N2

2 Burn injury due to

overflow of hot material

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 HIGH 10 70 Use of PPE like safety

shoes, helmets, gloves, aprons and

goggles

3 Burn injury due to broken of wire rope

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 HIGH 10 70 Cordening of area with hooter arrangement during

transportation

4 Fall of ladle due to broken of hanger

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 HIGH 10 70 Cordening of area with hooter

arrangement during transportation

5 Slip and fall due to accumulation of sponge iron on shop floor

MODERATE 3 MODERATE 3 LOW 6 36 Use of PPE like safety shoes, helmets, gloves, aprons and goggles




6 Falling of scrap due to mishandling of scrap during charging of scrap to SMS

MODERATE 3 MODERATE 3 MODERATE 8 48 Use of helmets and safety shoes

7 SLIPING OF PERSONS DUE TO Spillage of material on the shop floor during charging of raw material

through mobile equipment

MODERATE 3 MODERATE 3 MODERATE 8 48 Use of PPE like safety shoes, helmets, gloves, aprons and goggles

8 Electrical Flashing / shock during Air cleaning of furnace capacitors and switch

gear

LOW 2 LOW 4 HIGH 10 60 Electrical isolation, tagging, spot earthing

9 Electrical Shock during Checking of Capacitor bank

VERY LOW 1 MODERATE 3 MODERATE 8 32 Rubber hand gloves and insulator tools

11 Occurrence of static

electricity/electric spark in the Mill Cellar Room

VERY LOW 1 VERY LOW 5 HIGH 10 60 Proper earthing to be

ensured

12 Splashing of molten metal and slag

Low 2 VERY HIGH 1 HIGH 10 30 Face shield, helmet, asbestos appron

Rolling Mill

1 Fall of material during

hot slab handling

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 HIGH 10 70 Sling to be checked

from time to time, Use of PPE

2 BODY PART in between slab/chain

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 MODERATE 8 56 Use of Hand gloves, Stopper switch at short intervals




3 Fire due to Electric short circuit during Firing with Tar

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 LOW 6 42 Use of MCB

4 Back firing during Firing with Producer gas

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 LOW 6 42 Use of Face shield

5 Fall of Plate, Cutting set, Fall on person during Plate/Cobble Cutting

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 LOW 6 42 Use of helmet

6 Collision of hot coil strips during Shifting of Coil

LOW 2 very low 5 LOW 6 42 To be mechanically handled

7 Falling of objects from top

MODERATE 3 VERY LOW 5 MODERATE 8 64 Use of helmet & Safety Shoe

8 Un safe disposal of oily wastes of Rolling Mills

High 4 Low 4 Moderate 8 64 To be collected in drums and capped

CPP

1 Furnace oil transfer from tanker to storage tank

LOW 2 HIGH 2 MODERATE 8 32 To be transferred Mechanically and Use of PPE

1.Slip & Fall

2. Fire

2 Operation of Boiler LOW 2 LOW 4 HIGH 10 60 Periodic NDT to know the thickness of pipe and replacement with thinned down pipes. Interlocking of ID fan

running with LDO firing.

1.EXPLOSION

2.TUBE LEAKAGE

3. BACKFIRE

3 Oil leakage from bearings & oil line on

main steam line

LOW 2 LOW 4 LOW 6 36 Shrouding of evaporator coil




4 Chemical handling MODERATE 3 LOW 4 MODERATE 8 56 Use of PPE like safety shoes, helmets, gloves, aprons and goggles

1. ACID / ALKALI SPILLAGE

5 Generation of dust

during ash unloading on trucks

VERY HIGH 5 VERY HIGH 1 LOW 6 36 Use of Dusk Mask

6 Fall from height while

working in the height

LOW 2 LOW 4 HIGH 10 60 Use of safety belt

7 Oil wastes/oil sludge

handling

Low 2 High 2 Mode rate 8 32 Use of PPE like safety

shoes, helmets, gloves, aprons and goggles

8 Collapsing of acid/ alkali storage tanks

Very low 1 High 2 High 10 30 Use of vacuum breaker

9 Leakages of steam

line

LOW 2 HIGH 2 MODERATE 8 32 NDT of steam line at regular intervals

specially at bends and thermal insulation of pipeline

EIA/EMP Report of M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd Integrated steel modification project, At-

Jamuria Industrial Estate, P.O-Ikra, Dist- Paschim-Burdwan, West Bengal


The major on-site emergency situation may occur from the coal storage and handling,

molten metal and slag handling, acids and alkali storage and handling and electrical

short-circuits. There will be no off-site risk. The project is located in an industrial area

away from human habitation, school, hospital, jail, etc (within 1 km area of the site). All

plant and equipment machinery will be procured from reputed vendors. Proper safety

equipment will be provided to the workers and proper standard operating procedure will


7.6 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

Tor-7(xiii) Onsite And Offsite Disaster Preparedness And Emergency

Management Plan Including Risk Assessment And Damage Control.

Manpower

Table 7.5 Manpower to be in position

Sl. No Shift Period Manpower available

1 A 6 AM to 2 PM 60

2 B 2 PM to 10 PM 60

3 C 10 PM to 6AM 60

4 O Off duty 30

4 General shift 9AM-1PM, 2PM -6 PM 40 (Sunday off)

Total 250

From the manpower deployment table, it can be seen that at any point of time in general

shift hours 40 people will be available in plant, and 210 people in shift basis. More over

some contract labors and security guards will be available in the plant. Therefore,

planning has to be made for safety of these people during any onsite disaster.

In an integrated steel plant like this one, it is imperative that accidents occurring due to

unforeseen acts and events will not affect the surrounding areas. Therefore, an onsite

emergency plan for prevention and mitigations of accidents will be enough to cater for

unforeseen acts and events that may occur.

Emergency situations: The following are the situations where we can face an

emergency and disaster may take place.

a. Fire

b. Explosion

c. Oil Spillage

d. Toxic release (gases & chemicals)

e. Electrocution

f. Structure/building collapse

g. Flood/cyclone/earth quake/aggression/sabotage etc.




Area/Plant where different types of emergency situation can start:

a) Furnace area

Turbine hall Explosion

Boilers

b) Oil storages

Conveyors Pool Fire & Fire

Coal

c) LPG storage ----- Fire & Vapor Cloud Explosion

d) Electrical rooms

Transformer area Fire & Electrocution

Cable tunnel

e) Water Treatment Plant (DM Plant) Release of highly toxic gas - Chlorine

f) Power Plant (12 MW) ----- (DM Plant) Power Plant (12 mw)

Spillage Of Acid & Alkali &Steam leakage

7.7 IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS:

Hazard is in fact the characteristics of a system/plant/storage that presents potential for

an accident and risk is the probability of occurrence of hazard. Hence hazard

identification is of prime significance for the quantification of risk and for cost-effective

control of accidents in any industrial installation. Various techniques of predictive hazard

evaluation and quantitative risk analysis suggest that identification of hazard has very

important role in estimation of probability of an undesired event and its consequences on

the basis of risk quantification in terms of damage to personnel, property and

environment.

Hazards are mostly manifested in the form of toxic release. Each anticipated hazard

scenario associated in the unit is described along with its assessment of impact on plant

and locality in the following table:

Table 7.6 Hazard Identification in various facilities

Sl.

No.

Area / Activity Hazard Hazard

Potential

Impact

1 Storage and Handling

of High Speed Diesel

(HSD)

Pool Fire / Fireball

may occur in case of

direct contact with

flame

Medium Fire may propagate and

spread over to other

areas

2 Storage and handling

of LPG

Explosion may occur

in case of leakage of

Major Fire may propagate and

spread over to nearby




gas with contact with

fire

areas

3 Electrical Power

supply and

distribution in

Transformer yard and

motor control centre

Fire and

electrocution may

occur

Medium Fire may propagate to

other areas

7.7.1 IDENTIFICATION OF MOST CREDIBLE HAZARD SCENARIOS

The entire anticipated hazard scenarios associated with the unit are critically analyzed

and the followings are considered as credible scenarios:

Credible Scenario – A: Pool Fire in High Speed Diesel Storage Tank.

Credible Scenario – B: Leakage of LPG gas from cylinder.

Credible Scenario – C: Leakage of oil from Storage Tank.

Credible Scenario – A: Pool Fire in High Speed Diesel Tank.

As there is other nearby establishments, the fire from HSD tank can easily spread

causing extensive damage to the materials. However the damage due to fire will be

confined to a particular area only.

On putting the basis of above consideration the pool fire due to fire hazard in the HSD

storage tank is not considered as most but first degree credible scenario. It can be

controlled by the available installations and facilities.

Credible Scenario – B: Leakage of LPG gas from cylinder.

Either of these three can create most credible scenario if not attended immediately.

However this can be controlled by isolation of the line from the system and will not lead

to most credible scenario.

This can be taken as second degree credible scenario.

Credible Scenario – C: Leakage of LPG from Storage Tank.

Chance of leakage of LPG from the storage tank is very remote. If happens and not

attended in time there will be vapor cloud explosion and it will be a most credible

scenario.

EMERGENCY COMMAND STRUCTURE

Works Main Controller (WMC)

1. Mr. Niranjan Goursaria– (President) 2. Mr. Sanjay Ghosh – (CEO)




Note :

WMC: SL No. 2 shall play the role of WMC in the absence of SL No. 1; otherwise he will assist SL

No.1.

SIC : SL No. 2 shall play the role of SIC in the absence of SL No. 1; otherwise he will assist SL No.1.

CTL : SL No. 2 shall play the role of CTL in the absence of SL No. 1; otherwise he will assist CTL.

ATL : SL No. 2 shall play the role of ATL in the absence of SL No. 1; otherwise he will assist ATL.

RTL : SL No. 2 shall play the role of RTL in the absence of SL No. 1; otherwise he will assist RTL.

Site Incident Controller (SIC)

1. Mr. R.B. Ojha (Factory Manager) 2. Mr. Dilip Sarkar (A.O.)

Combat Team Leader (CTL)

1. Mr. Supriya Das (HOD –DRI Mech.)

2. Mr. Dipak Samanta (GM -CPP)

Rescue Team Leader (RTL)

1. Mr. ArunavaSaha (Safety

Officer)

2. Mr. Hemanth Singh(HOD-

Security)

Auxiliary Team Leader (ATL)

1. Mr. U.S. Banerjee –(Head -HR, IR& Admin)

2. Mr. S.P. Paul (Safety

Advisor)

Members

1. Mr. Santosh Sharma – (GM –A

& C)

2. Mr. Sujoy Ghatak (Civil

Engineer)

3. Mr. Byasdev Chatterjee

(Stores

Incharge –SMS)

Members

1. Mr. Chandrika Viswakarma (Foreman -RMD)

2. Mr. D.D. Singh, (HOD Elect/RMD)

3. Mr. Milan Mondal (HOD -Despatch)

Members

1. Mr. S.R. Dhakad (HOD -SMS)

2. Mr. K.P. Rao (DRI -Process)

3. Mr. Rabi Patra ( DRI -

Mech.)




7.8 SILENT HOUR COMMAND STRUCTURE

The Senior Officers/ Key Persons of the plant remain during day time i.e. 8am to

8 pm. Hence the timing of 8pm to 8am is considered as silent hour that to 10pm

to 6am is the crucial time. Still each and every unit/section of the plant, which is

in operation like RMD, Coal Washer, DRI Kilns, Power Plants, Utilities, SMS, CHP

etc. with their process, maintenance and electrical people, is headed by shift in

charge in the rank of Officer, Engineer or Sr. Engineer or Asst. Manager, who

shall be responsible for handling the emergency. The other supporting/services

and emergency sections like Fire Service, Ambulance, Security, Personnel, Water

Supply, Transport departments etc. are also running for 24 hours shift wise with

shift in charge and crew to handle emergency during the silent hour till main

command personnel arrive. However, most of the key persons of the main

command structure reside in the residential complex which is 200 mtrs. away

from the main plant, with vehicles.

The command structure of the silent hour shall be same as during normal hour,

however, during the silent hour, the operation Shift-in charge of the concerned

area where the fire or leakage of gas has taken place, shall act as CTL-in –

charge, till the arrival of CTL.

Since WMC, SIC, CTL, RTL & ATL may not be available inside the plant; they shall

be informed by the CTL-in-charge either by telephone or by sending special

messengers to their residences.

On receiving the information WMC, SIC, CTL, RTL & ATL shall reach the site

immediately & simultaneously take actions to ensure the presence of their

respective team members.

Therefore the action plan as well as the role of key person shall be same as the

normal hour execution of command structure.

7.9 ROLE OF KEY PERSONS

7.9.1 WORKS MAIN CONTROLLER:

He is the Executive Director at the works and is generally available in the factory except

on tour. On emergency, he can reach work site at any odd hour within 20 minutes time.

In his absence, Sr. Vice President shall take up his charge as Works Main Controller

(WMC).

On being informed of an incident, he has to:

Rush to the emergency Site, collect all information from SIC.

Decide if emergency is to be declared and advise Site incident Controller (SIC)

accordingly and reach Emergency Control Room (ECR).

Advise Rescue Team Leader (RTL)/ Security Gate to blow the siren with

appropriate code for declaration of emergency.

Two minutes with a pause of five seconds for 3 times for fire hazard.

Three minutes with pause of five seconds for 5 times for fire incident.

Advice (Auxiliary Team Leader) ATL for communication to statutory authorities

and for mutual aid as required.

Through (Auxiliary Team Leader) ATL ensure constant communication to

statutory authorities and to mutual aid partners as required.




Maintain continuous communication with Site Incident Controller (SIC) to

review the situation and assess the possible course of action for emergency

operations.

To declare normalcy at the end of operation and advise Rescue team leader

(RTL)/security Gate to blow “all clear siren” [for 1 minute continuously].

Ensure the record keeping of emergency operations chronologically.

7.9.2 SITE INCIDENT CONTROLLER:

He is available at the factory or in the colony near by at any point of time and on being

informed about an accident, he has to:

Intimate the works main Controller (WMC) and proceed to the emergency site.

Take the necessary instruction from Combat Team Leader (CTL), assess the

situation and call Rescue Team Leader (RTL) and Auxiliary Team Leader (ATL).

Inform Works Main Controller (WMC) regarding the situation.

Take necessary steps and provide guidance to Combat Team, Rescue Team,

and Auxiliary Team Leaders to mitigate the emergency situation.

Examine for major emergency shut down operation activities, decide safe

escape route and announce for evacuation to Assembly Point.

Inform Works Main Controller (WMC) about the status of the situation at

regular intervals.

7.9.3 COMBAT TEAM LEADER

He is the leader to attend to the emergency and is available in the factory or in the

colony at any instant.

On being informed about an accident, he has to:

Immediately rush to the site and lead the team to control the situation.

Inform Site incident controller (SIC) about the incident and request him to

rush to the spot.

Instruct the rescue Team leader (RTL) for fire fighting and medical assistance.

Co-ordinate the activities of team members and combat the emergency, so as

to eliminate the route cause of the hazard.

Shut-down the plant if necessary to take up repair measures.

To arrest the leakage and spillage from various equipments, shut down the

concerned equipments.

Take necessary action to remove unwanted persons from the site of the

incident.

Keep informed about the developments to Site incident Controller (SIC).

7.9.4 RESCUE TEAM LEADER

He is the person who conducts rescue operations and should be available at any instant.

On receiving the information about the incident he has to:

Rush to site of emergency through safe route.




Ensure presence of all his team members, availability of fire fighting facilities

and take necessary action to arrest the fires.

Arrange for safe escape of entrapped persons.

Make necessary arrangements to send the affected persons for immediately

medical attention through the medical officer.

Search for the missing persons on the basis of role call taken by Auxiliary

team leader (ATL).

Give the feedback to the site incident controller (SIC) about the

developments.

7.9.5 AUXILIARY TEAM LEADER

He is the communication manager for the crisis management. On being informed of the

emergency, he should proceed to Emergency Control Room (ECR) and:

Keep in constant touch with works main controller (WMC) and Site Incident

Controller (SIC).

Inform the Statutory Authorities and District Administration.

Communicate to mutual Aid Partners, Fire service stations at Raniganj.

Send communications to nearest Hospital for rendering services.

Inform the relatives of causalities and send them to their residence or

hospital.

Take care of visit of the authorities to the Emergency site.

Give feed back to work main controller (WMC) about the status with respect

to his areas of activities.

7.10. ACTION PLAN FOR ON-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN

STEP

NO

INITIATOR ACTION TO TAKE

1. The person

noticing the

emergency

Inform the Security Gate, Combat team leader and the concerned

Shift-in –charge immediately.

2. Combat team

Leader (CTL)

Inform site incident Controller (SIC) and rush to spot and organize

his team.

Take charge of the situation, arrange for fire fighting and medical

first-aid available at site.

To start combating, shut-down equipments, arrest the fire.

3. Site Incident

Controller (SIC)

Inform works main controller (WMC) and rush to emergency site.

Discuss with Combat Team Leader (CTL), assesses the situation and

call the Rescue Team Leader (RTL) & Auxiliary Team Leader (ATL).

Organize the Rescue Team and Auxiliary Team and send the rescue

Team to site.

Arrange to evacuate the unwanted persons and call for additional

help.

Pass information to the works main controller (WMC) periodically

about the position at site.




4. Works main

Controller

(WMC)

Rush to emergency site and observe the ongoing activities.

Take stock of the situation in consultation with the SIC.

Move to Emergency Control Room.

Take decision on declaration of emergency.

Advise Auxiliary Team Leader to inform the statutory authorities and

seek help of mutual aid from partners as required.

Decide on declaration of cessation of emergency.

Ensure that the emergency operations are recorded chronologically.

5. Rescue Team

Leader

(RTL)

Consult with Site incident controller (SIC) and organize his team

with amenities to arrest fire fighting and medical treatment.

Rush to Emergency Site through safe route along with the team

members.

Arrange to set off the fire by fire fighting equipments and hydrant

points to arrest the fire or to evacuate the area.

Shift the injured persons to hospital by ambulance after providing

necessary first aid.

To inform the auxiliary team Leader for necessary help from mutual

aid Partners.

6. Auxiliary Team

Leader (ATL)

On being directed by works main Controller (WMC) inform about the

emergency to statutory authorities.

Seek help of Mutual Aid partners and Coordinate with Mutual Aid

partners to render their services.

Arrange to inform the relatives of casualties.

Take care of visit of the authorities to the Emergency site.

7. Team members Each of the team members should follow the instruction of

concerned team leader to mitigate the emergency.

7.11 ACTIVATION & CLOSING PROCEDURE FOR ON-SITE

EMERGENCY

The person noticing the incident of fire or leakage of gas, shall inform about the location

& nature of incident to Fire Station, Safety, Security, Medical, and concerned Shift-in-

charge. The shift-in-charge of the affected unit shall inform Combat Team Leader and

other required/emergency team depending on the gravity of the situation.

Combat team Leader (CTL) shall inform site incident controller (SIC) and shall

rush to the site immediately. He shall arrange for fire fighting and first aid

available at site. He shall arrange to take necessary steps to eliminate the root

cause of fire.

Site incident controller (SIC) on getting information shall inform the WMC and

reach the site at the earliest. He shall take over the charge and shall direct

Rescue Team Leader (RTL)) to carry out rescue operations including fire fighting

and medical attention. Site incident controller (SIC) shall co-ordinate with Combat

team leader (CTL) to eliminate the root cause of fire.

Work main controller (WMC), on arrival at site shall take stock of the situation

from site incident controller (SIC) and then rush to emergency control room




(ECR) to declare emergency on the basis of assessment made by (Site incident

controller (SIC). He shall give direction to the security gate/ (Rescue team

Leader) RTL to activate siren.

Thirty seconds with a pause of five seconds, for 2 times, for major fire incident.

One minute with a pause of five seconds, for 3 times, for gas leakage. May be

repeated again depending on the situation.

No siren for small fire or any other emergency situation.

- Rescue Team Leader (RTL) shall mobilize fire fighting and medical resources to

site and shall assist (Site incident Controller) SIC.

- Auxiliary Team Leader (ATL) shall take charge of Emergency Control Room

(ECR), shall ensure smooth operation of ECR and shall inform relatives of

casualties. Informs mutual Aid partners and ensures their arrival at site if

required.

- Auxiliary Team Leader (ATL) informs statutory authorities and district

administration regarding emergency suitably and coordinates their visit at site.

- Works main controller (WMC) coordinates and keeps the track of all the

activities at site and off the site and arranges the recording of the activities in a

chronological manner for review of the On-site Emergency Plan.

7.12 DUTIES OF SUPERVISORS AND MANAGERS:

Affected Units: The role of Supervisors and Managers of the affected unit is

crucial and an act in time will save the a lot, the situation will not aggravate.

a) Make all your people alert so that noticing of the situation should be quick and

prompt. Information should come to them very soon.

b) Act like a leader, inform all concerned, seniors, emergency sections and

simultaneously take action to control the situation.

c) Coordinate among process, electrical, mechanical and other sections of your unit.

d) Non required employees/workers should be guided to assemble at the assembly

points. Tell them not to be panic and about the situation.

e) Take decision talking to seniors whether the above personnel should gather at the

unit assembly points or to go to the Emergency Assembly Points or to go out of

the plant.

f) See the wind direction in case of fire. Always move in the opposite direction of

the wind.

g) In case of extreme emergency where we have to move to the emergency

assembly points or out of the plant, there are different gates in different

direction. Tell your people about the gates.

h) Help the emergency teams for mitigation of the situation.

Un-affected Units: Supervisors and Managers of the un-affected units should

act like coordinators in this situation.

a) Keep in mind that your section/unit is not affected. So be calm and tell your

people to be calm and not to be panic.




b) Collect the exact situation in the affected unit and tell your people accordingly.

c) Take decisions whether to assemble at your assembly points or to assemble at

emergency assembly point or to go out of the plant.

d) See the points mentioned in the duties of affected units and do accordingly.

e) Go to the affected unit; help them and the emergency team. Do not do any act in

haste which will create problems to the team.

7.13 DUTIES OF WORKERS/EMPLOYEES IN GENERAL (PUBLIC)

(Of both affected units and un-affected units)

a) If you see any abnormal situation in your area, inform your

superiors/supervisors/engineers.

b) Understand the situation and its gravity and act accordingly, do not be panic.

c) If it is a fire, assemble in the assembly point. Help Fire Service people to fight the

fire. But do not do any work of your own, this may aggravate the situation.

d) If it is fire, go to the assembly point of your unit, then to the emergency

assembly point.

e) Hear from your seniors and act accordingly.

f) If you hear emergency siren or announcement through PA system, follow the

direction. Move to the marked place or out of the plant, to a safer place.

g) Remember the direction of the wind, assembly points and plant gates. The

direction of the wind can be known from the wind socks fitted at different

locations or by dropping dust/sand from a height.

h) If your unit is not affected, hear from your engineers/managers and decide the

action.

7.14 ASSEMBLY POINTS/GATES:

General - All department heads are requested to identify at least two assemblypoints at

two opposite directions of their unit where people in case of emergency should assemble.

Kindly mark those with sign boards. They will assemble there and wait for the Heads

about their future course of actions i.e. to assemble there or to go and assemble at the

emergency assembly points or to move out of the plant through a particular gate. These

local assembly points are for Fire or at the initial stage but not for a major disaster like.

Specific – There are two emergency assembly points identified and marked i.e. one is at

the area covering Main Gate, and the second one is at power plant, People have to

assemble here in case of extreme emergency .

Gates – We have 2 gates namely Back Gate & Main Gate Main Gate which can be

opened in case of emergency, people to move out in different directions. All should be

aware of this.

7.15 FACILITIES AVAILABLE TO COMBAT

Fire Hydrant system (Under Proposed)

Fire Fighting Facilities:

Fire Station – 2 Fires Officers

– Crew Members - 10 nos. in each shift

Fire Tenders- 2 (1- Foam Tender, 1- Water Tender).

Portable Pumps – 2 nos.

Required fire fighting & Rescue Equipments.

Fire Extinguishers




Required types of fire extinguishers have been provided at differentlocations of

the plant. Types & number of fire extinguishers provided in different locations.

Fire Buckets

Fire buckets filled with dry sand are provided in different locations of the plant.

Siren

Company has siren/hooter arrangement which can be activated manually during fire

related/ emergency.

Communication

Public address system, mobile phones and telephone is available for effective

communication inside the plant. Telephone directory is available in the entire

department.

Ambulance

Ambulance with all facility round the clock is available. Medical and paramedical staff is

available round the clock.

Safety – Qualified, trained and experienced safety officers are there manned in shifts.

Security – Security officers and ranks are doing duties for 24 hours who will assist in

handling emergency.

Transport – Number of different types of vehicles, cranes and equipments with

operators are available.

Others – Other depts. and sections like mechanical, electrical, civil, utilities (water, air,

oil, fuel, DG, etc.), P&A, stores, purchase, accounts, etc. are also available anytime for

the emergency.

LIFE SAVING EQUIPMENT INSTALLED/USED IN DIFFERENT UNITS

Sl.

No.

Name of the

Plant Unit

Life saving equipment installed or used

1. DRI Kilns safety showers

2. Furnace safety showers

3. SMS Safety showers

4. RMD -do-

5. LPG Storage LPG detectors, wind socks, water monitor

6. Power Plants Safety showers, boiler suit, flame retardant dress

7. Water Treatment

Plant

Chemical handling suit, PVC suit, chlorine

emergency kits, chlorine sensor and detectors, air

lines.




8. Fire Rescue

equipment.

Safety net and belt, ropes and lines, other rescue

equipment.

7.16 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

The modern definition of Occupational health is “The promotion and maintenance of the

highest degree of physical, mental and social well-being of workers in all occupations –

total health of all at work”.

Occupational health is concerned with physical, mental and social well-being in humans

in relation to his work and work environment, their adjustment to work and adjustment

of work to humans

ILOs‟ Occupational health services recommendation, 1959 (No. 112) aims with following:

Protecting workers against any health hazard, which may arise out of work or condition

in which it is carried on.

Contributing towards workers‟ physical and mental adjustment, in particular by

adaptation of work to workers and assignment to jobs in which they are suitable and;

contributing to establishment and maintenance of highest possible degree of physical

and mental social wellbeing of workers.

7.16.1 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH HAZARD

Hazard is defined as “Source or situation with a potential for harm in terms of injury or ill

health, damage to property, damage to the workplace environment, or a combination of

these”

1972 ILO/WHO Conference Recommendations:

Occupational health is a wide field, and during last decade relative importance of its

component parts has changed. This changing concept has been linked with scientific

progress in relation to occupational health and safety and also with changes in evolution

of work and work environment on part of individuals. In past emphasis was on safety,

now it is more on health and job satisfaction.

In 1976, 29th session of World Health Assembly directed Director General to promote

planning and implementation of comprehensive health programs for workers, as an

integral part of National Health Programs.

Legal Provisions

The Indian Constitution has shown notable concern to workmen in factories and

industries as envisaged in its preamble as Directive Principles of State Policy.

For securing the health and strength of workers, men and women

That the tender age of children is not abused

That the citizens are not forced by economic necessity to enter avocations

unsuited to their age or strength

Just and humane conditions of work and maternity relief are provided and,

That the Government will take steps, by suitable legislation or in any other way,

to secure the participation of workers in the management of undertakings,

establishments or other organizations engaged in any industry




The Factories Act, 1948, the Mines Act, 1952, the Dock Workers (Safety, Health &

Welfare) Act, 1986 are some of the laws, which contain provisions regulating the health

of workers in an establishment. Whereas the Employees State Insurance Act, 1948 and

the Workmen‟s Compensation Act, 1923 are compensatory in nature. These various legal

provisions to protect health and safety of the workers are given in Chapter 8. It may be

sufficient to indicate at this stage that metallurgical industries are classified as hazardous

industry and legal provisions must be adhered to avoid any harm to work force and local

residents in the vicinity of the industry.

Occupational health hazard in steel plants are of two types. One occupational health

hazard 1) common to all shops including Raw material/Product handling & 2) Hazards

specific to individual Major Shop.

Gen. Tor 8 (i) Details Of Existing Occupational And Safety Hazards. What Are

The Exposure Levels Of Above Mentioned Hazards And Whether They Are Within

Permissible Exposure Level (PEL). If These Are Not Within PEL, What Measures

The Company Has Adopted To Keep Them Within PEL So That Health Of The

Workers Can Be Preserved.

A) Existing Health hazards Common to a Steel Plant like M/s GFL are due to dust

in eye contact, skin contact, inhalation of toxic gas, ingestion, coming in contact

with molten metal or high temperature, and unpleasant sound level of running

machineries.

Dust

The iron ore and coal are stored in raw material yard. The main health hazard in

the storage yard is uncontrolled fugitive dust emission during loading/un loading

and transportation of material in the stock yard.

Eye Contact:

Airborne dust may cause immediate or delayed irritation or inflammation. Eye

contact with large amounts of dust particles can cause moderate eye irritation,

chemical burns and blindness.. Eye exposures require immediate first aid and

medical attention to prevent significant damage to eye.

Skin Contact:

Dust of coal, Iron ore and silicon may cause dry skin, discomfort, irritation,

severe burns and dermatitis. These dusts are capable of causing dermatitis by

irritation. Skin affected by dermatitis may include symptoms such as, redness,

itching, rash, scaling and cracking.

Inhalation

Breathing dust may cause nose, throat or lung irritation, including choking,

depending on the degree of exposure. Inhalation of high levels of dust can cause

chemical burns to the nose, throat and lungs. Inhalation of toxic gases beyond

TLV can even be fatal.

Ingestion:

Internal discomfort or ill effects are possible if large quantities are swallowed.




Burning

Burning is caused due to coming in contact with hot metal or bodies at high

temperature or corrosive chemicals like acid or alkali. Similarly cold burning and

blister formation is caused in coming contact with liquefied gases.

B) Common safety hazards in an Integrated Steel Plant are - Posture, Excess

Load, Harmful Contact By Cranes : Defective Tackles, Slings, Excess Load, Wrong

Signaling, Working Under Load, Unskilled Operator, Defects in Crane, Improper /

Unauthorized Handling and most important is stress

7.16.2 EXPOSURE LIMITS

The exposure limits for Manganese, Crystalline, silica, Coal Dust are as given in the

following table for awareness.

Airborne concentrations of chemical substances and represent conditions under which it

is believed that nearly all workers may be repeatedly exposed, day after day, over a

working lifetime, without adverse health effects are threshold limit values.

Permissible Exposure Level

The expansion project will have Induction Furnace and Rolling mill. The workmen while

handling raw material like sponge iron, pig iron or scrap may be exposed to Iron oxide

Fe2O3 fumes.

Ferric oxide fumes are red brown in color and have a metallic taste. As per OSHA

standard for 8hr working the Possible Exposure Limit is 10mg of Fe2O3 per cubic meter

of air (American standard 5mg/m3. Repeated exposure of iron ore fume over a period of

years may cause x-ray changes of lungs but does not cause the exposed person to

become ill. Exposure for 6 to 10 years is only recognized by X-ray. This may cause

pneumoconiosis and benign of pneumoconiosis is termed siderosis.

If a person breathes a large amount of iron oxide fume must be shifted to fresh air at

once and if breathing found to have stopped, artificial respiration to be given and

affected person to be kept warm and at rest and get medical attention as soon as

possible.

Preventive measure to keep emission within PEL

7.16.3 FIRST AID MEASURES

Following first aid measures shall be taken.

Eye Contact:

Rinse eyes thoroughly with water for at least 15 minutes, including under lids, to remove

all particles. Seek medical attention for abrasions and burns.

Skin Contact:

Wash with cool water and a pH neutral soap or a milk skin detergent. Seek medical

attention for rash, burns, irritation and dermatitis.

Inhalation:

Move person to fresh air. Seek medical attention for discomfort or if coughing or other

symptoms.




Falling from height

Proper scaffolding to withstand the load, use of safety belt and other PPEs can protect

from injuries.

Ingestion:

Vomiting not to be induced. If conscious, have person drink plenty of water. Seek

medical attention.

7.16.4 EXPOSURE CONTROLS AND PERSONAL PROTECTION

Exposure Controls:

Control of dust through implementation of good housekeeping and maintenance;

The bag filters will be installed to control dust emission.

Use of PPE, as appropriate (e.g. masks and respirators)

Use of mobile vacuum cleaning systems to prevent dust buildup on paved areas;

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE):

Respiratory Protection: When the dust level is beyond exposure limits or when

dust causes irritation or discomfort use Respirator.

Eye Protection: Wear Safety goggles to avoid dust contact with the eyes. Contact

lenses should not be worn when handling the materials.

Skin Protection: Wear impervious abrasion and alkali resistant gloves, boots, long

sleeved shirt, long pants or other protective clothing to prevent skin contact.

Preventive Measures

The storage yards are constructed and maintained as per the guidelines.

Regular weekly inspections of storage yards will be carried out with regard to

proper earthling, adequate firefighting facilities, any combustible materials,

prevention of growth of wild vegetation etc.

No naked fires will be allowed in and around coal storage areas and height of

coal/ coke heap should not be high to prevent auto ignition.

Stress

The process by which we perceive and respond to certain events, called stressors,

that we apprise as threatening or challenging.

Uncertainty at work place cause high level of stress. The cause of uncertainty can be

1) lack of information or instruction what exactly to do or lack of job knowledge. 2)

No job satisfaction i.e. boss is not happy with or what boss & colleagues think about

his/her ability or 3) receiving vague inconsistent instruction. 4) sometimes that work

place is not safe and catastrophe anticipated due to wrong operation.

With increased stress, blood pressure increases, productivity thoughts decrease and

destructive thoughts increase and there is likelihood of taking risky alternatives due

to poor judgment and there may be greater tendency of escape behaviors.

Alcohol & stress in combination are deadly and smoking is not the solution

considering its long-term harmfulness.




Communicating problems at work place to seniors, colleagues; asking in a positive

way and executing their guide lines and giving much importance to each & every job

that comes on the way can remove stress at work place.

Table 7.7 Health Hazard in Major Industries

Sl.

No.

Group Item Cause of

hazard

Potential

Health

hazard

Preventive

measures

I Raw

materials and

products

handling

Iron ore &

Coke,

Exposure to

dust during

Stock,

crushing,

screening,

conveyor

transfer &

charging

etc.

Eye/skin

irritation,

Respiratory

track diseases

Water sprinkling,

Dry fogging in

conveyors, ID fan,

bag filter, PPE like

safety shoes,

Coal , lime

stone/Dolo

Other fluxing

minerals

Acids/Alkalis Improper

Handling

PPE

II Major shops

DRI kiln flue gas CO,

dust, heat

Heat & Dust

Exposure

Burn, Eye/skin

irritation,

Respiratory

track diseases

Pollution Control

Equipments for

direct exhaust of

the gas

Captive power

plant

Fly ash,

explosion,

noise, vibration,

HT, electric

equipments,

Acid and alkali

Improper

cooling of

Boiler, Fire

in Cooling

Oil,

Maintenance

of switch

yards.

Electric shock,

injury due to

chemicals,

burn/ eye

injury

Use of PPE,

barricading high

voltage area.

III Utilities

Fuel gas

Distribution

Gas leaks Improper

Maintenance

Fire and gas

Poisoning

Use of PPE

Electric power

Supply

Short circuit Electric shock Use of PPE

IV All shops

Falling from

height

Collapse of scaffoldings

Breaking of slings

Injury,

breaking of

bone

Proper scaffolding

to withstand

Load and use of

safety belt

Tested from time to

time.

Falling of

heavy

Objects from

height

People working over

Head, next floor

Head injury Use of helmet and

safety shoes




Gen.Tor-8(ii) Details Of Exposure If The Workers’ Health Is Being Evaluated By

Pre Designed Format, Chest X-Rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision Testing(Far

& Near Vision, Color Vision And Any Other Ocular Defect) ECG, During Pre

Placement And Periodical Examinations Give The Details Of The Same. Details

Regarding Last Month Analyzed Data Of Above Mentioned Parameters As Per

Age, Sex, Duration Of Exposure And Departmental Wise.

From the periodic monitoring and annual health check up of the employee base of M/s

Gagan Ferrotech Ltd, no trend of disease vectors were identified correlating to the type

of job, or period of job for individuals.

Therefore, it may be inferred that the temporary ailments if identified within the

employee are not related to working conditions.

Gen.Tor-8(iii) Annual report of health status of workers with special reference

to Occupational Health and Safety.

Detailed health checkup report is attachedas Annexure V

7.17 OUTCOME OF SIA STUDY

7.17.1 CSR PLANNING

The plant is an integrated steel plant having semi-mechanized operation. It is a labor

intensive project. However, depending on the production schedule, there will be

additional technical labor engaged for operation.

The raw materials shall be transported through covered trucks by road up to the nearest

siding for further transportation by rail. And the finished products will be transported by

both rail and road. The transportation load will not add much to the existing load on the

said road system.




Appropriate plantation program shall be undertaken along with the developmental

program to at least cover the boundary areas with thick and tall plants for containment

of the air borne pollutants within the premises, which is duly reflected in the land use

plan.

There will not be any further infrastructural development other than needed for the

commissioning of the total project components. This expansion-cum-modification shall

utilize the existing infrastructural facilities for all purposes.

From the very beginning of the identification of community needs of the proposed

project location the thought process was to build the community strength empowering

them through socio-economical parameters like training and capacity building programs,

providing them opportunities in the field of livelihood and other income generating

activities, health services to see overall changes in the life pattern of the community.

(a) Self-Help Groups (SHG’s)

There are 4 numbers Women self-help groups, which are currently operating in the study

area. Women empowerment programs through Self-Help Groups have been extended to

10-20 nos. of new Women self-help groups in these three villages, particularly to learn

stitching & sewing for the community.

(b) Supports Social Welfare Organizations

M/s Gagan Ferotech Ltd. has vouched for support to some identified NGOs working

around the concerned areas for some of the identified causes aligning with several

government missions as recognized from the GAP analysis as follows;

Swachha Bharat Mission with a slogan of “Keep my Village Clean”- Targeting solid

waste management & Stopping Open Defecation.

Awareness programs to use toilets and make the village defecation free –

Engaging House wives and kids, as well as involving schools to propagate the

subject.

Engaging Swachha sevak educated girls to teach women above 20 years and

make them literate – So that if women in the house will be educated, then the

kids will as well.

Coordinate with the village committee to identify resources for employment /

education / sanitation program / community development programs and keep an

accountability of the spending for transparency.

(c) Healthcare Projects

The healthcare projects of M/s Gagan Ferotech Ltd. shall include facilitation of doctors in

the primary health care centers. Periodic woman health checkups. As a matter of social

responsibility, Gagan has vouched for one ambulance to be services 7 x 24 for these

three villages. Ambulance services will be extended to the local villagers during their

need. Prioritization of such shall be taken up for Women and Child issues.

(D) Livelihood Programme:-

As agricultural practices have faded away with intensity of industrialization, hence focus

should be given to back-yard organic farming for sustainable growth of vegetables and

fruits as a support to the livelihood program – this can be achieved by utilizing the

domestic waste for composting and self dependency for the non-working women

households.




(E) Infrastructure development

The company will spend 2% of the project cost in next five years for infrastructural

development in the direct influence area of the Plant. From the observation and GAP

analysis it is found that the deficit areas are to be addressed with proper infrastructural

facilities.

1. Rural electrification in railway colony areas, where approximately 30 households

need electrification.

2. There are no bus stop sheds in junctions of village roads with the main road.

Therefore on priority basis and as per the advisory committee of Peripheral

Development Committee, the sheds should be constructed within the means of

the Business organization.

3. On a regular basis, the access road to the Plant needs to be maintained with

either concrete or Tar felt roads for reduction in Air and noise pollution of the

area. However, this should be done with the collective fund of the regional

development plan as well.

7.17.2 PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN

M/s Gagan Ferotech Ltd Limited will make sincere efforts to improve the socio-economic

status of the local habitants. A welfare scheme will be prepared by the company for the

socio economic development of the area. The scheme will envisage promotion of

education in the adjoining villages by giving aid to the local schools, providing drinking

water facility and organizing health check up programs. Local people will be given free

seedlings to develop greeneries all around. The progress of the scheme will be reviewed

periodically and further action will be taken as deeming fit. Moreover as a bigger

responsibility, the local villagers will be motivated for social plantation instrumenting the

school kids. This plantation should be mostly fruit bearing in nature with average canopy

cover for pollution prevention. Periodic quality checks of the local drinking water will be

carried out, particularly in summer and rainy seasons and bring the same awareness

amongst the local villagers for safe drinking water.

7.17.3 CONTINUING ACTIVITIES

In this area due to industrial usage water level goes down. M/s Gagan Ferrotech

therefore supplies on a daily basis 3/ 4 water tankers for drinking water for the

peripheral villages starting from March to July every year. For these activities Gagan

spent Rs- 1.25 lakh every month for these villages along the same page, Gagan also

conduct health camps, sports activities, support to local cultural activities etc. as a

community welfare program as well as to be in good books of the villagers. Since last

few years, it has started free ambulance service to the villagers. M/s Gagan Ferrotech

commits to spend 100 lakhs rupees in CSR activities for next 5years.

7.17.4 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR IMPLEMENTATION

The concept of private-public partnership (PPP) should be applied in the effective

implementation of CSR i.e. government and business houses should act in collaboration

for the cause.

The Human Resource department (at the political and private level both) should

be entrusted with the responsibility of measuring and evaluating in CSR activities.




It can be done in two forms –(a) Direct results, such as, economic and financial

savings (b) indirect results like increase in employee satisfaction, less

absenteeism, less employee turnover evaluated by staff surveys

Periodic review of the CSR activities should be conducted by every business entity

so as to identify the pitfalls and the areas left out.

Innovation should essentially be a matter of concern; be it searching the

untouched areas and scope of CSR or the formulation of CSR strategy or the

implementation thereof.

NGOs should be encouraged to act in collaboration for the CSR activities under

different schemes and projects as they play a crucial role in the upliftment of the

masses.

7.17.5 CORPORATE SOCIAL POLICY DEVELOPMENT

The evolving Corporate Policy will be adjusted periodically based on the target areas and

their performance results, which shall be monitored by M/s Gagan ferrotech Ltd.

To benchmark a company‟s current operations and impact on society and the

environment in order to know how and where they can improve.

To show stakeholders that a company is investing in community and

environmental stewardship.

Whole point of a CSR report should be to understand and showcase how business

was conducted in the past so a company can plot a course to do better in the

future. While sharing the success of your CSR strategy is good, don‟t make the

mistake of dwelling on the past CSR successes and forget to focus on future

goals.

In addition, be absolutely clear about their future goals and how to plan to

achieve them. This will help the organization and their stakeholders to measure

the success of that particular plan.

7.17.6 IMPLEMENTATION METHODOLOGY TO ADOPT

All projects are planned in a participatory manner, in consultation with the community,

literally sitting with them, and gauging their basic needs. Industry management should

take recourse to "Participatory Rural Appraisal", which is a mapping process.

Subsequently, based on a consensus and in discussion with the village level, prioritize

requirements. And thus a project is born to implement. Implementation is the

responsibility of the community and management team, as is the monitoring of

milestones and the other aspects. Monitoring entails physical verification of the progress

and the actual output of the project.

Village meetings are to be held periodically to elicit feedback on the benefits to the

community programs and the areas where these need to be beefed up. Initially the

management of Gagan should try and ensure that while in the short term they have to

do enormous hand-holding, the projects become sustainable by the beneficiaries over

the long haul. Once this stage is reached, the management can withdraw and the

programs can be self sustainable. In this way we do not build a culture of dependence,

instead we make the villagers self-reliant.

For an efficient system and implementation practice, village committees are to be

formed which should send their representatives to the constituted peripheral




development committee, constituted with the industry / proponents, representatives of

the concerned village committee, local administrative representatives. This Peripheral

Development Committee shall prioritize the areas of work and work schedule, which shall

be jointly monitored by the Industry / proponent and the respective village committee.

After due completion of the project, the project results with financial implications, which

shall be shared with the Peripheral Development Committee for all transparency.

7.17.7 CSR REPORTING AND SHOWCASING

The primary intent of CSR Reporting is to attempt for portraying the relationship

between the Corporate and Community at large in order to enhance the communication

between the two for a sustainable growth of business. CSR reports go beyond the

financial facts and figures of interest to investors to describe a company‟s relations with

the full range of its stakeholders: employees, customers, communities, suppliers,

governments and the environment.

The nine categories of reporting parameters are: Social/Community; Philanthropy;

Integrated (Annual Financial and Non-Financial); Sustainability

(Environmental/Social/Economic); Corporate Responsibility (EHS / Community / Social);

Environment, Health and Safety and Community; Environment, Health and Safety;

Environment and Social; and Environment.

The financial implications of CSR activities may be registered in a format as given in the

table below, as well as be included in the general ledger for common accounting for

clarity and transparency. More so, it is a mandate by virtue of the CSR guidelines as per

the revised Company‟s Act 2016.

SL Category Activities Description of Location /

Area/Community Spending for

Year 2018-19*

Amount

Spent in

INR

1 Health &

Sanitation Drinking water

2 Health &

Sanitation Health Care

3 Education and

Literacy Education

4 Basic

Infrastructure

Roads &

Infrastructure

5 Community

Infrastructure

Community

Development

6 Social Cause Women

Empowerment

7 Social Cause Cultural

8 Awareness

Development

Awareness

program

Total




7.18 PUBLIC HEARING:

The Notice was published on 05.05.2018 in local daily “Ei Samay” and National English

daily” The Times of India” Kolkata edition for Public hearing of M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd,

Memo issued by WBPCB vide No. 236 (1-15) 2N-577/2003(F) dt- 07.05.2018 and memo

issued by Office of the District Magistrate & Collector Paschim Bardhaman vide Mo. No.

243/XXXIV/21/JM/18 on 23 May 2018 For proposed modification project of the existing

0.4 MTPA integrated steel plant to 0.3 MTPA by changing 1x35 T EAF to 1X 350 TPD DRI

Kiln and 2X20T Induction Furnace.

Subsequently Public Hearing was conducted on 06.06.2018 at 12.00 noon at Nazrul

Satabarsiki Hall (Jamuria Municipality Hall).




Newspaper Advertisement




Summary of Public Hearing report

The Public Hearing was conducted on 06.06.2018 at 12.00 noon onwards at Kazi Najrul

Satabarsiki hall (Jamuria Municipal Hall) Jamuria, Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal in

the presence of about 72 numbers of local people. The hearing started under the

chairmanship of Sri Kaushik Mukherjee (WBCS, Exe) Dy Magistrate , Dy Collector &

representative of District Magistrate, Paschim Bardhaman, Mr Samit Dutta, asst

environmental engineer, W.B Pollution Control Board, explained about the EIA

notification and about the proposed project of M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd to the public

present there. The Borough Chairman Seikh Shandar explained in a nut shell about

prioritization given to industries in WB. Mr Niranjan Gourasaria, President and Mr Sanjoy

Ghosh CEO of M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd, made the presentation about the proposed

project and gave the relevant answers to the queries raised by the public.




Compliance to Public Hearing MoM

Following participants made questions/ raised points in PH conducted on 06.06.2018 at

Kazi Najrul Satabarsiki hall (Jamuria Municipal Hall) Jamuria,

1.Abdul Haque -Jamuria

2.Pradeep Mukhopadhya - Jamuria

3.Ghanashyam jaiswal - Jamuria

4.Laxmikant Mukherjee - Jamuria

5.Akthar Mondal - Jamuria

6.Chanchal Banarjee - Ikrah

7.Sanjoy Ku Banarjee - Ikrah

8.Satyanarayan Rubani - Jamuria

Sl. No Points raised by

Public

Commitment of Project

Proponent

Action Plan

1 Public expressed

their concern

about

Pollution

APCD has been installed in

existsing units and levels are

meeting the discharge

standards

Online monitoring systems

has been installed in all major

stacks

Monitoring reports being sent

to MOEF, SPCB and CPCB and

displayed at plant gate and

company website.

APCD and CEMS will be installed before

plant commissioning.

Budget (Rs.400 lakhs) has been

earmarked in EMP

Job priority to

unemployed local

youths

PP agreed 250 people will be required for the

proposed expansion. Out of which 200

people will be skilled. Local employable

youths will be identified through the

Employment Exchange. They will be

trained for suitable jobs like fitter,

electrician, rigger, welder, mason, etc in

ITI at Asansol and Raniganj. Thereafter

they will be employed in the plant.

Measures for

abatement of

pollution

Already clarified and the

same will be done for the

proposed units

Afforestation PP had clarified that

plantation is a priority for

them and it is being done

continuously. They have

already planted 5715 trees

inside and outside the plant

premises.

Greenbelt area is 6.22 ha, where 10000

trees could be planted. GFL is continuing

the tree plantation drive.




2 The public have

also raised about

the CSR plan,

drinking water

facility, health

camps and

improvement of

living conditions

of women living in

below poverty

line.

CSR activities being done by

GFL.

CSR/ESC activities with budget are

proposed in next section

Frequency of health camps will be

increased. Now it will be done on

monthly basis.

Action will be taken to revive the sinking

bore wells by proper maintenance and

also insall new bore wells.

ESP for AFBC and DRI kilns with ID fan and high stack and Bag Filters for IFs and SAFs

with ID fans and high stacks, with energy meter for ESPs and online monitoring system

have already been provided and same will be implemented for the proposed facilities.

Specific ToR iv The PP may adopt any surrounding village and submit a plan for

development in terms of greenbelt, water management, community sanitation

etc.

ToR 11 Enterprise Social Commitment

As per the recent circular ESC has been restructured as CER

7.18 CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT RESPONSIBILITY

The capital budget for CER purpose is 1% of the project cost which will be done towards

the sustainability of project as well benefit of the public. As the cost of the project is

10000.00 lakhs so contribution towards CER will be 100 lakhs and points raised by public

will be taken care of.

It is reported in Socio-economic survey of the project area that only 76% of population

in 10km study area of project site are literate and women literate rate is further down,

hence emphasis on education has been given. 68% of this population are non workers

and mostly workers are agriculture workers, there fore local people will be given

education, training and there after employment as far as practicable in this project.

Sl.

No

Assignments Implementation 1st Year

Budget in

Lakhs

2nd Year

Budget in

Lakhs

1 Avenue Plantation 10,000 saplings to be planted and

maintained in nearby villages for

plantation.

7

3

2 Drinking Water 20 no‟s of sinking bore wells to be

restored & 10 no new bore wells to

be erected.

25

15

3 Women

Empowerment

Engaging under privilege women in

self help group to make them

sustainable

5

5

4 Refresher course to

the unemployed

A short term training course to the

local unemployed seeking

employment into the industry.

3

2

5 Energy efficient

street light

Existing halogen Electric bulbs in

and around the streets of the plant

4 1




premises to be altered with energy

efficient LED bulbs.

6 Strengthening of

approaching road

About two kilometer approaching

road to the plant site will be

strengthened, with the permission

of the local authority.

20 10

Year wise expenses 64 36

TOTAL 100

7.18 CONCLUSION:

Although worst cases of hazards have been identified for different facilities and their

mitigation measures have been given, still all operations will be carried out as per the

Standard Operating Procedures available for the Workers. To monitor these activities

Management with proper reporting System is required.




CHAPTER-8

PROJECT BENEFIT

The Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) had introduced the Corporate Social

Responsibility Voluntary Guidelines in 2009. These guidelines have now been

incorporated within the 2013 Act and have obtained legal sanctity. Section 135 of the

2013 Act, seeks to provide that every company having a net worth of 500 crore INR, or

more or a turnover of 1000 crore INR or more, or a net profit of five crore INR or more,

during any financial year shall constitute the corporate social responsibility committee of

the board.

The 2013 Act mandates that these companies would be required to spend at least 2% of

the average net-profits of the immediately preceding three years under CSR activities,

and if not spent, explanation for the reasons thereof would need to be given in the

director‟s report (section 135 of the 2013 Act).

Again for sustainability of the project and protection of environment the project

proponent has to spend 2.5% of its project cost towards ESC activities and this has to be

spent along with setup of project.

These are the indicators of benefits that an integrated steel project can give to the

society around it. Making profit should not be the sole aim of setting up an integrated

steel project. Sustainability of project and environment, which include the people in it

also.

8.1 PROJECT BENEFIT

Infrastructure development.

Direct & indirect Employment opportunity

Revenue generation to central & state government.

Allocation of 2 % of the profit towards CSR activities for the locality.

Spending 2.5% of project cost towards ESC activities as per the issues raised

by local public during Public Hearing.

Trickledown effect of enhance profitability to the local populace.

The comprehensive Environmental Management Plan will focus to completely reduce,

recover, recycling/reuse of treated waste water achieving a zero-discharge standard, the

maximum reuse of solid waste, adequate air pollution control measures so as to keep

the resultant of the ground level concentration well within the NAAQS residential norms

and the adequate green belt cover in one third of the project area for enhancement of

the local ecology. M/s GFL has already achieved Zero discharge for its existing unit and

planning to utilize all its waste products to achieve Zero waste and same principle will be

followed for the expansion project also. All these achievements will obviously nullify the

adverse impacts of the pollution problem. Then the beneficial impacts like the

employment opportunity, improvement in infrastructure facilities, improved business

opportunity etc. will obviously improve the socio-economic conditions of the locality.




8.2 INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT

Physical Infrastructure

The basic physical systems of a business or nation like Transportation, communication,

sewage, water and electric systems are all examples of infrastructure. These systems

tend to be high-cost investments; however, they are vital to a country's economic

development and prosperity.

Infrastructure is also an asset class that tends to be less volatile than equities over the

long term and generally provides a higher yield. As a result, some companies and

individuals like to invest in infrastructure for its defensive characteristics.

The quality and efficiency of infrastructure services play a pivotal role in achieving the

GDP growth target set for the country. The contribution of the private sectors and Public

sectors in development of infrastructure plays vital role in economic growth of India.

Social Infrastructure

Social Infrastructure is a subset of the infrastructure sector and typically includes assets

that accommodate social services.

Examples of Social Infrastructure Assets

Sector Examples

Health Medical facilities

Ancillary infrastructure (e.g. offices, car parks, training

facilities)

Education Schools (primary and secondary)

Tertiary facilities

Residential student accommodation

Housing State or Council housing

Defense force housing

Civic and Utilities Community & sports facilities

Local government facilities

Water and wastewater treatment

Transport Bus stands

Park and rides

Need-based road construction (excluding demand-risk toll

roads)

Corrections and Justice Prisons

Court houses

Environmental impacts

While infrastructure development may initially be damaging to the natural environment,

justifying the need to assess environmental impacts, it may contribute in mitigating the

"perfect storm" of environmental and energy sustainability, particularly in the role

transportation plays in modern society.

M/s Gagan Ferrotech Limited has already made and will continue to make physical

infrastructures like making new roads and repairing existing roads, pipe line for water

drawl, power transmission lines etc. as needed for its project and there by locality, state

and the whole country will be benefitted with this development.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Natural_environment

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sustainability

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modern_society




Under CSR activities M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd will develop social infrastructures like free

medical check-up and free medicine distribution, sports meet etc., with which the local

people will be highly benefitted.

8.3 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL

There has been direct employment, where local people have been given preference

according to their education and skill and same procedure will be followed for the

expansion projects also.

There will be additional direct and indirect employment for expansion project. Direct

employment will be 250. Total man power taking existing, expansion and contract labors

under housekeeping; canteen and security will be about 1,000. The breakup of

manpower will be as follows.

Category-wise break-down of manpower

Sl. No Shift Period Manpower available

1 A 6 AM to 2 PM 60

2 B 2 PM to 10 PM 60

3 C 10 PM to 6AM 60

4 O Off duty 30

4 General shift 9AM-1PM, 2PM -6 PM 40 (Sunday off)

Total 250

Indirect employment through contractors and ancillary industries like fly ash bricks etc.

will bring economic development of the area. Skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled people

will be get employment.

8.4 REVENUE GENERATION TO CENTRAL & STATE GOVERNMENT

Both state and central Govt. will earn through various taxes, excise, permit, license and services and improve their revenue.




CHAPTER-9 ENVIRONMENT COST BENEFIT

ANALYSIS

Environmental cost-benefit analysis, or CBA, refers to the economic appraisal of policies

and projects that have the deliberate aim of improving the provision of environmental

services or actions that might affect (sometimes adversely) the environment as an

indirect consequence. Vital advances have arisen in response to the challenges that

environmental problems and environmental policy pose for CBA. A number of reviews on

developments reveal continuing progress in techniques to value environmental changes.

Growing experience of these methods has resulted in, on the one hand, ever greater

sophistication in application and, on the other hand, scrutiny regarding their validity and

reliability. Distributional concerns have led to a renewal of interest in how appraisals

might throw light on questions about equity as well as efficiency, and there have been

substantial new insights for discounting costs and benefits in the far-off future.

Uncertainty about what is lost when environmental assets are degraded or depleted has

resulted in a number of distinct proposals although precaution is the watchword in each.

Just as importantly, there is a need to understand when CBA is used in practice and why

environmental decisions are often made in a manner apparently inconsistent with cost-

benefit thinking.

Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis has not been recommended at the scoping stage,

hence it has not been vividly analysed.




CHAPTER-10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (ADMINISTARATIVE)

10.1 EMP IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING

Various measures have been suggested in the EMP for mitigation of impacts in earlier

chapters of this EIA report. These have to be implemented according to the suggestions

and monitored regularly to prevent any lapse. This chapter deals with administrative

aspect of ensuring that mitigation measures are physically implemented and their

effectiveness monitored for improvement and implementation of corrective measure if

deterioration is observed.

A large part of the sampling and measurement activity will be concerned with long term

monitoring aimed at providing an early warning of any undesirable changes or trends in

the natural environment that could be associated with the steel plant facilities.

10.2 METEOROLOGY

A meteorological station will be set up at a suitable location to monitor wind speed &

direction, air temperature and humidity on a continuous basis. This data will be used to

identify the zones where air pollution levels due to release of pollutants will be more

than the permissible limits levels.

10.3 EMISSIONS AND AIR QUALITY

Work zone air quality shall be monitored once a month, to assess the levels of

particulate matter inside the steel plant complex. To the extent possible, on line

monitoring for PM, SO2, NOx, CO, and CO2 for each stack will be provided. At least 4 no.

of permanent AAQ station will be stationed around the steel plant and monitoring will be

conducted twice a week.

Emissions from other de-dusting stack will also be monitored once a month. However the

frequency of monitoring may be increased if the West Bengal State Pollution Control

Board desires so.

10.4 DRAINAGE SYSTEM

The effectiveness of the drainage system depends on proper cleaning of all drainage

pipes/channels. Regular checking will be done to see that none of the drains are clogged

due to accumulation of sludge/sediments etc. The clogged drains will be cleaned as soon

as possible, preferably the same day. The catch-pits linked to the storm water drainage

system from the coal handling areas will be regularly checked and cleaned to ensure

their effectiveness. This checking and cleaning will be rigorous during the monsoon

season, especially if rains are forecast.

10.5 WATER QUALITY

Raw water will be monitored daily. Drinking water being supplied inside the plant and the

township will be monitored at least once a week. Although there is no effluent discharge

outside the plant boundary, however bleed off from system either may be utilized for

firefighting or discharge after proper treatment.

Surface water & Ground water quality to be monitored twice in a year. Pre and Post

monsoon and trend to be observed and corrective measures to be taken.




10.6 NOISE LEVEL

Noise level at various equipments is to be measured once in every three months and

greasing, acoustic enclosure repair, foundation bolt tightening etc to be suggested.

10.7 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

Routine medical examination of personnel shall be carried out as systematic programs.

10.8 LABORATORY FACILITIES

The plant‟s chemical laboratory may be equipped and manned to carry out the necessary

Environmental monitoring work. Alternately other accredited laboratories may be

contracted for carrying out the necessary environmental monitoring.

10.9 UPDATING OF EMP

The periodicity of monitoring will be governed by the directives from statutory

authorities and prevailing regulations. The action plan of EMP will be updated every year

with respect to the results achieved and to plan activities for the next year.

10.10 ORGANISATION AND MANPOWER

M/s Gagan Ferrotech Limited is having Environmental Management Cell working under

Works Main Controller (WMC) who is also Organizational Head/Director. Environment

Pollution Control Cell with Head of Environment Division, Asst. Environment Engineers,

Chemist, laboratory technicians etc. are reporting to him. Again each plant has its

laboratory to take routine analysis.

The teams in co-ordination with each other look after Environmental aspects of the

project.

The routine work of EMC is as follows:

a. Regular monitoring of stack emission & fugitive emission and report any

abnormalities for immediate corrective measures.

b. Regular monitoring of ambient air quality in and around the plant.

c. Regular monitoring of re-circulating water quality, water quality of the storage

ponds, ground water quality and surface water quality.

d. Regular noise monitoring of the work zone and surrounding area.

e. Green belt plantation, maintenance, development of other forms of greenery

like lawns, nursery, gardens, etc. along the plant boundary and inside the plant

premises, Colony and Guest House.

f. Regular monitoring of solid wastes quantity and ascertaining avenues for

utilization of solid wastes.

g. Development of schemes for water conservation, rain water harvesting and

reuse of treated wastewater.

Various measures have been suggested in the Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

for mitigation of impacts. These have to be implemented according to the suggestions

and will be monitored regularly to prevent any lapse.




In addition to preparing an EMP, this permanent organizational set up also works to

ensure its effective implementation. Hence, proposed plant will create a team consisting

of officers from various departments to co-ordinate the activities concerned with

management and implementation of the environmental control measures. This team will

undertake the activity of monitoring the stack emissions, ambient air quality, noise level

etc. either departmentally or by appointing external agencies wherever necessary. The

department has a sophisticated Environment Laboratory. Regular monitoring of

environmental parameters will be carried out to find out any deterioration in

environmental quality and also to take corrective steps, if required, through respective

internal departments.

The cell will also be responsible for monitoring of the plant safety and safety related

systems which include:

Checking of safety related operating conditions.

Preparation of a maintenance plan and documentation of maintenance work

specifying different maintenance intervals and the type of work to be performed.

Other responsibilities of the cell will include:

Conduct and submit annual Environmental Audit. A SPCB registered agency will be

retained to generate the data in respect of air, water, noise, soil and meteorological data

and prepare the Environmental Audit report. Timely renewal of Consolidated Consents &

Authorization (CC & A) will also be taken care of.

Submitting environmental monitoring report to SPCB. Data monitored by the cell will be

submitted to the Board regularly and as per the requirement of SPCB. The cell will also

take mitigative or corrective measures as required or suggested by the Board.

Keeping the management updated on regular basis about the conclusions / results of

monitoring activities and proposed measures to improve environment preservation and

protection.

Conducting regular safety drills and training programs to educate employees on safety

practices. A qualified and experienced safety officer will be employed for the

identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and advice on

corrective actions, organize training programs and provide professional expert advice on

various issues related to occupational safety and health.

The comprehensive EMP will also include greenbelt development, disaster management

plan and the peripheral socio-economic development plan for the region. The impact

score with EMP is calculated and found to be slightly positive and hence the project may

be implemented. The EMP will implement by the “Environment Management Department

(EMD)” members created by the management of the plant.

Industrial activity can have harmful effects on ecological systems, climate and

public health. Recognizing this, Proponents are desired to be committed to reducing their

environmental footprint and promoting environmental stewardship at all levels of their

organizations. A company‟s goal must be aimed at minimizing its organization‟s impact

and maximize future generations‟ ability to live, work, play and shared natural

environment, with equal access to clean air, clean water, and natural resources.

Many corporations have established organization-wide environmental policies to define

and advance their environmental goals. An environmental policy sends a clear message

to employees, vendors, and the community at large that their company considers




environmentally intelligent practices an organizational priority. When a company adopts

such a policy, it‟s a meaningful first step in any effort to improve environmental

performance.

Gen.ToR-9(i) Does the company have a well laid down environment policy

approved by its board of directors?

M/s GFL has well defined Environment Policy which has been given below as supplied by

Project Proponent. The environment policy has been given below:

In the Policy the company has committed to work towards Environment protection,

prevention of Environmental pollution and Environment improvement around its business

unit and adopt sound environment practice to achieve sustainable growth.

Gen.ToR-9(ii) Does the environmental policy prescribes for standard

operating process/procedures to bring into focus any infringement/

deviation/Violation of the environmental or forest norms/ conditions?

It can be seen from the Environment policy of M/s GFL given below that the company

commits to comply with all applicable statutory and other norms/requirements for

environmental protection.

1. The SoP for all units already exists and is been mandated for all shop-floor

managers and supervisors to keep it handy for any time reference.

2. Each unit has a detailed unit drawing hung on the wall for ready reference of the

location and monitoring practice.

3. All accident and incident is documented and reported to the corporate hierarchy

based on severity of the incident.

4. The company has provided Lavaratories (both for gents and ladies), Canteen

Facility, Drinking water facilities at each working locations, Worker rest areas

equipped with large fans, Safety equipments like shoes, gloves, helmet and clear

goggles for workers, First Aid boxes in each unit locations as well as in Office and

Canteen areas.

The company has also maintained well developed Environment Managemnt System as

per ISO standards 9001:2015.

Gen.ToR-9(iii) What is the hierarchical system or Administrative order of

the company to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance

with the environmental clearance conditions?

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters like air, water, noise and soil as well as

performance of pollution control facilities and safety measures in the plant are important

for proper environmental management of any project. Therefore, the environment and

safety cell has already been formed to handle monitoring of air and water pollutants as

well as the solid wastes generation as per the requirements of State Pollution Control

Board and Central Pollution Control Board.




The company has an Environmental laboratory to analyze important pollution parameters

like pH & BOD of water, analysis of raw material, product, noise monitoring near various

equipments etc. However NABL/MoEF Accredited laboratory is being outsourced for

periodic monitoring of stack flue gas, ambient air quality, surface and ground water

quality and other various parameters.

The company has well defined budget towards EMP, Implementation & its yearly

maintenance.

Organization, manpower and hierarchical system

M/s GFL is having Environmental Management Cell(EMC) working under Works Main

Controller (WMC) who is also Organizational Head/Director. Environment Pollution

Control Cell with Head of Environment Division, Asst. Environment Engineers, Chemist,

laboratory technicians etc. are reporting to him. Again each plant has its laboratory to

take routine analysis.

The teams in co-ordination with each other look after Environmental aspects of the

project.

The routine work of EMC is as follows:

h. Regular monitoring of stack emission & fugitive emission and report any

abnormalities for immediate corrective measures.

i. Regular monitoring of ambient air quality in and around the plant.




j. Regular monitoring of re-circulating water quality, water quality of the storage

ponds, ground water quality and surface water quality.

k. Regular noise monitoring of the work zone and surrounding area.

l. Green belt plantation, maintenance, development of other forms of greenery

like lawns, nursery, gardens, etc. along the plant boundary and inside the plant

premises, Colony and Guest House.

m. Regular monitoring of solid wastes quantity and ascertaining avenues for

utilization of solid wastes.

n. Development of schemes for water conservation, rain water harvesting and

reuse of treated wastewater.

Various measures have been suggested in the Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

for mitigation of impacts. These have to be implemented according to the suggestions

and will be monitored regularly to prevent any lapse.

In addition to preparing an EMP, this permanent organizational set up also works to

ensure its effective implementation. Hence, proposed plant will create a team consisting

of officers from various departments to co-ordinate the activities concerned with

management and implementation of the environmental control measures. This team will

undertake the activity of monitoring the stack emissions, ambient air quality, noise level

etc. either departmentally or by appointing external agencies wherever necessary. The

department has a sophisticated Environment Laboratory. Regular monitoring of

environmental parameters will be carried out to find out any deterioration in

environmental quality and also to take corrective steps, if required, through respective

internal departments.

The cell will also be responsible for monitoring of the plant safety and safety related

systems which include:

Checking of safety related operating conditions.

Preparation of a maintenance plan and documentation of maintenance work

specifying different maintenance intervals and the type of work to be performed.

Other responsibilities of the cell will include:

Conduct and submit annual Environmental Audit. A SPCB registered agency will be

retained to generate the data in respect of air, water, noise, soil and meteorological

data and prepare the Environmental Audit report. Timely renewal of Consolidated

Consents & Authorization (CC & A) will also be taken care of.

Submitting environmental monitoring report to SPCB. Data monitored by the cell

will be submitted to the Board regularly and as per the requirement of SPCB. The

cell will also take mitigative or corrective measures as required or suggested by the

Board.

Keeping the management updated on regular basis about the conclusions / results

of monitoring activities and proposes measures to improve environment

preservation and protection.

Conducting regular safety drills and training programs to educate employees on

safety practices. A qualified and experienced safety officer will be responsible for

the identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and advise




on corrective actions, organize training programs and provide professional expert

advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health.

The comprehensive EMP will also include greenbelt development, disaster

management plan and the peripheral socio-economic development plan for the

region. The impact score with EMP is calculated and found to be slightly negative

and hence the project may be implemented. The EMP will implement by the

“Environment Management Department (EMD)” members created by the

management of the plant.

Gen.ToR-9(iv)Does the company have system of reporting of non-

compliances/violations of environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the

company and/ or share holders or stake holders at large.

10.11 FUNCTIONS OF EMP CELL

Functions of EMP cell of M/s GFL are as follows:

a) Maintaining Records

In line with the best practice, M/s GFL has established and maintained a system of

records to demonstrate compliance with the environmental management systems and

the extent of achievement of the environmental objectives and targets. In addition the

other records (legislative, audit and review reports), management records also address

the following:

Details of failure in compliance and corrective action;

Details of indigents and corrective action;

Details of complaints and follow-up action;

Appropriate contractor and supplier information;

Inspection and maintenance reports;

Product identification and composition data;

Monitoring data;

Environmental training records.

b) Audit

As a mandatory requirement under the Environment Protection Rules (1986) as

amended through the Notification issued by the Ministry of Environment and Forests in

April 1993, an Environmental Statement should be prepared annually. This should

include the consumption of total resources (raw material and water per tons of product),

quantity and concentration of pollutants (air and water discharged, quantity of hazardous

and solid waste generation, pollution abatement measures, conservation of natural

resources and cost of production vis-à-vis the investment on pollution abatement. This

may be internal or external audits, but carried out impartially and effectively by a person

properly trained for it. Broad knowledge of the environmental process and expertise in

relevant disciplines is also required.

c) Environmental Monitoring

Regular monitoring programs of the environmental parameters are essential to take into




account the changes in the environment. The objective of monitoring is:

To verify the result of the impact assessment study in particular with regards

to new developments;

To follow the trend of parameters which have been identified as critical;

To check or assess the efficiency of the controlling measures;

To ensure that new parameters, other than those identified in the impact

assessment study, do not become critical through the commissioning of new

installations or through the modification in the operation of existing facilities;

d) Objectives and Targets

The objectives should be set with a view to realizing gradual and steady improvements

in environmental performance through application of best available and economically

viable technology.

e) Reporting

Performance with respect to monitoring results of various parameters is to be reported in

writing to unit Head as well as statutory body like SPCB. Unit head in turn to intimate

share holders and all stake holders.

Incident Reporting Mechanism




CHAPTER-11 SUMMARY & CONCLUSION

Introduction

M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd. has its integrated steel plant located at Jamuria Industrial

Estate, At/PO- Ikra, Dist: -Burdwan, WB with latitude 230 41’ 42.40’’ N and longitude

870 06’ 59.15’’ E & elevation 105m AMSL. The unit is running since 2004 and company

applied& was granted EC to enhance its production capacity from 0.1 MTPA to 0.4 MTPA

TMT rods and power generation from 12 MW to 24 MW vide J-11011/232/2010-IA-

II(I),dtd. 11th Mar.2015.The company commissioned some of the facilities granted in

EC. At this stage company faced difficulties and in order to overcome difficulties the

company has proposed to replace some of the facilities granted in EC by new facilities

and thereby reduce the steel production capacity from 0.4 to 0.3 MTPA

The site is well connected with road and rail. The project site at Jamuria is well

connected with industrial Belt of Raniganj & Asansol west to project site. The NH-

2(Grand trunk road) 5.41Km away from the plant site is passing South of the project

site. Jamuria Road is 300m away in North direction of project site Jamuria Road is

connected to NH 60 which is 3.0 km away from the plant site and connects the NH 2 as

well. The site is about 175 km away from Kolkata city. A number of private &

government buses connect Durgapur Steel city with Kolkata city, the rest of West Bengal

and Jharkhand.

There is future growth for steel plants as consumption of per capita steel is yard stick of

growth measurement of a developing country and India has per capita steel consumption

only 65kg in comparison of 430 kg for China and 180 kg for the world today.

Project description

The proposed project is modification of 0.4 MTPA integrated steel project of category-A,

proposing to add 1x350 TPD DRI Kiln, 2x20T IF with CCM to existing 4x100 TPD DRI

Kilns and 3x20T IFs and enhance the production capacity of existing Re-rolling mill from

1x342 TPD to 1x1000 TPD make it Hot rolling mill abolishing re-heating Furnace, so as to

reduce final production capacity to 0.3 MTPA.

Raw material requirement and transportation will be as follows.

Sl.

No

Name of Major Raw

material

Required gross

quantity in TPA


Transportation

1 Hematite Iron Ore

Lump/Pellet

3,96,000 Barbil, Odisha Rail


2 Imported & indegeneous

coal

2,90,000 Import &

Raniganja

Rail/Ship






8 Scrap 30,000 Local Road

Majority of Raw material will be transported by rail to the siding nearby and rest by

road. All the time material will be transported fully covered and in case of vehicles must

be environmental compatible.




Water requirement

Fresh makeup water required for the project after expansion has been estimated to be

about 1077 m3/day, which includes requirement for captive power plant also. For steel

production, it is coming 1.01 m3/T of crude steel. This will be achieved by waste water

treatment and reuse in the process.

The probable source of supply of raw water for the project shall be from Jamuria

Municipality supply. Water intake facilities at source and conveying main shall be

provided for ensuring raw water supply to plant on a continuous basis.

Power requirement& generation

Power requirement for the project has been estimated to be 48 MW and generation will

be 24 MW. Balance power will be purchased from DVC. Agreement has been made with

DVC for supply of 25 MVA

The requirement of power for project will vary with stages of development. Even after

the commissioning of the captive powers, grid support will be required. Construction

power Would be taken from available 132KVA/220KVA line for which discussion is under

progress with WSEB. Construction power required for the proposed plant will be about

500kVA.

Manpower Requirement

Based on the unit operations & services, it is estimated that the total requirement of

manpower for the facilities proposed will be about 250 persons

Description of Environment

For the preparation of EIA report a monitoring schedule covering non-monsoon period of

the year was carried out from Nov 2017 to January 2018. The impact identification

started with collection of baseline data such as existing ambient air quality, qualities of

ground water, surface water, soil, noise level prevailing in the area and meteorological

parameters like temperature, humidity, wind speed and direction, cloud cover etc.

Land

The company has in its possession total 18.85 ha of land in which existing plant is

running and expansion is proposed to come up in available vacant area of this land.

The general land use/land cover features of the buffer zone include village settlements,

Single crop agricultural land, open forest, industries and institutions.

Climate

The climate in the study region is generally dry and hot and is characterized with

seasonal variations of temperature, humidity, rainfall etc.




Winter December to February

Summer March to May

South west monsoon season Julyto September.

Post Monsoon season October and November

Temperature of the area varies from 6.80C in December to about 450 in May. Relative

Humidity varies from 47% to 81%.

Rain fall


June to September. Light showers occur during the months of October and November.

The average annual rainfall of the study area is 1440 mm

Soil

Most of the study area is filled with fine grained sandstone and silt stone with coal

seams. Other parts are filled with gritty pebbly sandstone with coal seams,

miscellaneous shell & sandstone and clay alternating with silt & sand.

Ambient Air quality

PM10 varied from 109.2-57.2 µg/m3 and PM2.5 varied from 54.1-32 µg/m3 while SO2 varied

from 24.3-10.8 µg/m3 and NOx varied from 33.6-13.7 µg/m3, CO from 740-473 µg/m3

Mixing Height

The minimum mixing height at M/s GFL project area is 40m and maximum mixing height

is 1150m.

Geology

This area is overlain by a thin alluvial cover and forms a transition zone between hard

rock and flat gently sloping alluvial terrain. The alluvial area stretches eastwards beyond

Jamuria to the rest of the district. The thickness of alluvial cover in the Durgapur area

increases in the eastward direction. The master slope of the district is from west to east

and southeast with the land having the highest altitude at the extreme western corner of

approx. 150m msl to about 10m near Kalna at the eastern border of the district. Laterite

and red soil in the western part of the district and Vindhyan and Gangetic alluvium in

rest of the area observed. The district remarkably presents the entire geological

succession from Archaean to recent.

Hydrogeology

The study of the interaction between groundwater movement and geology can be quite

complex. Groundwater does not always flow in the subsurface down-hill following

the surface topography; groundwater follows pressure gradients often following fractures

and conduits in circuitous paths. Taking into account the interplay of the different facets

of a multi-component system often requires knowledge in several diverse fields at both

the experimental and theoretical levels. The following is a more traditional introduction

to the methods and nomenclature of saturated subsurface hydrology, or simply the study

of ground water content.

Hydrogeological study helps in prediction of future behaviour of an aquifer system, based

on analysis of past and present observations.




Ground Water

Dug wells are more common in the study area. Nearly 30% of the wells are shallow type

and water table is within 8m depth. The deep dug wells are up to a depth of 17m. The

study of fluctuation in ground in groundwater levels by the groundwater board (CGWB)

reveals that the fluctuation is in the order of 2.23m -4.23m bgl during pre-monsoon &

1.82m to 2.3m bgl during post-monsoon.

Surface Water

The main drainage network of the study area includes River Ajay and its tributaries in

the form of canals and streams. The river has about 70% of its basin just upstream

of Jamuria town. This upper catchment of Jharkhand plateau, the plateau, generates

heavy run-off during high rainfall and is carried to Jamuria in a short time.

The directions of flow of most of the rivers are controlled by slope which in general is

towards North to South East as it was evident from the flow of the rivers in the study

area and the availability of groundwater in the region.

Drainage pattern

The main drainage network of the study area includes River Ajay and canals. The

directions of flow of most of the rivers are controlled by slope which in general is from

North to South East as it was evident from the flow of the rivers in the study area

Traffic study

The average peak vehicular traffic (238 Nos = 354 PCU) monitored was recorded

between 9.00-10.00hrs. The lowest vehicular traffic load (62 Nos=92 PCU) was recorded

between 03.00-04.00hrs.

Average PCU (passenger car unit) of the existing two-lane is counting to 177.7/hr.

Taking peak hour in to consideration it is estimated to be 532 PCU/hr.

M/s GFL is likely to transport 1.67 lakh tons of Raw material per annum and maximum

3.0 lakh tons product through road. Hence additional PCU/hr., considering to and fro

running of heavy vehicles, other allied works and engagement of 210 additional

manpower will be (9 heavy vehicles/hr + 6 light vehicles/hr + 17 two wheelers/hr) 48

PCU/hr. Hence total load on two-lane road will be 225.7 PCU/hr. The existing road can

absorb this additional load without jamming condition although entry and exit to factory

campus will not be preferred during peak hour existing load.

Flora and Fauna

Flora and Fauna of the study area reveals that no Schedule- I fauna found in the study

area. In faunal population; cattle, goats, dogs, rats, insects are common in the study

area.

Rare and Endangered Plant species

As per IUCN's "Red Data Book", none of the taxa found in this region could be marked as

rare or endangered plant species.

Demographic Pattern

The socioeconomic features around the 10 km radius of the plant site have been

collected through primary and secondary data collection. The study area covers 37

villages and 1,77,328 inhabitants. Out of the total population SC population is 30.2%, ST

9.0% and other 60.8% The demographic and socioeconomic profiles are collected from




the Primary Census Abstract for the study area of district Paschim Burdwan, West

Bengal.

Literacy:

The Literacy rate of study area is 62.5% of the total population. The above data plot

showing the ratio of men to female literate and illiterates in the study area shows that

though the villages lack the facilities for education yet the picture of female literate (40

%) and male literate(59 %) gives a encouraging picture of the development of the area.

Yet the literacy level is still gloomy with 37 % of the total population being illiterate.

Occupational Pattern

The distribution of workers in the study area has been estimated on the basis of Census

2011. It is clear that the workers in the study area comprised of 22.8 % main workers,

9.3% marginal workers and 68% non-workers. The main workers mainly comprise of

cultivators and agricultural laborers.

Pollution and its source from project and mitigation measure

After installation of APC the resultant GLC of all pollutants will remain within NAAQ

Standard prescribed limit

Solid waste management

Sl.

No



2 Induction Furnace Slag 40,000 To be used as river sand

substitute after grinding and

residual Fe recovery

3 Fly ash from DRI 40,000 To be dumped in OCP of ECL

mines and road making

Sl.

No. Section/ Unit Operation

Emission released

waste generated

Types of

pollution

APC Proposed

1. Raw Material

and scrap

Handling

Stock, crushing,

screening, conveyor

transfer & charging

etc.

Fugitive dust

emission

Air pollution

Noise pollution

Bag Filter

2 Induction

Furnace

Melting of sponge

iron, pig and scrap

Fume and slag Air pollution Bag Filter

3 DRI Kilns Direct reduction of

Iron oxides to Metalic

Fe

Flue gas, Dolcher.

Ash & mill accretion

Air pollution

Thermal

pollution, Soil

contamination

ESP, WHRB

4 SAF Thermic process of

making Ferro alloys

Dust and Fume Air pollution Bag filter

5 AFBC Steam generation for

turbo generater

Flue gas, Fly & bed

ash

Air pollution &

Soil pollution

ESP









7 Fe-Mn slag 16,500 To be used as raw material for

Si-Mn production


9 Fe-Cr Slag 10,600 Residual Fe-cr to be recover by

jigging and there after will be

used for road making

Hazardous waste management

Hazardous waste generated from the project are raisins from DM plant, spent oils, lead

cells which are to be handed over to authorized dealers/suppliers.

Waste water management

The company will draw fresh water 3724.80 m3/day for process use. Contaminated

waste water from process will be settled, treated and reused in process, balance waste

water will be consumed in green belt or water sprinkling for dust control. Domestic waste

water will be disposed to soak pit.

No untreated waste water will be discharged outside project boundary.

Project cost

Theexpansion project cost has been estimated to be Rs 100.00 crore. This will include

pollution control equipments which will be installed along with process equipments.

Project completion

Estimated time of implementation of the project from application for ToR to

commissioning is 24 months after getting Environmental Clearance.

Environmental Monitoring

Eight locations have been selected covering core and buffer zone of the project area.

These locations have been selected taking prevalent wind direction, sensitiveness and

population in to consideration. Hera ambient air monitoring stations will be installed for

regular monitoring of various parameters and reporting of abnormality to be reported to

management for remedial measure. Regular reporting to be made to Pollution control

authority also.

Online stack monitoring will be done with direct reporting to WBSPCB. Process tripping

with failure of pollution control equipments will be interlocked. ESPs will have energy

meter and bypassing of ESP and venting through ABC will not be done.

The project has a well defined Environmental and safety policy.

Budgetary provision for EMP

The company will invest 4 Crore (about 4 % of total project cost) as capital investment

towards implementation of Environmental Management Plan. The Annual recurring cost

will be about 40 lakhs.

Rain harvesting




The annual average rain fall in project area is about 1440mm. Rain water will be

harvested from roof tops concrete floorings etc and will be stored and used in plant

during lean period of river.

Green belt

Existing has a well developed green belt around boundary and along the side of internal

roads. This will be further strengthened by making three tier plantations along boundary

wall. The greenbelt around the periphery as well as along roadside/and sub-paths of

project area will be totaling to about 33% of land area in line with the National

Environmental Policy 2006 of Government of India.

CREP guide line

The company will comply to all the points of CREP guide line for integrated steel project.

Public Hearing

Public hearing was conducted by WBSPCB on 06.06.2018 at 12.00 noon at Kazi Najrul

Satabarsiki hall (Jamuria Municipal Hall) Jamuria, Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal with

one month notice to public through local and national daily to attend the meeting. Public

opinion and their issues and commitment of PP was recorded, majority of the people

were in favour of the proposed project.

CER

The company will spend 100 lakh of its project cost for sustainability of project and its

Environment. This will be spent along the construction activities of the project and cover

all the issues raised by public during Public Hearing and as committed by project

proponent or his representatives.

CSR

For peripheral development the company will have a CSR committee, headed by one of

its Directors and with union representatives and local administration. The committee will

recommend expenditure and fix priority of implementation and adhere to guide line of

section 153 of companies Act 2013 and socio-economic study of project study area.

To sum up, after implementation of this project by M/s Gagan Ferrotech Ltd there will

be resource utilization, employment generation, development of infrastructure,

improvement of sanitary condition, education& training, development of market and

overall peripheral development with marginal increase in environmental pollution which

will also remain within safe limit as prescribed by CPCB.




CHAPTER -12 CONSULTANT PROFILE

(A Techno-Enviro Consultant)

(Earlier Named as Global Experts)

NABET Accreditated consultant (Serial No 75) & SPCB, Odisha Empanelled

Consultant.

M/s Global Tech Enviro Experts Pvt. Ltd. (GTEEPL) is a professionally managed quality

conscious organization, which provides environmental solutions to various industrial

organizations with sustainable growth and environmental friendly ecosystem. It is a

competent technical organization providing environmental solutions with latest technical

know how, legal advice, liasioning with various authorities and community at large. More

than 60 industries have engaged Global Experts as their consultant to obtain

environmental & statutory clearances from various statutory bodies and Government

Agencies. Presently more than 10 nos. of Integrated Steel Plants (Signed MoU with Govt.

of Orissa) have engaged Global Experts for carrying out their EIA/ EMP Studies and other

allied environmental clearances. The Global Experts is the first consultant in Orissa to

prepare REIA/ EMP Study report for 1.5 MTPA Integrated Steel Project in Orissa.

Recently Global Experts is been engaged in environmental clearance from MoEF, New

Delhi, VISA Steel Ltd., ACC Bargarh Cement Works, Dungri Limestone Quarry, SPS Steel

and Power Ltd., Maithan Ispat Ltd., various mines of Adhunik Metaliks Ltd. M/s Global

Experts is the first consulting firm in Eastern and North-Eastern region of India to

undertake the EIA/EMP Study along with Liasioning for MoEF clearance for Vedanta

International University Project. Global Experts has a distinct track record in the field of

liasioning with local public in order to carry out Public Hearing jobs for different Steel

Plants to their utmost satisfaction. Our Internal resources and technical acumen blended

with highest degree of Public Relationship has been our strength in providing a total

solution for Environmental aspects of Mines and Industries.

The technical team of Global Experts has wide experience in design, engineering,

erection & commissioning of various pollution control devices, carrying out statutory

Audits, drawing of water pipe line, Water and Air Quality modeling, Mine Plans, designing

of Intake Well and other technical assignment for various industries.

Global Experts is also deeply involved in Hazardous Waste Audits, and Water Harvesting

Projects etc. We are associated with Administrative Staff College of India (ASCI) for the

hazardous waste Inventorisation of all industries in Orissa for their initial preparation.

SERVICES:-

Environmental:

Environment Impact Assessment

Environmental Management Plan

Pollution Prevention & Control (Design, Installation & Maintenance of ETPs, Air Pollution

Control Equipment).




Preparation of Comprehensive EMP mitigation measures, advising on air pollution

control, wastewater treatment.

Municipal Solid Waste Management (Vermin-technology & Bio-Technology), Industrial

Waste, Urban Waste

Environmental Monitoring & Survey.

Greenery Management (Plantation, Maintenance, Nursery raising & Sailing of seedling)

Watershed Management

Liasioning with OSPCB, CPCB & MoEF

Environment Auditing, Energy Auditing, Assessing the performance of environmental

systems, environmental liabilities.

Bio-medical Waste Management

Third Party Hazardous Waste Audit

Environmental Monitoring (Air, Water, Soil)

Laboratory Testing of different samples in Laboratory

Techno-Functional:

Site Selection & Procurement of land.

Design, Erection & Commissioning of industrial units, water treatment plant, Effluent

Treatment Plant, Sewage Treatment Plant etc.

Preparation of Mining Plan, Environmental Clearance, Forest Diversion Proposal

Rehabilitation & Reclamation.

Liasioning with statutory authorities.

Mechanical Fabrication.

Engineering Designing

Turnkey Projects

Preparation of DPR for Integrated Steel Plants

Preparation of DPR for MSW Management practices

Preparation of Feasibility Report for Water Pipeline & Intake-well Design, Supervision &

Commissioning

Design, Erection & Commissioning of Dust Suppression Equipments like Sprinkler

System, Dry Fog System & Scrubber etc.

Dust Extraction System like Cyclone & Bag filter.




Legal Liasioning:

We Advise on various legal matters related to industries / mines, and represent on

behalf of clients in interacting with various authorities. We always keep up with the latest

Notifications, Circulars of the authoritative bodies for appropriate advice to our clients.

We have 87% client retention been maintained over last 7 years, which speaks of our

credibility and level of customer service.

The list of participatory functionaries in preparation of this EIA is enclosed below along

with the credentials validating the firm for this purpose.

Declaration by Experts contributing to the EIA of M/s. Gagan Ferrotech Limited

EIA CO-ORDINATOR & FUNCTIONAL EXPERTS

of GAGAN FERROTECH LIMITEDenvironmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/... · EIA/EMP REPORT for...

Documents

Transcript of of GAGAN FERROTECH LIMITEDenvironmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/... · EIA/EMP REPORT for...